Exhibit 1 - Plans and Specifications.pdf — Corona City Council, August 6, 2025 (part 2 of 3)

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete”

3. Other applicable building and CalGreen code requirements

4. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings Chapter 8.

5. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting

6. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

7. ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Concrete Structures

8. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

9. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction §303-1.10 “Curing.” C. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

D. Cure finished surfaces using methods and duration similar to that for adjacent concrete.

E. If fresh concrete may check or crack prior to commencement of curing due to weather, materials used, or other reasons, keep concrete damp but not wet using indirect fine water spray until it is unlikely checking or cracking will occur, or until curing commences.

F. Concrete curing shall proceed as follows:

SURFACE DESCRIPTION
Unstripped
Forms
Method 1: Wet wood forms completely after concrete has been placed, and keep wet with water until forms are removed.

For steel forms, keep exposed concrete surfaces continuously wet until forms are removed.

If forms are removed within 14 days of placing concrete, continue curing as described for surfaces with forms removed
Construction
Joints between
Footings &
Walls
Method 2 (Moist Curing): Cover surface with at least 2 layers burlap or cotton mats.

Wet mats with water for duration of 14-day curing period until concrete in walls has been placed.

Horizontal non-architectural flatwork, including roadways, slabs, curbs, and walks may also be watercured by ponding or by covering with 2” of saturated sand in lieu of burlap or cotton mats.

Do not apply curing compound to joint surfaces.

Encasement
Concrete
Method 3: Cover surface with moist earth 4 to 24 hours after concrete is placed.

Earthwork operations that may damage concrete shall not begin until ≥7 days after concrete is placed.

Concrete
Surfaces not
Described
Elsewhere
Method 2 (Moist Curing) (described above)
Method 4 (Curing Compounds): As soon as concrete hardens enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and within 2 hours after form removal, spray surface with 2 coats liquid curing compound at minimum 75-psi pressure and uniform coverage of ≤400ft2/gallon each coat.

Apply first coat as soon as finished concrete surface reaches uniformly damp appearance with no free water on surface.

Allow first coat to dry up to 4 hours, then apply 2nd coat perpendicular to 1st coat.

Respray concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound application by method and at coverage specified.

Protect concrete surfaces to which curing compound is applied for duration of curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic or causes that will disrupt continuity of curing membrane.

Do not damage seal during curing.

If seal is damaged or broken, reapply curing compound over damaged portion.

Where curing compound is accidentally applied to surfaces against which concrete is to be subsequently placed, remove curing compound by wet sandblasting just before placing new concrete.

Where concrete is placed adjacent to panel coated with curing compound, apply curing compound to previously coated panel areas within 6’ of joint and apply to other locations where curing membrane is disturbed.

Following curing, remove visible traces of curing compound without damaging surface finish.

Appearance is a primary consideration for concrete surfaces exposed to view.

Apply curing compound evenly on these surfaces.

Repair variations in shade, color or tint, resulting from uneven application of curing compound.

Floor Slabs on
Grade
Method 5 (Curing Blankets): Before curing medium is applied, keep entire surface damp using nozzles that atomize flow so surface is not marred or washed.

Apply curing material using Method 4 (Curing Compounds) described above.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing - 5 of 6

SURFACE DESCRIPTION
After 1 hour but not more than 4 hours after applying curing material, wet surface with water delivered through fog nozzle.

Place concrete curing blankets on slab, with edges butted together and with joints between strips sealed with 2” wide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped at least 3” and fastened with waterproof cement to form continuous watertight joint.

During first 3 days of curing, do not permit traffic or depositing of materials on curing blankets.

After 3 days, traffic or material deposits shall only occur on top of ⅝” minimum plywood sheets laid over curing blankets.

Leave curing blankets in place for ≥14 days.

Add water under curing blanket as necessary to maintain damp concrete surfaces.

Do not remove curing blankets until concrete for adjacent Work has been placed.

Should curing blankets tear or become damaged, replace damaged sections.

G. Dispose of excess curing water in manner that avoids damage to Work.

H. Hot-weather curing shall proceed as follows:

1. If surface moisture evaporation rate as determined by nomograph in ACI 305R, is expected to be >0.2 psf per hour such as to cause plastic shrinkage cracking, make provision for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, or wet covering with light colored material in advance of placement.

2. Take such protective measures as quickly as finishing operations allow.

I. Allow concrete to cure ≥14 days before applying architectural finishes.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for field testing and inspection of concrete.

B. Special inspection and field testing of Class AA and Class A concrete required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1705.3) shall be completed by ICBO-certified special inspector selected by City and shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Class AA
Concrete, Class
A Concrete and
Concrete having
f’c exceeding
2500 psi
Curing
Temperature
and
Techniques
ACI 318 §26.4.7-26.4.9 Periodic per CBC
Table 1705.3
City Contractor to
reimburse
City for costs
of first
deputy
inspector if
re-inspection
is required
Curing
Compound
Mixing
Verification
Verify curing compound has
been mixed before spraying
As directed City City
Local
Application
Rate
Within 50ft2 per gallon of
specified rate per California
Test 535
As directed Contractor Contractor
Average
Application
Rate
Within 25ft2 per gallon of
specified rate per California
Test 535
As directed Contractor Contractor
Curing Period Moist Curing Record surface moisture
conditions in daily log
1 inspection per day Contractor Contractor
ImperviousSheet Curing Record condition of
covering and tightness of
laps and tapes in daily log
1 inspection per day Contractor Contractor
Hot-Weather
Protection
Record temperature in daily
log
1 inspection per day
and hourly for 1st 24
hours upon removal
of protection
Contractor Contractor
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing - 6 of 6

3.4 Protection
A. Protect concrete against injury until final acceptance by City.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 1 of 10
SECTION 03 60 00

GROUTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cement grout, quick-setting grout, dry-pack grout, nonshrink grout, topping grout, structural repair grout, and pressure grouting other than for masonry.

B. Use quick setting grouts for setting posts and anchors in concrete or masonry.

C. Use non-shrink grout for setting bearing plates.

D. In places of high temperature or fire hazard, use non-shrink grout Class I, and not Class II.

E. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-7, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete grouted system with applicable embedments, including appurtenant structural, mechanical, and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Plant testing of aggregate shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aggregate Sieve Analysis ASTM C136 1 each trial batch City Contractor Amount
passing #200
sieve
ASTM C117 1 each trial batch City Contractor
Fine
Aggregate
Sand
Equivalent
ASTM D2419 As directed City Contractor
Organic
Impurities
ASTM C40 As directed City Contractor
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 2 of 10

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Soundness ASTM C88 As directed City Contractor
C. Plant testing of grout shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Grout Certification of
Mix Design
ACI 301 certified by independent
testing laboratory
1 per mix Contractor Contractor
Strength
Requirements
Applicable specified ASTM Standards
tested at 28 days
1 per product type Contractor Contractor
Grout
Materials
Materials
Inspection
Refer to Paragraph 2.2 below As directed City City

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregate.

2. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

3. ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Sand for Concrete.

4. ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

5. ASTM C109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2” Cube Specimens)

6. ASTM C117 Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

7. ASTM C136 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.

8. ASTM C150 Portland Cement.

9. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

10. ASTM C496 Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

11. ASTM C531 Linear Shrinkage and Cioefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concrete

12. ASTM C579 Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes

13. ASTM C580 Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes

14. ASTM C827 Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures

15. ASTM C939 Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)

16. ASTM 1090 Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout

17. ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).

18. ASTM C1116 Fiber-Reinforced Concrete

19. ASTM D695 Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

20. California Test No. 217 Sand Equivalent

21. California Building Code (CBC)

22. CRD-C 621 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout

23. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Product Data required for bonding compounds, non-shrink grout, repair grout, topping grout, and water reducing retardant per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation or Application instruction requirements for each type of manufactured grout.

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit color samples for grout mortar on request. Mortar color shall match adjacent Work.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 3 of 10

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Certificate of Compliance Submit mill test certification including fineness for each shipment of cement per ACI 301.

Submit aggregate gradation and certification per ACI 301.

Submit admixture certification including chloride ion content per ACI 301.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification grouts contain no chlorides or corrosive chemicals.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification non-shrink grout contains no aluminum, zinc, or magnesium powders as method of expansion.

Submit Manufacturer’s certification non-shrink grout does not rely on gas production or gypsum expansion.

Submit certification grout conforms to specified strength requirements Test Record Transcripts Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript requirements.

Delivery Tickets Submit as required for payment.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance Submit name and telephone number of grout Manufacturer's representative who will provide on-site service.

Representative shall have at least one year of experience with specified grouts.

B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Test Record Transcripts.

C. When sources of aggregate are changed, submit new certification for new materials prior to its use.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of grout.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Bonding Agent
(Noncorrosive)
Concresive Div BASF Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517
Edoco / Dayton Superior Kansas City, KS (877) 266-7732
Master Builders / BASF Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318
Sika Corporation “Armatec 110 EpoCem” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Lubricant for Cement
Pressure Grouting
Intrusion Prepakt Intrusion Aid Nanaimo, BC (604) 618-2304 Sika Corporation Intraplast Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout BASF Construction Chemicals “Masterflow 648” Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Five Star Products “Five Star Epoxy Grout” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 L&M Construction Chemicals / Laticrete “Epogrout” Bethany, CT(800) 362-3331 Accepted equal
Non-Shrink Grout Class I BASF Construction Chemicals “Masterflow 713” Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Euco Euclid Chemical Co “High Glow Grout” Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628 Five Star Products “Five Star Grout” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 4 of 10

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Gifford-Hill American, Inc. Dallas, TX (214) 262-3600
Hilti “CG 200PC” Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
L&M Construction Chemicals / Laticrete “Duragrout” Bethany, CT(800) 362-3331 Master Builders / BASF. Embeco 636 Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Master Builders / BASFMasterFlow 928 Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Sika Corporation “Sikagrout 212” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Tremcrete Systems, Incorporated Woodland, CA
Accepted equal
Non-Shrink Grout Class II BASF Construction Chemicals “Masterflow 928” Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Five Star Products “Fluid Grout 100” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 L&M Construction Chemicals / Laticrete “Crystex” Bethany, CT(800) 362-3331 Accepted equal
Structural Repair Grout BASF Construction Chemicals “Emaco S88CI” Beachwood, OH (800) 228-3318 Five Star Products “Structural Concrete ES” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 Sika Corporation “Sikarepair 224” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal
Water Reducing Retarder Sika Corporation Plastocrete “161MR” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Sika Corporation “Plastiment” Lyndhurst, NJ (800) 933-7452 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §201-7 for materials requirements for non-masonry grout.

C. Provide the following grouts for the applications listed:

APPLICATION TYPE OF GROUT
Anchor bolts, anchor rods and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout in which average working or operating temperature >100°F or in high fire risk areas.

Non-Shrink - Class I
Storage tanks and non-motorized equipment and machinery <30 horsepower Non-Shrink - Class I Pumps ≤1000 horsepower, unless indicated otherwise Non-Shrink - Class I Filling block-out spaces for embedded items such as railing posts, gate guide frames, etc.

Non-Shrink - Class I (Class II
where placement time >20
min.)
Surface repairs Cement Grout
Repair of small (largest dimension <12”) holes and defects in concrete members which are not water bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material Non-Shrink - Class I or NonShrink - Class II or Structural Repair Grout
Repair of small (largest dimension <12”) holes and defects in concrete members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill materials Non-Shrink - Class II or
Structural Repair Grout
Repair of large (largest dimension >12”) holes and defects in concrete members. Structural Repair Grout Applications not listed above, where grout is indicated Non-Shrink Class I, unless specifically indicated otherwise
D. Materials for grout shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cement Portland Cement Conform to ASTM C150 Type II/V Modified Low Alkali/Sulfate Resisting, including Table 2 optional requirements
Low Alkali containing ≤0.60% alkalis
Gradation ≥85% of cement by weight shall pass #325 screen.

Water Clean, Clear Potable
Water
TDS<1000 mg/l
Aggregate All Aggregate Conform to ASTM C33
Nonreactive clean hard durable washed material
From pits acceptable to City’s Representative
Ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity <1.0 Ratio of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall be <41% for hydraulic structures DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 5 of 10

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
and <50% for all other structures.

Fine Aggregate Natural sand, manufactured sand or combination Sand Equivalent ≥75% average for 3 samples or ≥70% for any 1 sample.

Gradation – well graded per ASTM C33
100% passing #8 sieve
45% or more passing #40 sieve
3% max passing #200 sieve
Variation will be accepted if average of 3 consecutive tests falls within limits and variation does not exceed the following:

Sieves #30 or coarser: ≤2.0% variation
Sieves #50 or finer: ≤0.5% variation
Soundness ≤10% loss with sodium sulfate
Fineness modulus <3.00
Admixtures All Admixtures Compatible with grout
Conform to ASTM C494
Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride
Use admixtures in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations Add admixtures separately to grout mix
Water Reducing
Retarder
Conform to ASTM C494 Type D
Bonding
Agent
Epoxy resin with anti-corrosive properties
Grout Dry-Pack Grout Proportions (parts by
volume)
1 part cement
2 parts fine aggregate Water reducing retarder
Sufficient water to make stiff workable mix.

Cement Grout f’c ≥4000 psi within 28 days
Proportions (parts by
volume)
1 part cement
2 / 3 parts fine aggregate Pressure grouting
admixture
Minimum amount of water to make stiff workable
mix.

Coloring Additive Blend white Portland cement with regular cement as needed to match adjacent concrete color
Quick-Setting Grout f’c ≥2500 psi within 24 hours
Set time ≤90 minutes at 70°F to initial set
Color Non-staining
Non-Shrink Epoxy
Grout
f’c ≥5000 psi at 24 hours
≥10,000 psi at 24 hours
Minimum Working Life ≥45 minutes at 75°F
Pourable. Non-shrink 100% solids system, pre-measured and pre-packaged Chemical formulation recommended by Manufacturer for application Non-Shrink Grout
Class I
f’c ≥ 6000 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Tensile Splitting Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C496 at 28 days Flexural Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C580 at 28 days
Bond Strength (Concrete to
Grout)
≥1900 psi per ASTM C882 at 28 days
Early-Age Height Change ≤4.0% per ASTM C827
Shrinkage 0.0% per ASTM C827 and ASTM C1090
Expansion ≤0.3% per ASTM C1090
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Conform to ASTM C1107 Grade B or C when mixed to fluid, flowable, and plastic consistencies.

Prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non-staining, noncorrosive, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, free-flowing, cement-based grout requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout, when tested, shall not bleed or segregate and maximum allowed water.

Do not use cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or corrosive additives.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 6 of 10

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Formulate grout for use at any consistency from fluid to plastic.

Manufacturer’s application instruction shall be printed on container, bag, or packaging.

Non-Shrink Grout
Class II
f’c ≥7500 psi per ASTM C39 at 28 days
Tensile Splitting Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C496 at 28 days Flexural Strength ≥500 psi per ASTM C580 at 28 days
Bond Strength (Concrete to
Grout)
≥1900 psi per ASTM C882 at 28 days
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Conform to ASTM C1107 Grade B or C when tested using amount of water needed to achieve fluid consistency per ASTM C939
Prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non-staining, noncorrosive, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, free-flowing, cement-based grout requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout, when tested, shall not bleed or segregate and maximum allowed water.

Do not use cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or corrosive additives.

Grout shall have extended working time of ≥30 minutes when mixed to fluid consistency as defined in ASTM C827 at temperature extremes of 45-90°F in accordance with ASTM C1107.

Formulate grout for use at any consistency from fluid to plastic.

Manufacturer’s application instruction shall be printed on container, bag, or packaging.

Structural Repair
Grout
f’c ≥6000 psi per ASTM C109 at 7 days
Bond Strength (Concrete to
Grout)
≥2000 psi at 1 day per ASTM C882
Slump Rejection Limit ≤4” on any test per ASTM C143
Extended-set pre-packaged cement-based mortar requiring only addition of potable water.

Grout shall be free of chlorides or lime other than that contained within hydraulic cement composition.

For repairs >2 ft3, structural repair grout may be extended by adding clean, damp, coarse aggregate per Manufacturer’s recommendations.

Curing
Materials
Refer to Section 03 39 00 and Manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.3 Mixes
A. Measure grouts as follows:

1. Measure cement grout accurately by volume using containers. a. Do not use shovel measurements.

2. For prepackaged grouts, measure ingredients by means recommended by Manufacturer.

B. Mix grouts as follows:

1. Mix grouts to consistency needed to fill grouted space for each application.

2. Mix grout for ≥1 minute.
a. Agitate diluted grout to keep ingredients mixed.

3. “Dry-pack” consistency shall mean plastic and moldable grout that will not flow.

4. Adjust slump for concrete/grout fill to match placement and finishing conditions but do not exceed specified maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 7 of 10
A. Make field measurements needed to install grout before ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. At least 10 Working Days before grouting, conduct pre-installation meeting to review requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing, and curing for each proposed product.

1. Notify all parties involved with grouting including City’s Representative.

2. Provide services of field technician from grout Manufacturer to attend pre-installation meeting, observe initial installation of each grout type, and correct installation problems.

C. Prepare for grouting beneath equipment base plates as follows:

1. Size concrete equipment pads for equipment bases to be grouted so when equipment base is fully grouted, grout is stopped ≥1.0“ from pad edge.

2. Block out original concrete or finish concrete off sufficient distance below equipment mounting plates to provide ≥1” grout thickness or other thickness shown.

3. Complete mechanical, electrical, and finish work prior to placing topping or concrete/grout fill.

D. Prepare for non-shrink grouting to cement dowels and adhesive anchors in place as follows:

1. Install drilled anchors in concrete having age ≥21 days at time of anchor installation.

2. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes.

3. Unless otherwise shown, when non-shrink-grout anchors are used to resist tensile forces in structural applications, embedment depth shall equal or exceed development length (ld) determined in accordance with ACI 318 for cast in place reinforcing bars of same diameter and grade, unless it can be shown by calculation anchor spacing and edge distance is sufficient to develop tensile strength of anchor using lesser depth of embedment.
a. Submit calculations.

4. Exercise care in drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. a. Avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and communications conduit, and piping.

5. Adjust locations of drilled holes to avoid damage to reinforcing bars or embedded items.

6. Relocation of drilled holes and adjustments or modifications to anchored or fastened items shall be considered part of Work and provided at no additional cost to City.

7. Notify City’s Representative if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.

8. Do not core drill holes, unless separately accepted.

9. Clean holes with water under pressure prior to grout and anchor installation.

10. Drill, brush, and clean holes in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Do not place grout until base concrete or masonry has attained its design strength.

F. Contact grout Manufacturer’s representative for assistance on hot- and cold-weather grouting techniques and precautions if applicable.

G. When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, saturate concrete surface with water for 24 hours prior to placement.

1. Upon completion of saturation period, remove excess water with clean, oil-free compressed air prior to grouting.

H. Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall conform to Section 03 30

00. I. Holes required for grouting shall be blown clean.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 8 of 10

1. Drill horizontal holes for grouting at slight downward angle to facilitate holding grout until setting is complete.

2. Slightly bend bolts or reinforcing steel installed in horizontal grout holes accordingly.

J. Surfaces to contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax, grease, curing compounds, laitance, loose concrete, and other deleterious materials.

K. Wash concrete surfaces clean and keep moist for ≥24 hours before placing non-shrink cementitious or cement grout.

1. Achieve saturation by covering concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of soaker hoses, or flooding.

2. Upon completion of 24-hour pre-soak, remove visible water from surface before grouting.

L. Shade Work from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting.

M. Apply bonding agent to existing surfaces before applying grout or mortar.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install grout at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Install grout to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install grout true and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Install dry-pack grout as follows:

1. Use dry-pack grout for built-up surfaces, setting miscellaneous metal items and minor repairs.

2. Roughen surfaces required to be built up with dry-pack grout by brushing, cleaning, and coating with bonding agent specified in this section before applying grout.

3. Apply dry-pack grout immediately after applying bonding compound. a. Apply grout in bands or strips to form smooth covering of required thickness.

4. Slope construction joints in grout.
a. Clean and wet construction joints before resuming application.

5. Cure dry-pack grout in accordance with Section 03 30 00, G. Install cement grout as follows:

1. Cement grout may be used for filling nonbearing portions of equipment pads and pressure grouting.

2. Except for specialized equipment for pressure grouting, mixing and placing apparatus shall be similar to that used for cast-in-place concrete.

H. Install non-shrink grout as follows:

1. Use non-shrink grout for bearing surfaces of machinery and equipment bases, and bearing plates, and for setting bolts and reinforcing steel in holes for grouting.

2. Place non-shrink grout in accordance with grout Manufacturer's instructions.

3. Grout structural, equipment, tank, and piping support bases, unless otherwise shown.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 9 of 10

4. When anchor bolt or anchor rod diameter is ≤1”, hole diameter shall be ≥2”. a. When anchor bolt/rod diameter is >1”, hole diameter shall be ≥2x anchor bolt/rod diameter.

5. Place non-shrink grout in holes in non-sag (trowelable) consistency. a. Place grout in holes before anchor bolt/rod and then insert anchor bolt/rod and vibrate to ensure proper coverage.

6. Grout forms for grouting beneath equipment base plates shall be tight against retaining surfaces.
a. Seal joints liquid-tight as recommended by grout Manufacturer.

7. Coat forms as recommended by grout Manufacturer for easy form release.

8. After base plate is set in position at proper elevation by steel wedges or double nuts on anchor bolts, fill space between bottom of plate and original concrete pour with nonshrink-type grout through headbox of appropriate size.

9. For grouting beneath base plates, pour mixture of fluid consistency continuously into space between plate and base concrete.

10. Ensure grout space is filled.

11. Where this method of placement is not practical or where required by City’s Representative, submit alternate grouting methods for acceptance by City’s Representative.

I. Install pressure grout as follows:

1. Pressure grouting equipment shall include mixer and holdover agitator tanks and shall be designed to place grout at pressures up to 50 psi.
a. Provide gages to indicate pressure used.
b. Provide mixer with meter capable of indicating grout volume used to ±0.10 ft3 .

2. Prior to grouting, wash systems and holes to be grouted. a. Washing is not required for grouting soil voids outside pipe cylinders or casing pipes.

3. Complete grouting without stoppage once grouting commences. a. If equipment breaks down, wash out grouting system sufficiently to ensure fresh grout and adequate bond and penetration occur upon restarting grouting.

4. Maintain grout pressure until grout has set.

J. Refer to Section 03 39 00 for curing procedures.

K. Finish of grout surface shall match adjacent concrete unless otherwise shown.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Cement
Grout
Mix
Material
Properties
ASTM C1019 2 samples per day Contractor Contractor
Non-Shrink
Grout
Compressive
Strength
ASTM C1107 3 samples per batch (7-day
test) + 3 samples per batch
(28-day test) from first
placement of each grout type
and at intervals directed by
City’s Representative
Contractor Contractor
Construction
Tolerance
Refer to Section 03 30 00.

Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection City City
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 03 60 00 - Grouting - 10 of 10

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor
B. Provide services of factory-authorized representative on-site within 72 hours of request as part of Work to provide:

1. Installation technical assistance, inspection.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

3. Instruction of City’s personnel in operation and maintenance.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 1 of 6 SECTION 05 05 19

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of post-installed concrete anchor bolts.

B. Refer to Section 05 05 23 for cast-in-place embedded anchor bolts and for structural steel connections, including bolting and welding.

C. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
I. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
J. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
K. Section 03 32 10: Cement Mortar
L. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
M. Section 05 05 23: Metal Fastenings and Welds
N. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
O. Section 05 52 00: Railings
P. Section 09 92 00: Galvanizing
Q. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install concrete anchors where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Post-installed anchors shall be capable, under laboratory conditions described in ASTM E488, of sustaining the following loads:

SUBSTRATE LOAD RESISTANCE AT FAILURE
Concrete ≥4 x imposed load
Masonry ≥6 x imposed load
C. Shop quality control documentation shall be available in fabricator’s shop for City’s review.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications listed below and in various sections form part of specification to extent referenced. These are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISC 316 Manual of Steel Construction ASD

2. AISC 317 Manual of Steel Construction Volume II Connections DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 2 of 6

3. AISC S326 Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings

4. ASME/ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

5. ASME/ANSI B18.21.1 Washers:Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)

6. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

7. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

8. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

9. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service

10. ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

11. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 psi Tensile Strength

12. ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

13. ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

14. ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

15. ASTM E10 Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials

16. ASTM E488 Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements

17. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers

18. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

19. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

20. ASTM F1554 Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

21. ASTM F3125 High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength

22. California Building Code (CBC)

23. MIL A907E Anti-seize Thread Compound, High-Temperature

24. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 206 “Miscellaneous Metal Items”

25. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Include ICC test reports verifying strength per ASTM E488and material equivalency for embedded anchors.

Include temperature at which load capacity reduces to 90% of that determined at 75°F.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instructions requirements for embedded anchors.

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit upon request

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Submit ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES report for epoxy anchor grouts for adhesive anchors.

Foundry or Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Foundry or Test Records, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of concrete anchor products.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 3 of 6 C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

EPOXY-BASED CONCRETE ANCHOR SYSTEMS, FASTENERS AND CONNECTIONS Concrete Anchors –
Capsule Epoxy
Adhesive Anchor
Systems
Hilti USA. “HVU” Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
ITW Ramset / Redhead “Epcon” Glendale Heights, IL (800) 348-3231 MKT Fastening LLC “Liquid Roc” Lonoke, AR (501) 676-2222 Powers Fasteners, Inc. “Powers Pure 110+” Brewster, NY (800) 524-3244 Simpson Strong Tie Co. “Epoxy-Tie” Riverside, CA (714) 871-8373 Accepted Equal
Concrete Anchors –
Injectable Epoxy
Adhesive Anchor
Systems
Hilti USA. “HIT” Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
Accepted Equal
Epoxy Grout for Anchor
Bolts
Five Star Products “DP Epoxy Grout” Shelton, CT (800) 243-2206 Hilti USA. “HIT” Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
Epoxy grout recommended by anchor Manufacturer
Accepted Equal

MECHANICAL CONCRETE ANCHOR SYSTEMS, FASTENERS AND CONNECTIONS Wall Anchors Powers Fasteners, Inc. Brewster, NY (800) 524-3244 Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Provide adequately sized anchor bolts for equipment loads and in no case less than size recommended by equipment Manufacturer.

1. Provide embedded sleeve or epoxy-adhesive type anchors whenever possible.

2. Anchor bolt assembly shall consist of anchor bolt, surrounding pipe sleeve, bottom plate, leveling nut, nut and washer.

3. Assembly shall permit reasonable lateral movement of bolts to facilitate matching of bolts to equipment.

4. If stainless steel anchor bolts are not provided, galvanize anchor bolts and anchor bolt assemblies after fabrication.

5. Size anchors per Section 01 73 24 for seismic accelerations shown in Contract Documents.

C. Refer to Section 05 05 23 for structural bolting.

D. Materials for bolts, anchors and welds shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ANCHOR SYSTEMS
Concrete Anchors – Epoxy
Adhesive Anchor Systems
Embedded Stainless Steel
Threaded Rod “CRES”
(Use for corrosion
resistant applications,
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 1 SAE Type 316 bolts
(Fy=30ksi, Fu=75ksi, E=29000ksi)
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 4 of 6

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
buried, or submersible
locations, fasteners for
equipment, fasteners for
aluminum, nickel silver,
and stainless steel, and in
chemical handling areas
or underground structures
ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 2 SAE Type 316 bolts
(Fy≥50ksi, Fu≥90ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition AF Type 316 bolts with
(Fy≥20ksi, Fu≥65ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition A SAE Type 316 bolts
⅛”-¼” shall project through tightened nut.

Weldable
Stainless Steel Threaded
Nuts
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 1 SAE Type 316
(Fy=30ksi, Fu=75ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 2 SAE Type 316
(Fy≥50ksi, Fu≥90ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F594 Condition AF SAE Type 316
(Fy≥20ksi, Fu≥65ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F594 SAE Condition A Type 316
(Fy≥30ksi, Fu≥75ksi, E=29000ksi)
Free-cutting steel capable of developing full strength of bolts Stainless Steel Threaded
Washers
Conform to ASTM A240 and ANSI B18.21.1 Type A Plain
Anchor System Conform to ASTM C881 Type IV Grade 3, Classes A, B, and C with exception of gel time and epoxy content
Epoxy Adhesive 2- or 3-component non-shrink non-sag paste, Moisture insensitive when cured
Rated for cracked and uncracked concrete
Tested per ICC-ES AC308 and IBC requirements
Epoxy-Grout Aggregate As furnished prepackaged by epoxy grout Manufacturer Embedded Anchor Bolts
½”-4”
Refer to Section 05 05 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install concrete anchors before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Embedded anchors shall be secured accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

D. Concrete anchors not cast in place shall be installed in holes drilled or cored to dimensions shown in anchor Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install concrete anchors at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. California Building Code Chapter 19 “Concrete.”

3. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel.”

4. AISC 316 and 317 Manual of Steel Construction

5. AISC 360 Structural Steel Buildings
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 5 of 6

6. Other applicable building and fire code requirements.

7. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

8. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction.”
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Drill and install epoxy adhesive anchor systems as follows:

1. Do not install drilled anchors until concrete has reached required 28-day compressive strength.

2. Drill holes perpendicular to exposed face of concrete and place within tolerances accepted within AISC documents.

3. Drill holes to permit embedments and spacings required my Manufacturer to develop full anchor strength and to conform with CBC Table 1911.2.

4. Roughen holes with clean and dry brush mounted on power drill.

5. Do not load adhesive anchors until adhesive has reached its indicated strength in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.

F. Unless expressly shown otherwise or supported by Contractor-submitted and City-accepted shop drawings and engineering calculations, install bolts with embedments, edge distances and spacings per CBC Table 1911.2 including the following requirements:

BOLT DIAMETER MINIMUM EMBEDMENT MINIMUM EDGE

DISTANCE

MINIMUM SPACING
¼” 2½” 1½” 3”
⅜” 3” 2¼” 4½”
½” 4” 3” 6”
⅝” 4½” 3¾” 7½”
¾” 5” 4½” 9”
⅞” 6” 5¼” 10½”
1” 7” 6” 12”
1⅛” 8” 6¾” 13½”
1¼” 9” 7½” 15”
G. Conceal fastenings whenever possible.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Special inspection and field testing required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Table 1704.3 and 1704.4) shall be completed by an ICC-certified special inspector selected by City and shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Anchor Bolts Embedded Bolts in
Concrete and
Masonry
CBC Table 1704.4, CBC 1911.5 Continuous per
CBC Table
1704.3
Contractor Contractor
Edge Distances and
Spacings
Visual inspection and
measurement per CBC Table
1911.2
All bolts City City
Bolt Placement Error
Within Same Group
≤⅛” and fit within pre-drilled base All bolts City City Bolt Placement Error
Between Adjacent
Bolt Groups
≤¼” and fit within pre-drilled base All bolts City City Elevation of Anchor
Bolt Tops
±½” All bolts City City
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 19 – Post-Installed Concrete Anchors - 6 of 6

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Bolt Variation from
Perpendicular to
Concrete Surface
0° (no tolerance) All bolts City City
11-month Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed literature
All bolts City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 1 of 18 SECTION 05 05 23

METAL FASTENINGS AND WELDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Basic requirements for metal fastenings and welds.

B. Refer to the following sections for Work not covered herein.

1. Section 05 05 19 for post-installed anchor bolts.

2. Section 33 05 31 for pipeline joint materials.

3. Section 33 05 38 for hangers and supports.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 63 00: Product Substitution Procedures
F. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
G. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements H. Section 01 73 00: Execution
I. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
J. Section 01 73 33: Mechanical Identification
K. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
L. Section 05 05 19: Post-Installed Concrete Anchors
M. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
N. Section 33 05 31: Pipeline Joint Materials
O. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Use the following fasteners to fasten the metal materials shown:

METAL BEING FASTENED FASTENERS
Aluminum Stainless Steel “CRES”
Cast or Ductile Iron Stainless Steel “CRES”
Non-Structural Steel Low-Carbon Steel
Structural Steel High-Strength Alloy Galvanized Steel
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel “CRES”

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Employ only competent workers on Work.

1. Employed persons found to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable or who fail to perform Work properly, acceptably and in accordance with Manufacturers’ installation and warranty requirements, shall be immediately removed from Work by Contractor and not reemployed on Work.

2. Welders shall be AWS certified for type of work they are performing.

B. Construction equipment requirements shall include:

CONSTRUCTION

EQUIPMENT
ITEM

FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
Welding General Of reputable make and maintained in such condition as to enable qualified welders, DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 2 of 18 Equipment welding operators, and tack welders to follow qualified welding procedures.

Provide consumable material including electrodes. Store and handle other welding consumables per Manufacturer’s recommendations.

SMAW
Electrodes
Use only low-hydrogen electrodes for SMAW
Handle, store, and condition SMAW electrodes as described in AWS D1.1 or applicable procedure
Filler Metals Choose filler metals to suit base metal and process used per above referenced standards
C. Structural steel welding in off-site fabrication shops shall be continuously inspected by governing jurisdiction’s Certified Special Inspector.

1. For fabrication performed in shop of licensed Fabricator accepted by governing Building Official and certified by ICC, only field welding and high-strength bolting of structural steel assemblies will be required to be performed under continuous inspection by ICCcertified Special Inspector.

2. City’s Representative reserves right to inspect fabricated material or steel at Fabricator’s shop to verify materials used conform to mill tests, affidavits of test reports, and that fabrication and welding procedures meet specifications.

3. Notify City’s Representative and supply City’s Representative with test reports ≥2 Working Days in advance of fabrication to allow shop inspection of steel to occur at City’s option.

4. If City’s Representative identifies faulty materials or workmanship in fabricated material at Fabricator’s shop, pay City’s reasonable costs for subsequent retests or inspections.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, nondestructive tests shall conform to applicable sections of ASTM Standards, Part 11, “Metallography; Nondestructive Tests.”

1. Unless otherwise noted, determine standard for nondestructive testing applicable to material and manufacturing method used.

2. Extent of examination and basis for acceptance shall be agreed upon between City’s Representative and Contractor.

3. Contractor’s Shop Drawings submitted for review shall define areas, extent, and type of nondestructive examination.

4. Weld inspection and acceptance criteria shall conform to AWS D1.1 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requirements.

5. Certify personnel performing and interpreting nondestructive examinations have been qualified as Level II or III examiners in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A.

E. Factory testing of factory welds shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY

METAL FASTENINGS
Bolts Chemical and
Physical
Properties
Use applicable ASTM standards
(varies with steel)
Submit
Certificate of
Compliance
for each lot
Contractor Contractor
Fabricated
Steel
Inspection of
High-Strength
Bolted
Connections
ASTM F3125 At City’s
Discretion
during City
instigated
shop
inspection
City Contractor
WELDS
Fabricated Off-jobsite ICC-Certified Special Inspector Continuous Contractor Contractor DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 3 of 18

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Steel Welding Special
Inspection
selected by Building Official
Welding
Procedures
AWS D1.1 Continuous City Contractor

NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING
Weld
Examination
Before and
After StressRelieving
Welds Visual Inspection (VT) 100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Pressure
Vessels
PT, MT, UT and/or RT, as specified
above, unless otherwise accepted by
City’s Representative
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Plate Edge
Preparation
Prior to
Pressure Vessel
or Thick Plate
Welding
Liquid penetrant (PT) 100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Fillet Welds
between Main
Components
Magnetic particle (MT) or liquid
penetrant (PT) examination
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Fillet Welds
Including Welds
between
Stiffeners and
Main Beam
Members
Magnetic particle (MT) or liquid
penetrant (PT) examination
25% of total
length
selected at
random
Contractor Contractor
Partial
Penetration
Welds
Magnetic particle (MT), liquid
penetrant (PT), or ultrasonic (UT)
examination
25% of total
length
selected at
random
Contractor Contractor
Full-Penetration
Welds other
than Butt Welds
Ultrasonic (UT) examination followed
by radiographic examination (RT if
results are not clear, or by MT or PT if
RT is not feasible.
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Butt Welds RT and PT or MT, or UT followed by
PT or MT and PT, if RT is not feasible
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Back-Gouging
Full Penetration
or Butt Welds
PT or MT for pressure vessels.

As agreed upon between Contractor
and City for other mechanical
equipment
100% of total
length
Contractor Contractor
Equipment Welds VT, UT or RT Spot-check as
requested by
City
Contractor Contractor
F. At time of assembling, bolting, or welding, contacting steel surfaces shall be free of rust, loose mill scale, dirt, grease, or other material foreign to steel.

1. Do not apply paint to contact surfaces before bolting, or welding.

G. Holes for shop bolts shall be sub-punched or sub-drilled at fabricator’s option ¼” less in diameter than that of finished holes, and reamed to size with parts assembled with the following exceptions:

1. Do not punch holes in material >⅞” thick.

2. At fabricator’s option, holes in material >⅞” thick may be sub-drilled to diameter specified for sub-punching or may be drilled full size with parts assembled, provided parts are adequately bolted or clamped together.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 4 of 18

3. Holes in rolled beams and plate girders, including stiffeners and active fillers at bearing points may be sub-punched ⅛” less in diameter than that of finished holes, and reamed to size after assembly if material is not thicker than nominal diameter of bolt less ⅛”.

4. Holes in material ≤⅞” thick for bolts which do not transfer stress caused by external vertical loading may be punched full size or, at fabricator’s option, may be sub-punched ⅛” less in diameter than that of finished holes and reamed to size after assembly. a. This applies to holes for stitch bolts, lateral, longitudinal, or sway bracing and their connecting material, lacing, stay plates, diaphragms which do not transfer shear or stress, inactive fillers, and stiffeners at bearing points. b. However, holes through assembled material shall not pass through both reamed plies and plies punched full-size unless reamed holes have been sub-punched for fabricator’s convenience, or assembled material is >5 plies thick, of which main material consists of ≤3 plies.

H. Repair defective factory welds.

1. Defective factory welds found after stress-relieving may require additional stressrelieving after weld repairs and re-examination of welds, as agreed upon between Contractor and City’s Representative

1.5 References
A. Reference publications listed below and in various sections form part of specification to extent referenced. These are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISC M011 Manual of Steel Construction for Shop and Field Welding

2. AISC 316 Manual of Steel Construction ASD

3. AISC 317 Manual of Steel Construction Volume II Connections

4. AISC S326 Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings

5. Aluminum Association Inc. Specifications for Aluminum Structures

6. ASME/ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

7. ASME/ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)

8. ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

9. ASME/ANSI B18.15 Forged Eyebolts

10. ASME/ANSI B18.21.1 Washers:Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)

11. ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

12. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

13. ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice

14. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

15. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or both.

16. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength

17. ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes

18. ASTM E165 Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry

19. ASTM E433 Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant Inspection

20. ASTM E709 Magnetic Particle Testing

21. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers

22. ASTM F541 Alloy-Steel Eyebolts

23. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

24. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

25. ASTM F1554 Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

26. ASTM F3125 High-Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 AWS Welding Handbook

27. AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors

28. AWS/ANSI A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

29. AWS/ANSI A2.3 Standard Welding Terms and Definitions

30. AWS/ANSI A5.5 Low-Alloy Steel-Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes

31. AWS/ANSI S B3.0 Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications

32. AWS/ANSI D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

33. AWS/ANSI D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum

34. AWS/ANSI D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 5 of 18

35. AWS/ANSI D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

36. AWS/ANSI D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

37. AWS/ANSI D1.7 Strengthening and Repairing Existing Structures

38. AWS/ANSI D1.8 Seismic Supplement

39. AWS/ANSI D1.9 Structural Welding Code – Titanium

40. AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors

41. AWS/ANSI W1 Welding Metallurgy

42. California Administrative Code, Title 8, “Construction Safety Orders”

43. California Building Code (CBC)

44. MIL-E-18038 Welding Medium- and High-Tensile Steels

45. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 206 “Miscellaneous Metal Items”

46. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

MOBILIZATION SUBMITTALS
Welder and Weld
Qualifications
Required for welders performing work on this project.

Submit welding operator qualification records.

Submit welding inspector qualifications.

Submit welding rod control procedures.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Shop Drawings Submit for bolts ≥1” per structural Shop Drawing requirements Show welds on applicable Shop Drawings
Show weld type using AWS symbols.

Show weld procedure to be employed.

Show examination procedures to be applied.

Installation Instructions –
Welding Procedures
Submit destructive and nondestructive test results, and welding bead profiles.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification
Records (PQR)
Submit written WPSs and PQRs for each welding procedure used unless requirement is waived by City’s Representative.

Welder Procedure
Qualification (WPQ)
Certificates
Prior to start of Work for factory or field fabrication, submit written WPQs using sample forms in AWS D1.1 or similar forms unless requirement is waived by City’s Representative.

Submit for welders performing Work on this project.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of products.

C. Store low-hydrogen electrodes in accepted low-hydrogen oven at 300°F-400°F to control moisture in electrode coating.

1. Restore low-hydrogen electrodes not packaged in moisture-proof container by rebaking for ≥2 hours at 450°F-500°F in accepted oven.

2. After rebaking, store low-hydrogen electrodes in low-hydrogen oven at 300°F-400°F.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 6 of 18 A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and Nuts A&G Engineering Company Anaheim, CA (714) 630-7400 Birmingham Fastener Supply (BF) Birmingham, AL (800) 695-3511 Copper State Bolt & Nut Phoenix, AZ (800) 603-6887
Industrial Threaded Products, Inc. (wholesaler) Brea, CA (800) 976-2658 Le Jeune Bolt Co. (L) Burnsville, MN (952) 890-4482
Nucor Fasteners (n) Saint Joe, IN (260) 337-1600
Ocean State Stainless, Inc. (wholesaler) Huntington Beach, CA (714) 898-0404 Pacific Coast Bolt (wholesaler) Santa Fe Springs, CA (562) 944-9549 Portland Bolt Co. (PB) Portland, OR (800) 547-6758
Robbins Mfg. Co., Inc.(R) Fall River, MA (508) 675-2555 ShurSeal Industries (wholesaler) Edmonton, AB (780) 435-3771 Silo Fastener, Inc. (S) Kansas City, MO (816) 231-6750
St Louis Screw & Bolt Co. (SL) Saint Louis, MO (314) 389-7500 Texas Bolt Company (TB) Houston, TX (713) 869-7111
Tripac Fasteners (wholesaler) Corona, CA (951) 280-4488 Unytite, Inc. (UNY) Peru, IL (815) 224-2221
Vegas Fastener Manufacturing (VFM) Las Vegas, NV (702) 651-9222 Vulcan Rivet & Bolt Corp (V) Birmingham, AL (205) 841-2711 Western Pacific Products (wholesaler) Chino, CA (909) 591-2410 Accepted Equal Phoenix, AZ (800) 603-6887
Anchor Bolts Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Company Portland, OR (800) 547-6758 Steel City Bolt Birmingham, AL (800) 522-2658
Accepted Equal
Studs Nelson Stud Welding Div. (N) Walnut, CA (909) 468-2105 Stud Welding Associates (+) Elyria, OH (440) 324-3042
Accepted Equal

EPOXY-BASED FASTENERS AND CONNECTORS
Metal-to-Metal Epoxy J-B Weld Company Sulfur Springs, TX (903) 885-7696 Accepted Equal

COATINGS
Anti-Seize Compound
for Stainless Steel Bolts
and Nuts
Anti-Seize Technology “Pure White” Franklin Park, IL (800) 991-1106 Bostik Never Seez Wauwatosa, WI (800) 726-7845
Dixon Ticonderoga Company “AS470” Lakehurst, NJ (732) 657-2255 Husk-Itt Husky Lube O-Seal Norco, CA (951) 340-4000
Loctite Dusseldorf, DEU (800) 624-7767
Permatex Hartford, CT (877) 376-2839
Ramco Specialty Products Anti-seize Huntington Beach, CA (800) 334-7071 Ramco Specialty Products TRX-Synlube Huntington Beach, CA (800) 334-7071 T Christy Enterprises, Inc. Anti-seize Anaheim, CA (714) 507-3300 Accepted Equal
Galvanized Touch Up
Material
Refer to Section 09 92 00

2.2 Materials
A. Where not otherwise shown, use the following list of material specifications, which are acceptable for intended purposes, as referenced, for selecting standard types and grades of materials used.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 7 of 18

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

FASTENERS, AND CONNECTIONS
Bolts and Nuts – HighStrength Alloy Galvanized
Steel (Use for connection
bolts and anchor bolts for
structural members
outside corrosive areas)
High-Strength Alloy
Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM F3125 Grade 120ksi
(Fy=92ksi, Fu=120ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F3125 Grade 150ksi
(Fy=130ksi, Fu≥150ksi, E=29000ksi)
⅛”-¼” shall project through tightened nut.

Heavy hexagon series
Nuts Free-cutting steel capable of developing full strength of bolts Use self-locking nuts or lock-washers and plain nuts
Shape of nuts shall match bolt heads
Threads Conform to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 for Bolts
Conform to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 for Nuts
Coarse thread series
Use taps and dies so bolts retain normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Bolts and Nuts - Stainless
Steel “CRES” (Use for
corrosion resistant
applications, buried, or
submersible locations,
fasteners for equipment,
fasteners for aluminum,
nickel silver, and stainless
steel, and in chemical
handling areas or
underground structures
Stainless Steel –
Corrosion-Resistant
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 1 SAE Type 316 bolts with
ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 1 SAE Type 316 nuts (Fy=30ksi, Fu=75ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 2 SAE Type 316 bolts with
ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 2 SAE Type 316 nuts (Fy≥50ksi, Fu≥90ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition AF Type 316 bolts with
ASTM F594 SAE Type 316 nuts
(Fy≥20ksi, Fu≥65ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition A SAE Type 316 bolts with
ASTM F594 SAE Type 316 nuts
(Fy≥30ksi, Fu≥75ksi, E=29000ksi)
⅛”-¼” shall project through tightened nut.

Heavy hexagon series
Nuts Free-cutting steel capable of developing full strength of bolts Use self-locking nuts or lock-washers and plain nuts
Shape of nuts shall match bolt heads
Threads Conform to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 for Bolts
Conform to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 for Nuts
Coarse thread series
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed
Anti-Seize Lubricant Conform to MIL A907E
Bolts – Embedded
Eyebolts and Lifting
Eyebolts
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM F541 SAE Type 316
Dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
Bolts – Naval Brass (Use
for corrosion resistant
applications and for
fastening bronze)
Naval Brass Conform to ASTM B21
Washers (Galvanized) Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Square or rectangular smooth beveled washers, tapered in thickness
Hardened washers for high-strength bolts shall conform to AISC specification
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Washers (Stainless Steel) Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Square or rectangular smooth beveled washers, tapered in thickness
Lock Washers Same Material as Nuts Provide where shown.

Screws Stainless Steel Do not use slotted-head screws.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 8 of 18

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

WELDING ELECTRODES
Welding Electrode - Steel Steel Electrodes Conform to AWS D1.1 Conform to AWS A5.5
E70xx, except E7024 rods or electrodes shall not be used Low-Hydrogen
Electrodes
Conform to MIL-E-18038m (Ships)
Welding Electrode –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Electrodes
Type 347 electrode
Welding Electrode –
Aluminum
Aluminum Conform to AWS D1.2
Use type 4043 filler material

ANCHOR SYSTEMS
Embedded Anchor Bolts
½”-4” Stainless Steel
“CRES” (Use for corrosion
resistant applications,
buried, or submersible
locations, fasteners for
equipment, fasteners for
aluminum, nickel silver,
and stainless steel, and in
chemical handling areas
or underground structures
Stainless Steel
Threaded Rod
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 1 SAE Type 316 bolts (Fy=30ksi, Fu=75ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A193 Grade B8M Class 2 SAE Type 316 bolts (Fy≥50ksi, Fu≥90ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition AF Type 316 bolts with
(Fy≥20ksi, Fu≥65ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F593 Condition A SAE Type 316 bolts
⅛”-¼” shall project through tightened nut.

Weldable
Stainless Steel
Threaded Nuts
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 1 SAE Type 316
(Fy=30ksi, Fu=75ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 2 SAE Type 316
(Fy≥50ksi, Fu≥90ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F594 Condition AF SAE Type 316
(Fy≥20ksi, Fu≥65ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F594 SAE Condition A Type 316
(Fy≥30ksi, Fu≥75ksi, E=29000ksi)
Free-cutting steel capable of developing full strength of bolts Stainless Steel
Threaded Washers
Conform to ASTM A240 and ANSI B18.21.1 Type A Plain
Grout Refer to Section 03 60 00
Embedded Anchor Bolts –
High-Strength Alloy
Galvanized Steel (Use for
anchor bolts for structural
members outside
corrosive areas)
Galvanized HighStrength Alloy Carbon
Steel
Threaded Rod
Conform to one of the following:

ASTM F3125 Grade 120ksi
(Fy=92ksi, Fu=120ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM F3125 Grade 150ksi
(Fy=130ksi, Fu≥150ksi, E=29000ksi)
⅛”-¼” shall project through tightened nut.

Galvanized HighStrength Alloy
Threaded Nuts
Free-cutting steel capable of developing full strength of bolts Use self-locking nuts or lock-washers and plain nuts
Threads Coarse thread series
Use taps and dies so bolts retain normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing
Galvanized Steel
Washers
Conform to ASTM F436 Type 1 and ANSI B18.21.1 Type A Plain Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Grout Refer to Section 03 60 00
Post-Installed Concrete
Anchors
Refer to Section 05 05 19
B. Fasteners, bolts, nuts, screws, and threads, shall conform to US standards and the following.

1. Screw threads for screws, bolts, nuts, and other threaded hardware shall conform to ANSI B1.1.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 9 of 18

2. Connections, fasteners, and mountings required to install products shall conform to connections and mountings shown in Contract Documents and Submittals on locationspecific basis.

3. Unless otherwise shown, furnish and install Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers on bolted connections.

4. Nuts shall be symmetrically formed with hole centered and perpendicular to face. a. Tap nuts to fit corresponding thread on bolt such that nut can be run entire length of thread by fingers without forcing, and without play or rocking.

5. Liberally apply anti-seize thread lubricant to threaded portion of stainless steel bolts during assembly.

6. Do not assume acceptance of connections, fasteners, or mountings at 1 location constitutes acceptance of same at all locations.

7. Screws, bolts, and nuts shall be provided with locking devices.

8. Selection of locking means shall consider service conditions and the following:
a. On parts subject to vibration and on connections requiring repeated adjustment or which are not accessible (such as bolts or nuts inside hydraulic cylinders), provide positive reusable locking device on bolts, such as castellated nuts with cotter pins or soft copper lock plate or washer bent over nut and fixed point on structure. b. On other parts, use positive reusable locking devices or spring steel lock washers on bolts.
c. Use lock washers in combination with chemical thread-locking compound when required.
d. Chemical locking compound shall be manufactured for purpose of locking threaded connections, such as Loctite as manufactured by Loctite Corporation, or equal. e. Selection of chemical locking compound shall consider requirements for disassembly and maintenance.

C. Install anchor bolts, nuts, and washers as follows:

1. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers, and plates shall be adequate for intended use.

2. Anchor bolts shall be either headed bolts, installed with or without pipe sleeves, or swage bolts installed in drilled holes as shown.

3. Install anchor bolts to facilitate true positioning of bearing assemblies.

4. Install anchor bolts perpendicular to concrete surfaces and place within tolerances accepted within AISC documents.

5. Furnish anchor bolts as part of each piece of equipment.

6. Anchor bolts shall be complete with required flat washers, lock washers, and nuts.

7. Refer to Section 01 73 24 for requirements for seismic design of anchor bolts.

8. Where anchor bolts are installed in pipe sleeves, fill pipes with grout at time grout pads are constructed or at time bearing assemblies or masonry plates are placed.

9. Grout to be placed in anchor bolt sleeves shall be Class E (1-part cement to 3-part sand) mortar.

10. Swage bolts installed in holes shall be either sulfured in or grouted in as shown.

D. Unless expressly shown otherwise or supported by Contractor-submitted and City-accepted Shop Drawings and Engineering Calculations, install bolts with embedments, edge distances and spacings per CBC Table 1911.2 including the following requirements:

BOLT DIAMETER MINIMUM EMBEDMENT MINIMUM EDGE

DISTANCE

MINIMUM SPACING
¼” 2½” 1½” 3”
⅜” 3” 2¼” 4½”
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 10 of 18

BOLT DIAMETER MINIMUM EMBEDMENT MINIMUM EDGE

DISTANCE

MINIMUM SPACING
½” 4” 3” 6”
⅝” 4½” 3¾” 7½”
¾” 5” 4½” 9”
⅞” 6” 5¼” 10½”
1” 7” 6” 12”
1⅛” 8” 6¾” 13½”
1¼” 9” 7½” 15”
E. Welding, welded steel joints and structures fabricated by welding shall conform to the following.

1. Selection of welding processes and development of weld procedures is part of design process established by Contractor and shall consider stress levels and use of each component.
a. Use materials and methods minimizing distortion and developing strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Fuse metal at welded joints without undercut or overlap.

2. Ensure weld joints are designed and sized in accordance with current engineering standards and practices for each class of equipment.

3. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair structural and non-structural steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.

4. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair pipe and pipe related welds in accordance with ASME B31.1.

5. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair welds for pressure vessels or pressure containing parts to accepted welding rules of ASME §VIII and §IX.

6. Remove welding flux immediately.

7. Welded components and assemblies, to be machined, shall be stress-relieved prior to final machining.
a. Perform stress-relief in accordance with AWS D1.1 and applicable welding specifications referenced above.

8. Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise noted or approved. a. Welds shall be even, with no contact gaps, or crevices left between members or unfilled re-entrant corners that would harbor moisture or dirt and prevent satisfactory application and retention of corrosion protective system. b. At exposed connections, finish, smooth, and blend exposed welds and surfaces so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

9. Ensure suppliers and subcontractors comply with these requirements as they apply to manufactured equipment.

F. Welding, welded aluminum joints and structures fabricated by welding shall conform to the following.

1. Select welding processes and develop weld procedures as part of design process established by Contractor.
a. Consider stress levels and use of each component.

2. Ensure weld joints are designed and sized in accordance with current engineering standards and practices for each class of equipment.

3. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair structural and non-structural steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.2.

4. Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise noted or approved.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 11 of 18 a. Welds shall be even, with no contact gaps, or crevices left between members or unfilled re-entrant corners that would harbor moisture or dirt and prevent satisfactory application and retention of corrosion protective system.

5. Ensure suppliers and subcontractors comply with these requirements as they apply to manufactured equipment.

G. Welding, welded stainless steel joints and structures fabricated by welding shall conform to the following.

1. Select welding processes and develop weld procedures as part of design process established by Contractor.
a. Consider stress levels and use of each component.

2. Ensure weld joints are designed and sized in accordance with current engineering standards and practices for each class of equipment.

3. Design, produce, qualify, inspect, and repair structural and non-structural steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.6.

4. Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise noted or approved. a. Welds shall be even, with no contact gaps, or crevices left between members or unfilled re-entrant corners that would harbor moisture or dirt and prevent satisfactory application and retention of corrosion protective system.

5. Ensure suppliers and subcontractors comply with these requirements as they apply to manufactured equipment.

H. Welding procedures shall be as follows.

1. Perform welding by electric-arc method, by process at least equal to that required by Standard Qualification Procedure of American Welding Society.

2. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) for welds shall be qualified per applicable Codes.

3. WPS submittals shall be accepted by City’s Representative prior to use for fabrication.

4. Ensure accepted WPSs are in presence of welding personnel prior to production welding.

5. Ensure contents of WPS are being followed.

6. Acceptance and repair of mill-induced discontinuities shall be handled as described in applicable AWS or ASME code sections.

7. Arc strikes and temporary welds in critical locations shall be completely removed, inspected and repaired per AWS D1.1 or applicable procedure.

8. Welding shall only be done on materials above 50°F on dry surfaces.

9. Short-circuiting arc GMAW is prohibited.

10. Electroslag and electrogas welding is prohibited.

I. Qualification of welders shall be as follows.

1. Welding Performance Qualification (WPQs) records for welding personnel shall conform to AWS D1.1 or applicable procedure.

2. Welding operators shall submit documentary evidence of having been qualified by tests as prescribed by AWS D1.1 §5 and AWS W1 §7, to perform type of welding indicated.

3. Test welders and welding operators in accordance with these Codes.

4. Welders and welding operators shall have in their possession, valid qualification records for welding positions and welding processes used.

5. Maintain welder qualification test records and keep current for duration of Work.

6. When cause exists to question a welder’s ability to make welds in accordance with these requirements, City may request welder in question be retested.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 12 of 18

7. Retrain or replace welders who cannot maintain quality level as specified to satisfaction of City’s Representative.

8. Furnish proof welding operators and welders possess requisite qualifications. a. Allow City’s Representative to witness shop radiography. b. Free access shall be allowed to radiographic film records. c. Furnish necessary copies of test reports, together with copies of supplier’s test reports on welding rod.

J. Dissimilar metals, when used in conjunction with each other shall have insulation provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and resultant current.

1. Materials of construction shall be cathodically compatible to preclude galvanic action.

2. Where dissimilar metals may contact, provide insulation between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and galvanic action.

3. Electrolytic insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators, bushings, washers, or other accepted materials.

K. For purposes of chemical compatibility, use the following materials for bolts unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer and accepted by City:

ENVIRONMENTAL OR CHEMICAL EXPOSURE STRENGTH ACCEPTABLE BOLTING METALS

INORGANIC CHEMICALS
Ammonium Sulfate (NH4)2SO4 316SS
Sodium Hypochlorite (NaClO) 15% 316SS
Titanium

ENVIRONMENTS
Recycled Water n/a 316SS
Wastewater n/a 316SS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Holes for bolts shall be full size, punched and reamed, or drilled.

1. Measure bolt locations in field before drilling companion holes in structural steel beam or assembly.

2. Finished hole shall be 1/16” larger than nominal bolt diameter.

3. Holes punched full size shall have burrs and sharp edges removed.

4. Diameter of die shall not exceed diameter of punch by > 3/32” B. Holes for field bolts shall be sub-punched or sub-drilled at fabricator’s option, ¼” less in diameter than that of finished holes and shall be reamed to size through steel templates with hardened steel bushings, with the following exceptions:

1. Holes required to be sub-drilled and reamed may be sub-drilled ⅛” less in diameter than finished hole provided offset of any hole in any ply measured from outer ply after hole is finished ≤ 1/32”, and ≤ 20% of holes provide 1/32” offset.

2. Field splices in plate girders and in truss chords shall be reamed with members assembled.
a. Other field connections may be reamed with members assembled at fabricator’s option.
b. Chord splices in truss members shall, in all cases, be reamed or drilled with at least 3 abutting sections assembled and with milled ends of compression chords in full bearing.

3. Assemblies such as floor systems to girders, complete trusses, rolled beam spans connected by diaphragms, and portals to trusses shall be reamed with members assembled if so shown.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 13 of 18

4. Field connections of lateral, longitudinal, or sway bracing shall conform to requirements of holes for shop bolts.

5. Holes in material thicker than ⅞” shall not be punched, but shall be sub-drilled to diameter specified for sub-punching, or drilled full size with parts assembled.

C. Accuracy of punching shall be such that for any group of holes when assembled, 75% shall admit rod equal to diameter of bolt at right angles to plane of connection.

1. Otherwise holes shall be reamed.

2. When extent of reaming is such that holes cannot be properly filled or accurately adjusted after reaming, faulty member shall be discarded and replaced.

3. Do not correct mis-punched members without acceptance by City’s Representative.

D. Reaming shall be done after pieces forming member are assembled and bolted together so surfaces are in contact.

1. Remove burrs and sharp edges of reamed hole under or bolt and nut using countersinking tool making 1/16” fillets.

2. Take pieces apart before bolting, if necessary and remove shavings.

3. If it is necessary to disassemble members for shipping or handling, pieces reamed together shall be so marked that they may be reassembled in same position.

4. Do not interchange reamed parts.

E. Drilled holes shall be 1/16” larger than nominal diameter of bolt.

1. Remove burrs and sharp edges of reamed hole under or bolt and nut using countersinking tool making 1/16” fillets.

2. Remove burrs on outside edges.

3. If members are drilled while assembled, secure parts together during drilling.

4. Drill drilled holes to finish size while all thicknesses of metal are assembled, or subdrilled and reamed as required for punched and reamed holes.

5. Holes shall be clean-cut, without torn or ragged edges.

6. Holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed.

7. Drilling shall be done accurately.

F. Prepare surfaces for welding as follows

1. Cut members and sections to be joined by welding accurately to size, with edges sheared, flame-cut or machined to suit required type of welding and to allow full penetration.

2. Surfaces of members or sections to be welded shall be free from rust, grease, and other foreign matters for at least 2” back from weld edge.

3. Accurately cut plates to be joined by welding to size.

4. Roll by pressure to proper curvature, which shall be continuous from edge.

5. Do not flatten curvature along edges with correction by blows.

6. Dimensions and shape of edges to be joined shall allow thorough fusion and penetration.

7. Plate edges shall be properly formed to accommodate welding conditions.

8. If tack welds are used in weld groove, remove each tack before welding operation.

9. Accurately align butt joints and retain in position during welding operations so at finished joint projection of 1 plate beyond its adjoining plate is ≤1/16”.

10. Throat gap for butt joints shall be ≤⅛”.

11. Where possible, design joints so welding may be done in down-hand, vertical or horizontal position.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 14 of 18

12. Backing plates or other reinforcement on both faces of weld on butt joints shall be chipped and ground flush with surrounding plate.

13. When welding plates, of which one or both >1” thickness, preheat contiguous areas of plates around welding operation to ≥300°F to prevent distortion of weld cracking. a. Keep at uniform temperature throughout process.
b. Preheating to temperature 400°F is not required.

14. Measure temperature using Tempilstiks or other accepted means.

15. Use low hydrogen electrodes where necessary.

16. Edges of surfaces (up to thickness of metal) to be welded shall be sound metal free of visible defects, such as laminations or defects caused by cutting operations, and free from rust, oil, grease, and other foreign matter.

17. Supply welding rods in sufficient quantities to complete welding requirements of materials supplied under this Contract plus 25% surplus. a. Welding electrodes shall conform to AWS Filler Metal Specification A5 or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, §II, Part C.
b. Supply welding machines and welding equipment required for erection at Site. c. Provide suitable meters to show welding current and arc voltage. d. Welding rods shall be plastic-wrapped against moisture and shipped in hermetically sealed metal containers.
e. Do not use welding rods, which absorb moisture in coating.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel”

3. Other applicable building code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. AWS B3.0 Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications

6. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

7. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum

8. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

9. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

10. AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

11. AISC 316 and 317 Manual of Steel Construction

12. AISC 360 Structural Steel Buildings

13. AISC M011 Manual of Steel Construction for Shop and Field Welding

14. AISC S326 Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings

15. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §304-1 “Structural Steel”

16. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”
C. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

D. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion using pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 15 of 18 E. Provide mounts, guides, bearing plates, flanges, anchor and attachment bolts and screws, saddles, supports, pads and skids necessary to securely mount products and equipment.

1. Tighten bolts to Manufacturers' specifications using torque wrenches.

2. Unless otherwise directed, use lubricant such as Copperkote or blue Teflon when making up bolts.

F. Perform bolting as follows:

1. Bolts shall be unfinished bolts, or high-strength steel bolts as shown.

2. Unfinished bolts in shear shall have no more than 1 thread within grip.

3. Bolts shall extend entirely through nut but not more than specified distance beyond outside face of nut.

4. Unfinished structural bolts in tension shall have 2 nuts.

5. Diameter of unfinished bolts shall be ≤ 1/32” smaller than hole diameter.

6. Bolted connections using high-strength steel bolts shall conform to ASTM A3125.

7. Bolts shall not be permitted to drift

8. Holes shall not be enlarged to correct misalignment.

9. If mismatching of holes occurs, provide new materials.

10. Drive bolts accurately into holes without damaging thread.

11. Protect boltheads from damage during driving, and replace if damaged.

12. Boltheads and nuts shall rest squarely against metal.

13. Draw boltheads and nuts tight against work using suitable wrench ≥15” long or torque wrench set to provide similar torque.

14. Tap bolt heads with hammer while nut is being tightened.

15. After being tightened, nuts shall be locked.

16. Bolts used on beveled surfaces having slopes >1:20 with plane normal to bolt axis hall be provided with beveled washers to provide full bearing of boltheads and nuts.

17. Where self-locking nuts are not furnished, bolt threads shall be upset to prevent nuts from backing off.

G. Perform welding as follows:

1. Welding and weld reinforcement shall conform to AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3,

2. Welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be qualified in accordance with applicable AWS standards.

3. Welded components subject to vibration and fatigue shall be fabricated with fully penetrated welds.

4. Use metal-arc, submerged arc or gas-shield arc process as described in AWS “Welding Handbook” as supplemented by other pertinent AWS standards.

5. Weld sizes between members shall not be less than those specified in AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, or ASME §VIII, Division I.

6. In assembly and during welding, clamp, support, and restrain component parts to control dimensions and minimize distortion.

7. Use electrodes intended for grade of steel or metal being joined. a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and preserve strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

8. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

9. Remove welding flux immediately.

10. Provide 2 passes for metal 3/16” thick plus one additional pass for each additional ⅛” in metal thickness.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 16 of 18 a. Fillet welds shall be ≥¼”;
b. Make fillet welds ≥ 5/16” shall be with 2 or more passes. c. Make fillet welds with full throat, and with each leg of uniform length of indicated size in accordance with Contract Documents and Shop Drawings

11. Butt welds shall be fully penetrated and slightly convex of uniform height. a. In plates >5/16” thick use double-welded type joints.

12. Peening of multiple pass welds to control distortion or to minimize residual stresses may be carried out with light blows from power hammer, using elongated round-nosed tool. a. Peen immediately after depositing and cleaning.
b. Exercise care to prevent scaling, flaking or rupturing of weld and base metal from overpeening.
c. Neither first nor last pass of multiple weld shall be peened.

13. Welds shall be uniform in width and size throughout their length with each layer of weld smooth, free of slag, cracks, pinholes and undercutting, and completely fused to adjacent base metal and weld beads.
a. Avoid coarse ripples, irregular surfaces, non-uniform bead patterns, high crowns, deep ridges or valleys between beads.

14. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds so surfaces are smooth and blended.

15. Stainless-type weld, for protection against pitting or corrosion, shall be of chromium nickel steel.
a. Type, chemical composition and ASTM class of welding rods used for this purpose shall meet with acceptance from City’s Representative.

16. Upon completing weld, remove temporary bracing and attachments. a. Exercise care that base metal to which bracing is attached is not adversely affected. b. Chip projecting welds remaining after this operation and grind flush. c. Weld tears in base metal and grind flush.
d. If temporary bracing or attachments are welded to plates <1” thick, preheat requirements may be waived; however, upon removing these attachments, base metal shall be ground flush and inspected for cracks.

17. Test plates for automatic welding on longitudinal seams shall be attached to sections to be welded if requested by City’s Representative.

B. Finish welding as follows

1. Remove weld splatter, flux, slag and burrs.

2. Grind sharp corners of material to be painted or coated to at least 1/32” on the flat.

3. Dress welds to display good appearance and provide surface suitable for painting.

4. Grind and blend structural welds to avoid stress raisers.

5. Dress welds requiring nondestructive examinations by chipping and grinding as required for good interpretation by selected weld examination methods.

6. Erection bolts required for welded splices or connections may be left in place. a. Burn off ends of erection bolts which project beyond nut flush with face of nut. b. Where bold does not project, tack weld end of bolt and nut to prevent loosening of nut.
c. Complete burning off of bolt ends or tack welding before painting.

C. Repair welding as follows

1. Repair welds to produce workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 17 of 18

2. Unacceptable defects in welds shall be chipped out to sound metal and such areas shall be checked by Contractor as directed by City’s Representative to ensure defect has been completely removed before repair welding.

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Metal
Fastenings
and Welds
Welding
Materials
AISC §A3.5 and CBC §1708.4 Periodic per CBC
Table 1704.3
Contractor Contractor
Weld
Procedure
Qualification
AWS QC1 One each
procedure in
presence of City’s
Representative
Welding AISC 341, AWS D1.1, D1.3, CBC
1704.3.1, and CBC Table 1704.3.

Also inspect for proper dimensions and
absence of cracks, undercutting,
surface holes or slag inclusions
Periodic per CBC
Table 1704.3 for
single-pass fillet
welds 5/16” or
smaller or floor
and roof deck
welding
AISC 341, AWS D1.1 CBC 1704.3.1,
and CBC Table 1704.3
Continuous per
CBC Table
1704.3 for all
other welds
Nondestructive
Weld Testing
Magnetic particle testing (MT), dye
penetrant (PT), radiography (RT) or
ultrasonic (UT)
1 inspection each
weld
Welding Gas
Pockets, Slag,
and Oxide
Inclusions
No defects >1/16” in any dimension
Sum of all defects in any square inch
shall be ≤⅜”
Periodic
Brinnell
Hardness
≥ (Parent metal minimum specified
tensile strength in psi) / 500
≤ (Parent metal minimum specified
tensile strength in psi +50 psi )/500
Periodic
Joint Details CBC 1704.3.2 Periodic per CBC
Table 1704.3
High-Strength
Bolting
AISC 360 §M2.5 and CBC 1704.3.3 Periodic per CBC
Table 1704.3
Continuous for
slip-critical bolting
per CBC Table
1704.3
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Confirm Work conforms to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test each
equipment item
City Contractor
Anchor
Bolts
Installation Refer to Section 05 05 19 All bolts City Contractor B. Unless otherwise indicated, nondestructive tests shall conform to applicable sections of ASTM Standards, Part 11, “Metallography; Nondestructive Tests.”

1. Unless otherwise noted, determine standard for nondestructive testing applicable to material and manufacturing method used.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 2-22-dp 05 05 23 – Metal Fastenings and Welds - 18 of 18

2. Extent of examination and basis for acceptance shall be agreed upon between City’s Representative and Contractor.

3. Contractor’s Shop Drawings submitted for review shall define areas, extent, and type of nondestructive examination.

4. Weld inspection and acceptance criteria shall conform to AWS D1.1 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requirements.

5. Certify personnel performing and interpreting nondestructive examinations have been qualified as Level II or III examiners in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A.

C. Prior to Special Inspection of steel welding, verify seam welds and puddle welds are made in accordance with Contract Documents.

1. Inspection shall ensure proper electrodes, current, travel and speed are used and that no cracks, serious undercutting, overlap, surface holes, or slag inclusions occur.

D. Provide copies of special inspection reports to City’s Representative and applicable Building Official.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 1 of 8
SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of metal fabrications, including formed metal fabrications.

B. Refer to the following sections for Work not covered herein.

1. Section 05 05 19 for post-installed concrete and masonry anchors

2. Section 05 05 23 for structural steel connections, including bolting and welding.

3. Section 05 14 00 for structural aluminum framing.

4. Section 05 51 00 for stairs, ladders, and platforms.

5. Section 05 52 00 for railings.

6. Section 05 53 00 for gratings and floor plates.

7. Section 09 92 00 for galvanizing.

8. Section 33 05 31 for piping joint materials and bolting C. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
I. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
J. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
K. Section 03 32 10: Cement Mortar
L. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
M. Section 05 05 19: Post-Installed Concrete Anchors
N. Section 05 05 23: Metal Fastenings and Welds
O. Section 05 14 00: Structural Aluminum Framing
P. Section 05 51 00: Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms
Q. Section 05 52 00: Railings
R. Section 05 53 00: Gratings and Floor Plates
S. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
T. Section 09 92 00: Galvanizing
U. Section 33 05 31: Piping Joint Materials
V. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install metal fabrications where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 2 of 8

B. Form metal fabrications true to detail with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength or durability.

C. Shop quality control documentation shall be available in fabricator’s shop for City’s review.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications listed below and in various sections form part of specification to extent referenced. These are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISC 316 Manual of Steel Construction ASD

2. AISC 317 Manual of Steel Construction Volume II Connections

3. ASME/ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

4. ANSI/ASME B18.15 Forged Eyebolts

5. ANSI AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

6. API 9A Wire Rope

7. ASSE 1060 Outdoor Enclosures for Backflow Prevention Devices

8. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

9. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

10. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

11. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service

12. ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

13. ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

14. ASTM A283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates

15. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 psi Tensile Strength

16. ASTM A413 Carbon Steel Chain

17. ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes

18. ASTM A786 Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low Alloy, High-Strength Low Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates

19. ASTM A1008 Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

20. ASTM B26 Aluminum Alloy Sand Castings

21. ASTM B455 Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes

22. ASTM B584 Copper Alloy Sand Castings

23. ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

24. ASTM E10 Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials

25. ASTM F541 Alloy Steel Eyebolts

26. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

27. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

28. ASTM F3125 High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength

29. ASTM F1267 Metal, Expanded, Steel

30. AWS Welding Handbook

31. AWS A5.5 Low-Alloy Steel-Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes

32. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

33. AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors

34. California Building Code (CBC)

35. MIL A907E Antiseize Thread Compund, High-Temperature

36. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 206 “Miscellaneous Metal Items”

37. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 3 of 8

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings Submit for formed metal fabrications per structural Shop Drawing requirements .

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instructions requirements.

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit upon request

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Foundry or Test
Record Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Foundry or Test Records, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of metal fabrications.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

METAL FABRICATIONS
Fabricated Metalwork Desert Iron and Machine Works, Inc Thermal, CA (310) 773-0589 Accepted Equal
Stair Treads Harsco Industrial / IKG Aluminum Grating Stair Tread with Mebac Nosing
Channelview, TX (800) 324-8417
McNichols Company Type A-Standard with
Corrugated Angle Nosing
Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
Nystrom Building Products Brooklyn Park, MN (800) 547-2635 SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Accepted Equal

METAL PRODUCTS
Perforated Metal and
Expanded Metal
AMICO Div. Gibraltar Industries Birmingham, AL (800) 326-8842 Bobco Metals Los Angeles, CA (888) 304-5927
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
Metalex Libertyville, IL (888) 639-6382
Accepted Equal
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 4 of 8

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206-1 for materials requirements for metal fabrications.

C. Structural steel shall conform to requirements of Section 05 12 00.

D. Structural aluminum shall conform to requirements of Section 05 14 00.

E. Materials for bolts, anchors and welds shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

FASTENERS, AND CONNECTIONS
Post-Installed Concrete
Anchors
Refer to Section 05 05 19
Nuts, Bolts, Washers, and
Screws
Refer to Section 05 05 23
Welds and Electrodes Refer to Section 05 05 23

ANCHOR SYSTEMS
Concrete Anchors Refer to Section 05 05 19

METAL FABRICATIONS
Pipe Guards Steel Fabricate from ⅜” thick x 12” wide steel plate, bent to fit against wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2” clearance between pipe and pipe guard.

Drill each end for ¾” anchor bolts.

Finish Refer to Section 09 90 00.

METAL PRODUCTS
Chain Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Length sufficient to provide 6” sag at center of opening spanned.

Steel Forgings Steel Conform to ASTM F3125
Class C forgings
≥0.35% carbon content, annealed
Brinell hardness 1.30-1.90 per ASTM E10
Washers (Stainless Steel) Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Washers (Galvanized) Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Square or rectangular smooth beveled washers, tapered in thickness
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
F. Materials for metal shapes and members shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Hardware – Steel Including
Castings, Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Articles
Steel Hardware Conform to ASTM A36
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Aluminum Castings Aluminum Conform to ASTM B26 Alloy 443.0F Perforated Metal and
Expanded Metal
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Gauge as shown on Plans – Thickness ≥16 gauge
Steel Conform to ASTM F1267
Gauge as shown on Plans – Thickness ≥16 gauge
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Plate and Sheet – Stainless
Steel
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240 SAE Type 316 StructuralMembers –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for metal products:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Boat Snap Design Swivel Eye,
Size to match attached chain
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 5 of 8

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Chain – ASTM Grade 43
High Test
Size and Nominal
Strength
⅜” chain 5400-lb rated
½” chain 9200-lb rated
Eyebolt Size and Diameter ⅜” eyebolt (1”ID / 1-21/32”OD) ½” eyebolt (1-3/16”ID / 2-1/16”OD)
⅝” eyebolt (1⅜”ID / 2½”OD)
¾” eyebolt (1½”ID / 2-13/16”OD)
⅞” eyebolt (1-11/16” ID / 3¼”OD)
1” eyebolt (1-13/16”ID / 3-9/16”OD)
H. Wall thicknesses shall be:

GAUGE THICKNESS RANGE NOMINAL VALUE
20 0.0329”-0.0389” 0.0359”
18 0.0438”-0.0518” 0.0478”
16 0.0548”-0.0648” 0.0598”
14 0.0697”-0.0797” 0.0747”
12 0.986”-0.1106” 0.1046”
10 0.1285”-0.1405” 0.1345”
9 0.140”-0.150” 0.1495”
8 0.157”-0.167” 0.1644”
7 0.175”-0.185” 0.1793”
6 0.1943”
5 0.2092”
4 0.2242”
3 0.2391”
n/a 0.25”
2 0.2656”
1 0.2813”
0 0.3125”
00 0.3438”
000 0.3750”
0000 0.4063”
00000 0.4375”
000000 0.4688”
0000000 0.5000”
I. Before leaving shop, steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or stainless shall receive coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system.

1. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall receive 2
nd coat of same primer.

2. Final painting shall conform to Section 09 90 00.

3. Galvanizing shall conform to Section 09 92 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install metal fabrications before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Use connections maintaining structural value of joined pieces.

C. Equip items to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded steel strap anchors ≤8” from ends or corners and ≤24” on center.

D. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install metal fabrications.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 6 of 8

1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

2. Weld connections that are not to be left exposed but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

3. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized joining surfaces intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

4. Set fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack and measured from established lines and levels.

E. Clean surfaces of metalwork to contact concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

1. On City’s request, coat steel surfaces (excluding nuts and bolts) to contact exposed concrete with protective sealant coating of accepted heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied per Manufacturer’s application instructions before installing metalwork.

2. Coat aluminum surfaces to contact concrete with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or 1 coat of zinc chromate.

3. Insulate aluminum surfaces from contact with dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

F. Where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with Section 03 32 10.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install metal fabrications at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 20 “Aluminum”

3. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel”

4. Other applicable building and fire code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Install metal fabrications to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install metal fabrications true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

2. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.

3. Remove burrs and ease edges.

4. Remove sharp or rough edges on exposed surfaces.

5. Joints shall have close fit with corner joints coped or mitered and in true alignment.

F. Where needed to complete and support Work, provide steel framing and supports as needed.

1. Fabricate support structures in sizes, shapes, and profiles necessary to support Work.

2. Use steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction conforming to Sections 05 12

00. and 05 05 23.

3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame or other Work from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 7 of 8

4. Drill or punch baseplates.

5. Add top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.

6. Make fillet welds same size as pipe wall thickness.

7. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes shown for attachment to concrete or masonry.

8. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive ¾” bolts spaced ≤6” from ends and ≤24” on center unless otherwise shown.

9. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

10. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

11. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with primer specified in Section 09 90 00.

12. Refer to Section 05 05 19 for post-installed concrete anchor requirements.

G. Fabricate seams and connections to be exposed to weather in manner excluding water.

1. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Repair or recondition existing metal fabrications, where shown, as follows:

1. Disassemble Work as deemed necessary by City for proper repair or reconditioning.

2. Remove existing coatings.

3. Clean and prepare surfaces.

4. Perform visual inspection of metal.

5. Notify City’s Representative of major damage

6. Supplement with further NDE (MT, PT, UT) if necessary.

7. Repair minor damage.

8. Replace damaged anchors, hardware, and appurtenances.

9. Refurbish Work.

10. Recoat per Section 09 90 00

11. Repair galvanizing per Section 09 92 00.

12. Reassemble Work.

I. Refer to Section 05 05 19 for post-installed concrete anchors.

J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth.

1. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2. Conceal fastenings whenever possible.

K. Bolting for piping shall conform to Section 33 05 31.

L. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

M. Exposed ends and edges of metal shall be slightly rounded.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications - 8 of 8

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS
PAID
FOR BY
Metal
Fabrications
No Bends, Twists or
Open Joints
Visual inspection All metalwork City City
No Projecting Edges or
Corners at Intersections
Field Performance Demonstrate compliance to 1 test Contractor Contractor Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
11-month Warranty Demonstrate compliance to 1 test City Contractor Inspection Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 51 00 – Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms - 1 of 6 SECTION 05 51 00

STAIRS, LADDERS, AND PLATFORMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of stairs, ladders, and platforms.

B. OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.1053 (a) requires fall protection be provided where length of climb on fixed ladders ≥ 24’ or where top of fixed ladder >24’ above lower levels.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete stairs and ladders where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Workmanship and finish shall conform to requirements of American Welding Society and Aluminum Association, as applicable.

C. Connections and accessories shall safely withstand stresses and strains to which they will be subjected.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. Aluminum Association Inc. Aluminum Construction Manual

2. Aluminum Association Inc. Specifications

3. ANSI / ASC A14.3 Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements

4. ANSI H35.2 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products

5. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

6. ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

7. ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

8. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

9. ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube

10. ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 51 00 – Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms - 2 of 6

11. ASTM D962 Standard Specification for Aluminum Pigments, Powder, and Paste

12. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Non-destructive Examination

13. AWS A5.10 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Arc-Welding Electrodes

14. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

15. California Building Code (CBC)

16. California Mechanical Code (CMC) §904.10

17. OSHA Standard 29 CFR1910.24 Fixed Industrial Stairs

18. OSHA Standard 29 CFR1910.27 Fixed Ladders

19. OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.1053 Ladders

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings Submit for fabricated stairs and ladders per structural Shop Drawing requirements
Show dimensions, sizes, thickness, gauges, materials, finishes, joint attachment and erection procedure.

Shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by California-licensed civil or structural engineer.
.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Foundry or Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit for welders performing Work.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Foundry or Test Records and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of stairs and ladders.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 51 00 – Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms - 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

LADDERS
Ladders – Aluminum Alaco Ladder Co. Chino, CA (909) 591-7561 City Tool Works, Inc. Ontario, CA (909) 923-8080
WernerCo. Inc. Greenville, PA (888) 229-7727
Accepted equal
Ladders – Fiberglass WernerCo. Inc. Greenville, PA (888) 229-7727 Ultra Fiberglass Systems Milwaukee, WI (414) 461-5051
Accepted equal
Ladders – Stainless
Steel
City Tool Works, Inc. Ontario, CA (909) 923-8080
Inwesco Inc. Azusa, CA (626) 334-9304
Pipeline Products VL100 San Marcos, CA (800) 998-1079
Remco Machining and Fabrication Bloomington, CA (909) 877-3530 Accepted equal

FABRICATED STRUCTURES
Fabricated Aluminum
Structures
CST Industries, Inc. Conroe, TX (913) 621-3700
Gardena, CA (310) 353-5100
RPS Engineering, Incorporated Elburn, IL (847) 931-1950 Irwindale, CA (626) 856-5656
Ultraflote Corporation Houston, TX (713) 461-2100
Accepted Equal
STAIRS
FRP Ship Ladders Ultra Fiberglass Systems Milwaukee, WI (414) 461-5051 Accepted equal
Stair Treads and
Platforms
Hoertig, Inc. Fountain Valley, CA (714) 545-1575
Keene Building Products / Metalex Libertyville, IL (888) 639-6382 Lapeyre Stair New Orleans, LA (866) 433-5518
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co. Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Accepted equal
Stairways - Fiberglass Structural Fiberglass, Inc. Bedford, PA (814) 623-0458 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for stairs and platforms shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Interior and
Exterior Stairs -
Aluminum
Aluminum Materials Aluminum
Dimensions Conform to Plans and OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Minimum Width ≥22” required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Allowable Slope 30º to 50º above horizontal required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Tread ≥8” deep slip-resistant tread required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Vertical
Clearance
≥7’ required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Platforms or
Landings
≥30” on 1 side required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
Railings 30”-34” high required by OSHA Std CFR1910.24
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 51 00 – Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms - 4 of 6 C. Before leaving shop, steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or stainless shall receive 1 coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system.

1. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall receive 2
nd coat of same primer.

2. Final painting shall conform to Section 09 90 00.

D. The following design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Platforms and Stair Treads Live Load 100 psf or concentrated 300-lbf load at mid span whichever creates higher stress or deflection
Allowable Live Load
Deflection
<L/360 per CBC Table 1604.3 and ≤¼”,
Allowable Total Load
Deflection
<L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 and ≤¼”,
Stair Tread Nosing Integral non-slip
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install stairs and ladders before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of work to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Coat aluminum surfaces to contact concrete with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or one coat of zinc chromate.

D. Insulate aluminum surfaces from contact with dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

E. Secure embedded metalwork accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

F. Where Work is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, Work installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with Section 03 32

10. 3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install stairs and ladders at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Applicable building and fire code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install stairs and ladders to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install stairs and ladders true, plumb and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Welding shall comply with Section 05 05 23.

1. Continuously weld permanent connections along entire area of contact.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 51 00 – Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms - 5 of 6 G. Bolting shall comply with Section 05 05 23.

1. Conceal fastenings whenever possible.

H. Joints shall have a close fit with corner joints coped or mitered and in true alignment.

I. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

J. Exposed ends and edges of work shall be slightly rounded.

K. Mount ladders so clearance from back of ladder to wall behind ladder exceeds 7”.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Stairs
and
Ladders
No bends, twists or
open joints
No projecting edges
or corners at
intersections
Visual inspection All work Owner Owner
Field Performance Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 52 00 – Railings - 1 of 5
SECTION 05 52 00

RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of railings and handrails.

B. Refer to Section 05 05 19 for post-installed anchor bolts.

C. Refer to Section 05 05 23 for metal fastenings and welds.

D. Unless otherwise noted, refer to APWA Southern California Chapter Standard Plans for Public Works Construction Standard Drawing 606 for requirements for metal hand railings.

E. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206-5, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
I. Section 03 32 10: Cement Mortar
J. Section 05 05 19: Post-Installed Concrete Anchors
K. Section 05 05 23: Metal Fastenings and Welds
L. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
M. Section 05 51 00: Stairs, Ladders, and Platforms
N. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
O. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete handrails and railings where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in the necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. Aluminum Association Standard 1 – Aluminum Standards and Data

2. Aluminum Association Standard for Anodized Architectural Aluminum

3. ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

4. ASTM B26 Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

5. ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

6. ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

7. ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube

8. ASTM B429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube

9. ASTM B487 Measurement of Metal and Oxide Coating Thickness by Microscopical Examination of Cross Section DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 52 00 – Railings - 2 of 5

10. ASTM F880 Stainless Steel Socket, Square Head, and Slotted Headless-Set Screws

11. ASTM F912 Alloy Steel Socket Set Screws

12. AWS/ANSI D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

13. AWS/ANSI D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum

14. AWS/ANSI D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

15. California Building Code (CBC)

16. OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.502b “Guardrail Systems”

17. OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.502b “Guardrail Systems”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings Submit for fabricated and formed handrails and railings per structural Shop Drawing requirements
.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit upon request

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Engineering
Calculations
Required for submitted handrail systems <2” diameter or < Schedule 80 per Engineering Calculations requirements.

Foundry or Test
Record Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record Transcript requirements.

Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit for welders performing Work on this project.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of handrails and railings.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

HANDRAIL
Handrail - Aluminum Alumarail Manuracturing, Inc. Woodbridge, ON (877) 258-6288 Golden Railings, Inc. Broomfield, CO (303) 279-5807
Hanson Architectural Systems / C.R. Laurence Co. Hillsboro, OR (800) 599-2965 Hollaender Manufacturing Company “Interna-Rail” Cincinnati, OH (800) 772-8800 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 52 00 – Railings - 3 of 5

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Hollaender Manufacturing Company “Speed-Rail” Cincinnati, OH (800) 772-8800 Idealshield Detroit, MI (866) 825-8659
Accepted Equal

ACCESSORIES
Perforated Metal and
Expanded Metal
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for aluminum handrails shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Handrails –
Aluminum
Aluminum Base Metal Anodized Aluminum Conform to ASTM B241 Alloy 6005-T5, 6061-T6, or 6063-T6
fy ≥ 25ksi
Pipe and Tubing Aluminum Alloy Conform to ASTM B241 or ASTM B429
Slip-on or Bolt-on Fittings Aluminum Alloy Conform to ASTM B26 Plates and Sheets Aluminum Alloy Conform to ASTM B209
Rods, Bars, or Shapes Aluminum Alloy Conform to ASTM B221 Dimensions Conform to Plans, CBC
Chapter 10 and OSHA Std
CFR1926.502
Top Bar Height
Guardrails
Conform to CBC §1013 42” above base ± 3” for guard rails Top Bar Height Staircase
and Ramp Handrails
Conform to CBC §1012 34-38” above stair tread nosings or ramp slope
Intermediate Bars Conform to CBC §1013 As required to prevent passage of 21”-diameter sphere
Bar Diameter Conform to CBC §1607A.7 2” except where Engineering Calculations are submitted to
document 1½” pipe will resist 200-lbf
horizontal load applied to top rail
Tube Wall Thickness Conform to CBC §1607A.7 Schedule 80 except where Engineering Calculations are
submitted to document Schedule 40
pipe will resist 200-lbf horizontal load
applied to top rail
Finish (Refer to and
conform to Aluminum
Association Standard 1)
Mechanical Finish M10 Unspecified
Chemical Finish C22 Medium matte sodium
hydroxide etch
Anodic Coating Conform to Aluminum Association
Standard for Anodized Architectural
Aluminum Class I Anodic Coating,
AA-C22
A41 0.7-mil thick clear coating
Set Screws Steel Conform to ASTM F912
Plate per ASTM B633 followed by
trivalent conversion & JS600 topcoat
≥ 6 µm thick measured per ASTM
B487
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM F880 SAE Type
302
Stainless Steel Hardware SAE Type 316
Handrail Safety
Chain
Stainless Steel Type 316 Type of Chain Straight link chain 3/16” diameter
Links per Foot 12 links minimum per foot
Chain Length 4” longer than access opening
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 52 00 – Railings - 4 of 5

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Chains Required 2 each opening
Mounting Height – top chain 42” above floor
Mounting Height – lower chain 24” above floor
Snaphooks boat snap at each end
Guardrail -
Aluminum FreeStanding
Anodized Aluminum Pipe
or Alloy 6005-T5, 6061-
T6 or 6063-T6
Conform to ASTM B241
Clear satin anodized finish 0.7
mil AA-M10-C22-A41
Dimensions Conform to Plans, CBC
Chapter 10 and OSHA Std
CFR1926.502
Top Bar Height
Guardrails
Conform to CBC §1013 42” above base ± 3” for guard rails Top Bar Height Staircase
and Ramp Handrails
Conform to CBC §1012 34-38” above stair tread nosings or ramp slope
Intermediate Bars Conform to CBC §1013 As required to prevent passage of / 21”-diameter sphere
Bar Diameter Conform to CBC §1607A.7 1½” or 2” as required to resist 200- lbf horizontal load applied to top rail
Stainless Steel Hardware SAE Type 316
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install handrails and railings before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Aluminum surfaces to contact concrete shall be coated with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or one coat of zinc chromate.

D. Aluminum surfaces to contact dissimilar metals shall be insulated from dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

E. All embedded metalwork shall be secured accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

F. Where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with Section 03 32 10.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install handrails and railings at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building code requirements

3. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 52 00 – Railings - 5 of 5
E. Install handrails and railings to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install handrails and railings true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

2. Do not erect railings on structures until concrete to which it attaches is completed and falsework supporting concrete is released.

3. For structures on horizontal or vertical curves, railing shall conform to curvature of structure using series of short chords.
a. Lengths of chords shall be distance center-to-center of rail posts.

4. Erect vertical rails on anchor bolts or in holes formed by inserts provided in concrete railing base to receive railing posts.
a. Remove sheet metal inserts before erecting railing.

5. Carefully erect railing true to line and grade.
a. Misalignment at any joint between two panels shall be ≤ 1/16”. b. Deviation of posts or balusters from vertical shall be ≤ ⅛” c. Joints shall be matchmarked.
d. Joints shall have close fit with corner joints coped or mitered and in true alignment.

6. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

7. After erecting railing, repair abrasions in exposed metal.

F. Welding shall comply with Section 05 05 23.

1. Continuously weld permanent connections along entire contact area.

2. Grind welds flush with adjacent surfaces.

G. Bolting shall comply with Section 05 05 23.

1. Conceal fastenings whenever possible.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Handrails
and
Railings
No bends, twists or
open joints
No projecting
edges or corners
at intersections
Visual inspection All metalwork City City
Alignment Maximum variation of adjacent railing
panels within 1/16”
All joints City City
Posts and balusters vertical with
maximum ⅛” deviation from vertical
All posts City City
Field Performance Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 1 of 9
SECTION 05 53 00

GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of metal gratings, metal floor plates.

B. Materials, testing, and installation of metal frames and supports for gratings.

1.3 System Description
A. Design gratings, floor plates, and supports to incorporate design criteria and performance requirements shown.

B. Furnish and install complete grating and/or floor plate system where shown, including mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Conform to NAAMM MBG 531 and NAAMM MBG 532.

1. Form gratings from materials of size, thickness, and shapes shown, but not less than required to support indicated loads.

2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI H35.2 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products

2. ANSI/ASME B18.15 Forged Eyebolts

3. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

4. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

5. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

6. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

7. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

8. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure and High Temperature Service

9. ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 2 of 9

10. ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

11. ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes

12. ASTM A490 Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts 150ksi Minimum Strength

13. ASTM A510 Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel

14. ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

15. ASTM A666 Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, And Flat Bar

16. ASTM A793 Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel

17. ASTM A1008 Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution-Hardened, and Bake-Hardenable

18. ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

19. ASTM A1018 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

20. ASTM B6 Zinc

21. ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

22. ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

23. ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube

24. ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes

25. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

26. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

27. ASTM F541 Alloy Steel Eyebolts

28. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

29. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

30. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

31. MIL-G-18015 A (Ships) Aluminum Planks. (6063-T6)

32. NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

33. NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings Submit for fabricated gratings, floor plates and cover plates per structural Shop Drawing requirements
.

Submit layout drawings for grating, showing direction of span, type and depth of gratings, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold-down fasteners.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for gratings per Product Data requirements.

Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating used.

Submit data for clips and anchorage devices.

Submit data on shop-applied coatings.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instructions requirements.

Include Manufacturer’s recommendations for reinforcing cut openings.

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit on request

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Engineering Calculations Submit for grating and grating support systems, including seismic anchorage calculations.

Grading and grating support calculations may be omitted for grating frames embedded in concrete.

Foundry or Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit for welders performing work on this project.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 3 of 9
B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Foundry or Test Records and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of gratings and floor plates.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1. Protect composite gratings from UV exposure.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

GRATING SYSTEMS
Grating - Aluminum Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314 Harsco Industrial / IKG Channelview, TX (800) 324-8417
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co. Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Accepted Equal
Grating – Fiberglass
Reinforced
Polymners (FRP)
Aetna Plastics Corporation “Chemgrate®: or “Fibergrate®” Valley View, OH (800) 634-3074 American Grating “Gridwalk SuperSpan” Henderson, NV (702) 567-0303 Bedford PROGrid® and PROGrate® Bedford, PA (800) 377-3280 Delta Composites, LLC (HS) Houston, TX (713) 225-3225
Enduro Composites Houston, TX (281) 921-9002
Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. Stephenville, TX (254) 965-3148 Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314
Harsco Industrial IKG Channelview, TX (281) 452-6637
International Grating, Inc. Houston, TX (713) 633-0982
Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
Seasafe, Inc. Lafayette, LA (337) 406-2345
SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co. Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Strongwell Corporation “Duradek” Chatfield, MN (276) 645-8054 Ultra Fiberglass Systems Milwaukee, WI (414) 461-5051
Accepted Equal
Grating – Cast Iron Alhambra Foundry Company Ltd. Alhambra, CA (626) 289-4294 Long Beach Iron Works, Inc. Long Beach, CA (562) 432-5451 Neenah Foundry Ontario, CA (626) 602-6796
South Bay Foundry Santee, CA (619) 956-2780
U S Foundry and Manufacturing Corp Medley, FL (305) 885-0301 Accepted Equal
Grating – Steel Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314 Inwesco Inc. Azusa, CA (626) 334-9304
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co. Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Accepted Equal

GRATING PLANKS AND TRENCH COVERS
Grating Planks - Harsco Industrial / IKG Channelview, TX (800) 324-8417 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 4 of 9

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Aluminum Accepted Equal
Safety Grating
Planks - Steel
Harsco Industrial / IKG “Deck Span” Channelview, TX (800) 324-8417 Cooper B-Line / Eaton “Grip Strut” Highland, IL (800) 851-7415 Accepted Equal

GRATING ACCESSORIES
Grating Anchor
Systems
Struct-Fast® Grate-Fast Easton, MD (800) 327-6719
Accepted Equal
Grating Pedestals -
Fiberglass
Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314
Ultra Fiberglass Systems Milwaukee, WI (414) 461-5051
Accepted Equal
Lifting Eyebolts Cleveland City Forge Wellington, OH (440) 647-5400 Sierra Pacific Engineering and Products Long Beach, CA (800) 433-5554 Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for gratings, floor plates and cover plates shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cover Plates –
Checkered Aluminum
Aluminum Conform to one of the following:

ASTM B308 Alloy 6061 T6 temper (Fy=35ksi, fu=38ksi E=10,000ksi) Thickness 3/16”
Lug Pattern Shall have raised lug pattern on top face and smooth bottom face.

Provide lugs ≥1” long raised at least ½” above surface.

Lug pattern shall orient lugs at 90° from adjacent lugs in 2 orthogonal directions.

Orient rows of lugs 45° from plate edges.

Thickness As required to limit total-load deflection to <L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Frame Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Abrasive Surface For abrasive-surface floor plate roll abrasive granules into surface or bond abrasive material metallically to steel
Lifting Handles Provide each removable section with U-bolt lifting handles located at opposite ends.

Angle Supports Aluminum to match floor plate material
Cover Plates –
Checkered Steel
Welded Mild Carbon
Structural Steel
Conform to ASTM A789 for dimensions and fabrication
Conform to one of the following for steel properties
ASTM A36 (Fy=36ksi, Fu=58ksi, E=29000ksi
ASTM A283 Grade C (Fy=30ksi, Fu=55ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A283 Grade D (Fy=33ksi, Fu=60ksi, E=29000ksi)
Thickness 3/16”
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

Lug Pattern Shall have raised lug pattern on top face and smooth bottom face.

Provide lugs ≥1” long raised at least ½” above surface.

Lug pattern shall orient lugs at 90° from adjacent lugs in 2 orthogonal directions.

Orient rows of lugs 45° from plate edges.

Thickness As required to limit total-load deflection to <L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Frame Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Angle Supports Steel to match floor plate material
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 5 of 9

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cover Plates –
Checkered Stainless
Steel
Welded Stainless
Steel
Conform to the following for materials, dimensions and fabrication SAE Type 316/316L
ASTM A793 (Fy=31ksi, Fu=73ksi, E=29000ksi
Thickness 3/16”
Lug Pattern Shall have raised lug pattern on top face and smooth bottom face.

Provide lugs ≥1” long raised at least ½” above surface.

Lug pattern shall orient lugs at 90° from adjacent lugs in 2 orthogonal directions.

Orient rows of lugs 45° from plate edges.

Thickness As required to limit total-load deflection to <L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Frame Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Angle Supports Stainless steel to match floor plate material Grating – PressureLocked Aluminum I-Bar
Aluminum Conform to the following:

ASTM B221 Alloy 6063 T42 temper (Fy=11ksi, Fu=23ksi E=9,900ksi) Size – Refer to Plans
Aluminum Frame Conform to the following:

ASTM B221 Alloy 6063 T42 temper (Fy=11ksi, Fu=23ksi E=9,900ksi) Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Grating – Fiberglass Fiberglass Size – Refer to Plans
Molded fiber-reinforced polymer (FRP) composite (yellow) Core Unidirectionally aligned glass fibers
Mat Standard corrosion liner
Veil Standard corrosion liner
Ultraviolet Stabilizer Add to exterior surfaces in type and amount recommended by resin manufacturer.

Color As selected by City’s Representative
Skid-Resistant
Coating
Anti-slip permanently-bonded grit coating of selected color.

Flame Spread ≤25 per ASTM E84
Clips, Saddles, and
Fastener
Components
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Stainless Steel
Frame
SAE Type 316
Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Grating – Steel Welded Steel Bars Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A36 (Fy=36ksi, Fu=58ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A1011 Grade 36 Type 2 (Fy=36ksi, Fu=58.3ksi, E=29000ksi) ASTM A1018 Grade 50 (Fy=50ksi, Fu=65.3ksi, E=29000ksi)
Size – Refer to Plans
Wire Rod for
Grating Crossbars
Conform to ASTM A510
Steel Frame Conform to one of the following:

ASTM A36 (Fy=36ksi, Fu=58ksi, E=29000ksi)
ASTM A1011 Grade 36 Type 2 (Fy=36ksi, Fu=58.3ksi, E=29000ksi) ASTM A1018 Grade 50 (Fy=50ksi, Fu=65.3ksi, E=29000ksi)
Frame – Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

Grating Planks -
Aluminum
Aluminum Conform to the following:

ASTM B221 Alloy 6063 T42 temper (Fy=11ksi, Fu=23ksi E=9,900ksi) DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 6 of 9

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Conform to MIL-G-18015 Type II or IV
Extruded in 6” widths with integral I-bar bearing bars at ≤6” on center.

Top surface solid with raised ribs unless otherwise shown.

Depth – ¾” / 1” / 1¼” / 1½” / 1¾” / 2” / 2¼” / 2½”
Planks shall have continuous tongue-and-groove interlock at each side, except interlocking planks shall be arranged so any 4’ wide section may be removed independently from neighboring grating sections Top Surface Pattern – Unpunched, / Rectangular pattern of 3” by 19/32” rectangular openings spaced 4” on center / 13/16” holes spaced 1 ½” on-center / 1” holes spaced 2” on-center
Aluminum Frame Conform to the following:

ASTM B221 Alloy 6063 T42 temper (Fy=11ksi, Fu=23ksi E=9,900ksi) Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Safety Grating Planks -
Steel
Sheet Steel Punched into 1⅞” by 11/16” open serrated diamond-shape pattern formed into plank sections.

Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

Bolts – Embedded
Eyebolts and Lifting
Eyebolts
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM F541 SAE Type 316
Dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Gratings Grating shall be fully banded including cutouts for penetrations ≥1.0” before galvanizing or installation.

Design Live Load Rating
(Outdoor Paved Areas)
AASHTO H-25 Loading
Design Live Uniform
Load Rating (Indoors or
Areas Above Pavement
Elevation)
Refer to Structural Load Sheet S1 for Floor Loads / 300 / 200 / 100 / 60 psf or 1000 / 300 / 250 / 300-lbf
concentrated load at midspan, whichever produces
greater stress or deflection
Span Refer to Plans / XX ft
Allowable Live Load
Deflection
<L/360 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Allowable Total Load
Deflection
<L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Maximum Weight of any
Piece or Leaf
80 lbs
Minimum Depth (Steel) See plans / ≥ 1” / 1¼” / 1½ / 1¾” / 2” / 2¼” / 2½” / 3” / 3½” / 4” / 5” / 6” / 7”
Minimum Depth
(Aluminum)
See plans / ≥ 1” / 1¼” / 1½ / 1¾” / 2” / 2¼” / 2½” / 3” / 3½” / 4” / 5” / 6” / 7”
Bearing Bar Size or
Flange Width
≥ ¼” / 5/16” / ⅜” / ½”
Bearing Bar Spacing
(Steel)
≤ 15/16” / 1-3/16” / 1⅜” / 1⅞” / 2⅜”
Bearing Bar Spacing
(Aluminum)
≤ 15/16” / 1-3/16” / 1⅜” / 1⅞” / 2⅜”
Minimum Moment of
Inertia (Imin)
Refer to plans / XXX in4/ft
Minimum Section
Modulus (Smin)
Refer to plans / XXX in3/ft
Substitutions in bar width and spacing may be proposed if section modulus is not compromised.

Traffic Surface Abrasive Grit Coating
Spans Fabricate single sections for each span.

Do not clamp 2 or more grating sections together within spans.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 7 of 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Cross Bars (Steel) Size ≥⅜” @ 6” on center
Weld or mechanically lock bars into position so no
movement occurs between bearing and cross bars.

Cross Bars (Aluminum) Size ≥⅜” @ 4” on center
Weld or mechanically lock bars into position so no
movement occurs between bearing and cross bars.

Cutouts Provide where required for equipment access or
penetrations, including valve operators, stems, and gate frames.

Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without
disturbing items penetrating gratings.

Banding Fully band grating perimeters.

Fully band cutouts or openings interrupting 4 or more
bearing bars with bars of same size and material as
bearing bars before galvanizing or installation
Fully band other cutouts for penetrations ≥1.0” before
galvanizing or installation.

Weld banding to each cut bearing bar.

Banding shall use same material and cross section as
bearing bars.

Clearances Provide ≤⅛” clearance between grating ends and inside face of vertical support angles.

Finish (Aluminum) Class I clear anodized finish
Toeplates Fabricate toeplates for attaching in field.

Lifting Eyebolts Size and Diameter ⅜” eyebolt (1”ID / 1-21/32”OD) ½” eyebolt (1-3/16”ID / 2’1/16” OD)
⅝” eyebolt (1⅜” ID / 2½”OD)
¾” eyebolt (1½”ID / 2-13/16”OD)
⅞” eyebolt (1-11/16”ID / 3¼”OD)
1” eyebolt (1-13/16”ID / 3-9/16”OD
Fastenings Fasten grating pieces in 2 locations to each support.

Non-Slip Nosings at Stairway
Tops
Grating edges forming top riser for stairways shall have integral non-slip nosing of width equal to stairway.

Support Angles Support Around
Openings
Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles needed to
receive gratings.

Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames.

Provide support angles matching grating material around openings.

Support angles in concrete shall be embedded.

Miter and weld angles at corners
Floor Plates and Cover Plates Thickness ¼” / ½” / ¾” / 1” D. Cut, drill, tap, and punch materials to receive hardware cleanly and accurately.

1. Remove burrs and ease edges to approximate 1/32” radius.

2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

E. Refer to Section 09 92 00 for galvanizing.

F. Before leaving shop, carbon steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or in contact with concrete shall receive one coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given second coat of same primer.

G. Final painting shall conform to Section 09 90 00.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 8 of 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install gratings and floor plates before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Aluminum surfaces to contact concrete shall be coated with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or one coat of zinc chromate.

D. Aluminum surfaces to contact dissimilar metals shall be insulated from dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

E. Secure embedded metalwork accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

F. Where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with specifications in Section 03 32 10.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install gratings and floor plates at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Applicable building code requirements.

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Install channels, angle seats, gratings and floor plates to tolerances and installation clearances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Install channels, angle seats, gratings and floor plates true and level using precision gauges and levels.

2. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

3. Attach removable units to supporting members using type and size of clips and fasteners shown, or if not shown, as recommended by Manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

4. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same.

5. Attach dissimilar materials by bolting as indicated above.

F. Attach fasteners and connections as follows:

1. Welding shall conform to Section 05 05 23.
a. Continuously weld permanent connections along entire area of contact.

2. Bolting shall conform to Section 05 05 23.
a. Conceal fastenings where possible.

3. Attach clips or saddles to bearing bars only.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 05 53 00 – Gratings and Floor Plates - 9 of 9
G. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

H. Exposed ends and edges of metal shall be slightly rounded.

I. Preassemble items in shop to extent possible.

1. With written permission of City’s Representative, minor or unforeseen access openings and banding of grating may be made in field.

2. Reinforce field-cut openings in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

J. Set seat angles for grating flush with finished floor.

K. Maintain gratings and checker plates flush with finished floor.

L. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at indicated locations.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Gratings
and Floor
Plates
No Bends, Twists
or Open Joints
No Projecting
Edges or Corners
at Intersections
Visual Inspection All gratings
and floor
plates
City City
Tolerances ≤ ⅛” in 3’ deviation from vertical
≤ ¼” in 20’ deviation from horizontal
≤ ¼” in 20’ deviation from Plan location
All gratings
and floor
plates
City City
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-Month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

IN SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment required for satisfactory preparation of surfaces and subsequent application of protective coatings.

B. Unless otherwise specified or directed by City’s Representative, paint all surfaces except:

1. Nameplates, Manufacturer’s data plates, UL labels, and stamping and instruction labels.

2. Grease fittings.

3. Threads of threaded fittings.

4. Mating, contacting, or rotating machined surfaces, operators, shafts, gears, linkages, bearings, packing glands, and sensing elements.

5. Platform gratings, stair treads, thresholds, and other walk surfaces.

6. Maintenance hole covers, and valve lids,

7. Aluminum or anodized aluminum items not in contact with concrete.

8. Stainless steel items.

9. Galvanized items.

10. Items embedded in concrete except aluminum.

11. Submerged brass or copper tubing.

12. Flexible items including flexible conduit, rubber items, and flexible or fabric connections to fans or ducts.

13. Buried pipe exteriors.

14. Pipe interiors.

15. Mortar-coated pipe and fittings.

16. Electrical conduit

17. Electrical wiring and insulation.

18. Factory-coated items having a complete factory finish, including control panels, and motors,
C. Protect surfaces not to be painted.

1. Prevent abrasive, solvent, surface preparation, or paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces.

2. Remove, mask, or use plastic or drop cloths to cover surfaces to be protected.

3. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process.

4. Mask openings in motors and machinery to prevent paint, dust, and other materials from entering.

5. Remove masking materials and clean surfaces at completion of painting operations.

D. Coat contacting metal surfaces of structures to be bolted together as follows:

1. When bolted contact is to exist between mating surfaces of ferrous or metal parts of identical chemical composition, such surfaces need not be painted, but resulting crevices shall be watertight and filled or sealed with paint.

2. Protect such surfaces during shipping and handling.
a. Apply rust-resistant oil or coating to be removed before surfaces are mated.

3. Do not paint contacting metal surfaces formed by high-strength bolts in friction-type or flanged connections.

4. Where nonmetal surface is in bolted contact with metal surface, clean contacting metal DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C surfaces and coat metal with 3 coats of specified primer.

E. Structural steel, and metal floor decking which will not be exposed in final construction shall have no finish other than 1 coat of shop primer.

F. Shop primers on surfaces to be coated shall be treated as temporary coatings intended to prevent ferrous or other surfaces from oxidizing during shipment.

1. Shop primers shall be chemically compatible with field primers and topcoats of this section.

2. Shop primers shall conform to MPI#79 and be universal modified-alkyd primers, fast curing, and lead- and chromate-free.

3. Shop primers not conforming to MPI#79 shall be accepted in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

4. Shop primers shall contain pigments to make them easily distinguishable from specified zinc-rich field primers.

5. Bituminous primers over metal are incompatible with coating systems specified herein and shall be field-removed by sandblasting prior to primer application.

6. Specified field primers may cover non-bituminous shop primers provided finish coating system Manufacturer deems them compatible with coating system Manufacturer’s painting system.

7. Thicknesses of shop primers will not be counted toward thicknesses of field primers.

G. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §210-1, §310, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.3 Definitions
A. The following definitions apply:

1. Coating: Refer to definition of “paint” herein.

2. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coat of paint measured in mils (1/1000”).

3. Finish: Refer to definition of “paint” herein.

4. Paint: Surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins and protective coatings other than anodizing or galvanizing, whether used as pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat

1.4 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete functional coating system for specified surface in compliance with applicable local air quality management regulations.

1. Comply with Manufacturer’s application requirements and applicable codes, standards, and South Coast Air Quality Management District regulations, including Rule 1107 for shop coating and Rule 1113 for field coating.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

1.5 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Equipment and its use shall conform to the following:

1. Use only good, clean brushes and equipment.
a. Clean brushes, buckets, and spraying equipment shall be cleaned immediately at end of each painting period.

2. Maintain Contractor’s painting and coating equipment in first-class working condition. a. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and oils from air. b. Perform blotter test at each start-up period and as deemed necessary by City’s Representative.

3. Steel wire brushes shall have sufficient rigidity to clean surface, shall be kept free of excess foreign matter, and shall be discarded when they are no longer effective.

4. Hand scrapers shall be made of suitable material ad kept sharp enough to be effective.

5. Brushes shall have sufficient body and bristle length to spread paint in uniform coat.

6. Rollers shall be of type that do not leave stippled texture in paint film.

7. On surfaces inaccessible for brushing, apply paint by spray or by sheepskin daubers especially made for this purpose.

8. Spraying shall be done by experienced operators.
a. Provide water trap acceptable to City’s Representative on spray painting equipment.

9. Use mechanical mixers to mix paint sufficient length of time before use to mix pigment and vehicle.
a. To keep pigment in suspension, keep paint mixed while being applied.

10. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings and techniques in accordance with Manufacturer’s application instructions.

C. Paint shall be homogenous, free of contaminants, and of consistency suitable for intended use.

1. Pigment shall be finely ground and properly dispersed in vehicle such that pigment does not settle, cake, or thicken in container, or become granular or curdled.

D. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR BY

RETESTS PAID
FOR BY
Painting and
Coating
Materials
Compliance with
Contract
Requirements
Federal Standard 141 Test
representative
sample
Contractor Contractor
Paint from
Proposed
“equals”
Spectrographic
and Durability
Tests
Federal Standard 141
and applicable ASTM
standards
As directed Contractor Contractor
Valve, Pump,
Hydrant, Meter
and Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interiors
Holidays ASTM D5162
Certify as holiday free
using low voltage (22.5-
80V with approximately
80,000Ω resistance)
holiday detector and
sponge saturated with

0.5% sodium chloride
solution
Each lined item Contractor Contractor
Lining Thickness Verify thickness with
magnetic-type dry film
thickness gauge.

Each lined item Contractor Contractor
E. Surface preparation and priming operations accomplished offsite for prefabricated structural members will be monitored 100% by City-selected quality control inspector at City’s option.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

1. Where factory Work is performed >50 miles from jobsite, costs incurred by offsite inspection shall be borne by Contractor.

2. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for off-site inspection and reimbursement requirements.

F. Submit schedule of shop activities as specified below under “Submittals.” G. If shop Work is not scheduled on consecutive basis to facilitate scheduling of offsite inspector, expenses incurred by multiple trips to shop will be borne by Contractor.

H. Failure by City to exercise option for shop inspection shall in no way relieve Contractor of their duty to meet Contract requirements.

1.6 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

2. ANSI Z535 American National Standard for Safety Colors

3. ASTM D16 Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products

4. ASTM D449 Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing

5. ASTM D1187 Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal

6. ASTM D4138 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive, Cross-Sectioning Means

7. ASTM D5162 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates

8. ASTM D6386 Surface Preparation of Galvanized Surfaces

9. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

10. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

11. Federal Specification TT-P-19 Paint, Latex (Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior Wood and Masonry)

12. Federal Specification TT-S-230 Sealing Compound, Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component Chemically Curing

13. Federal Standard 141 Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Materials: Methods of Inspection, Sampling, and Testing

14. MPI#79 Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal

15. NACE 6D-173 Manual for Painter Safety

16. NACE RP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings

17. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

18. NSF/ANSI 600 Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water

19. SSPC Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects

20. SSPC PA1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting

21. SSPC PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges

22. SSPC PA3 Safety in Paint Applications

23. SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning

24. SSPC SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning

25. SSPC SP3 Power Tool Cleaning

26. SSPC SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning

27. SSPC SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning

28. SSPC SP7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

29. SSPC SP10/NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaning

30. SSPC SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

31. SSPC SP13/NACE 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete

32. SSPC SP15 Commercial-Grade Power Tool Cleaning

33. SSPC Vis1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces

34. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §210-1 “Paint”

35. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §310 “Painting”

1.7 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

MOBILIZATION SUBMITTALS
Applicator’s Quality
Assurance
Submit list of ≥5 completed projects of similar size and complexity.

Include product name and location, name of owner, name of contractor, name of City’s representative, name of coating Manufacturer, approximate area of coatings applied and date of completion
Applicator’s Quality
Assurance for
Submerged or
In addition to above, submit letter from coating system Manufacturer on their stationery stating application Contractor is factory-authorized and trained to apply their product and that coating system Manufacturer will honor specified warranty of DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Severe-Service
Coating Systems
systems applied by applicator.

Paint, Color, and
Finish Schedule
Submit finish schedule showing the following for each surface type.

1. Surface description

2. Manufacturer of proposed system

3. Proposed Surface preparation

4. Proposed primer product and thickness

5. Proposed intermediate coat and thickness

6. Proposed finish coat and thickness

7. Proposed color

8. Proposed finish (flat, eggshell, satin, semi-gloss or high gloss) Identify proposed exceptions or departures from Contract Documents in submitted finish schedule along with reason for proposed exception or departure (eg Specified product no longer marketed in Southern California.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Include VOC data.

Application
Instructions
Submit for each paint and coating per Application Instruction requirements.

Include:

1. Surface Preparation Requirements.

2. MSDS sheets identifying flammability, toxicity, allergenic properties and other characteristics requiring field precautions.

3. Safety practices.

4. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats.

5. % solids by volume.

6. Recommended thinners.

7. Statement verifying selected prime coat is recommended by Manufacturer for use with selected intermediate and finish coats.

8. Recommended application, equipment, humidity, and temperature limitations.

9. Curing requirements and instructions.

10. Patching, repair, and touch-up instructions.

SAMPLES
Material and Color
Samples
Submit current Manufacturer’s color samples showing full range of available standard colors.

On City’s request, field-apply up to 3 coating samples at no extra cost for review.

City will select colors.

After City-selects color, submit 2 sets of color samples for each color and finish type.

Show color formula on back of each color sample.

Include color samples with formulas in O&M instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of
Compliance

1. With each delivery of paint and coating materials, Manufacturer shall certify materials conform to Contract Documents.

2. Submit certification that coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality Management District rules and regulations for products and application

3. Submit coating system and application certification that coatings conform to specified requirements and are suitable for intended application per certificate of compliance requirements.

Inspection Reports 1. Submit inspection reports and data collection sheets for surface preparation and profile checks, coating thickness measurements for each coat, holiday tests, ambient conditions, and other pertinent records.

2. Submit written 3rd-party report from accepted testing agency describing inspections made and actions taken to correct nonconforming Work.

3. Report nonconforming Work not corrected.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
O & M & Cleaning
Instructions
Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Application Instructions, O&M Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Material Samples.

1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of painting and coating products.

C. Labels on coating system containers shall show:

1. Coating or material name, formula, or specification number

2. Generic type of material

3. Manufacturer

4. Color name and number

5. Batch or lot number

6. Date of manufacture

7. Shelf-life date

8. Mixing and thinning instructions

9. Hazards connected with use of coating system and precautions, if any, required to prevent injury.

D. Deliver materials to Project Site in original, unopened containers bearing label information specified above.

E. Store paint and coating materials used on job in 1 place designated by City’s Representative.

1. Store materials in clean dry area within temperature range stipulated by Manufacturer.

2. Store paint materials in area ≥50°F

3. Store flammable materials in accordance with local building codes.

4. Separate flammable materials and store in suitable area.

F. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.

1. Do not open or use painting and coating system materials until City’s Representative has inspected containers and has obtained necessary data from information shown on containers and labels.

2. Do not use paint until ≥7 days have elapsed since date of manufacture.

3. Do not use materials beyond Manufacturer’s shelf-life or pot-life limits.

4. Do not use mixed materials beyond pot life limits.

5. Do not apply new coatings to surfaces beyond Manufacturer’s specified recoat limits.

G. Protect materials from damage or contamination.

1. Keep containers closed when not in use.

H. Deliver, store and handle shop-primed steel and shop-coated items as follows:

1. Upon completing blasting and priming, primer on steel shall be cured sufficiently to minimize damage during handling.

2. When transporting structural steel, use spacers and protective devices to eliminate scuffing during unloading.

3. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from shop-primed surfaces after separation.

4. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure loaded items and minimize damage to shop-coated surfaces during shipping.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

5. Handle shop-coated items with care during loading/unloading, installation, and erection to minimize damage.

6. Prevent abrasion damage during loading, unloading, storage and erection. a. Do not slide steel across another plate or member except to fit sheets into position during fabrication.

7. Fully cover shop-primed or shop-coated items with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.

8. Do not place or store shop-coated items on ground or on top of other Work unless ground or Work is covered with protective covering or tarpaulin.

9. Steel may be elevated above ground level or other steel members using accepted spacers.

10. Place shop-coated items above ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports.

1.9 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Materials shall be of current manufacture and shall conform to applicable regulations for application and intended service.

1. Materials shall conform to applicable Federal, state and local regulations, including South Coast Air Quality Management District Regulations.

2. Coats of coating systems shall come from 1 Manufacturer and shall be accepted by Manufacturer for intended service.

3. Should product specified herein no longer be manufactured or not meet current regulations, substitute currently manufactured product of at least equal performance meeting applicable regulations subject to City’s Representative’s acceptance, at no additional cost.

B. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service.

1. Listed products establish a standard of quality.

2. Standard products of Manufacturers other than those listed will be accepted when it is proved to satisfaction of City’s Representative that they are equal to or better than specified materials in the following properties:
a. Quality
b. Composition
c. Utility
d. Durability
e. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage
f. Life expectancy
g. Ability to recoat in future
h. Solids content by volume
i. Dry film thickness per coat
j. Compatibility with other coatings
k. Suitability for intended service
l. Resistance to chemical attack
m. Temperature limitations in service and during application n. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats o. Ease and convenience of application
p. Ease and convenience of repairing damaged areas
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C q. Stability of colors
C. Paints and coatings used on Work shall comply with VOC limits set forth in CALGreen Code §5.504.4.3.

D. Products listed were in general use in 2018.

1. If changes in air quality, water quality or other regulations render listed product obsolete, substitute equivalent product shown in Manufacturer’s literature as being formulated and appropriate for surface to be coated.

E. Factory-applied base coatings to specific products may differ slightly from those listed below where primers are factory-applied by Manufacturers.

F. Base-coat substitutions for convenience of Contractor are subject to the following.

1. Surface preparation shall meet or exceed surface preparations specified below.

2. Primer or base coat shall be that recommended and normally used by Manufacturer for condition and exposure of finished installation.

3. Chemical composition of factory-applied base coats shall be similar to chemical composition specified below.

4. If different coating system is recommended by Manufacturer to meet performance specifications of other sections, Manufacturer shall notify Contractor in writing and said notice shall be forwarded to City’s Representative.

5. Verify compatibility of adjacent coats with coating Manufacturers.

6. If necessary, apply barrier coat between prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility.

7. Total DFT shall be ≥ DFT specified.

8. Finish coat shall be as specified.

9. In event of paint system failure, repair paint system in failed area to specifications of this section.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers for pretreatment and shop coats include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Aluminum
Pretreatment
Henkel North America Bonderite C-IC 33 Madison Heights, MI (248) 583-9300 International AWL Grip Alumiprep 33 Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Accepted equal
Steel Pretreatment Henkel North America Galvaprep 5 Madison Heights, MI (248) 583-9300 Accepted equal
Surface Cleaners
and Degreasers
AkzoNobel / Devoe – Devprep 88 Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Carboline Company Surface Cleaner No 3 St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654 Sherwin-Williams Co Clean and Etch Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979 Ontario, CA (909) 717-3064
Accepted equal

MPI#79 Universal
Shop Primer
AkzoNobel - Ameritone - Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Benjamin Moore and Company – Vista Paints Montvale, NJ (201) 573-9600 Carboline Company St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654
Chemcoat
PPG Protective & Marine Coating Amercoat Pittsburgh, PA (412) 434-3131 Yorba Linda CA (714) 777-0300
Primetime Manufacture
Rust-Oleum International LLC / RPM Vernon Hills, IL(877) 385-8155 Sherwin-Williams Company Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979
Ontario, CA (909) 717-3064
Tnemec Company, Inc. Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Compton, CA (310) 804-2326
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C H. Acceptable Manufacturers for industrial and architectural applications include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Industrial Coating
Systems
3M Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
AkzoNobel - Ameritone - Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Ameron Corrosion Control Division Brea, CA (714) 256-7755 Carboline Company St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654
Dampney Company, Inc. Everett, MA (800) 537-7023
Dudick, Inc., Streetsboro, OH Streetsboro, OH (330) 562-1970 E I DuPont de Nemours & Company Wilmington, DE (302) 774-1000 GET Global Eco Technologies Pittsburg, CA (925) 473-9250 Henkel North America Madison Heights, MI (248) 583-9300 IET Integrated Environmental Technologies Santa Barbara, CA (805) 969-2292 PPG Protective & Marine Coating Amercoat Pittsburgh, PA (412) 434-3131 Yorba Linda CA (714) 777-0300
Rust-Oleum International LLC / RPM Vernon Hills, IL(877) 385-8155 Sanchem, Inc. Chicago, IL (312) 733-6100
Sherwin-Williams Company Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979
Ontario, CA (909) 717-3064
Superior Environmental Products, Inc. Addison TX (972) 490-0566 Tnemec Company, Inc. Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Compton, CA (310) 804-2326
Wasser Corporation Auburn, WA (800) 627-2968
ZRC Worldwide Marshfield, MA (781) 319-0400
Accepted equal
I. Substitutions will be considered providing the following minimum conditions are met.

1. Request for substitution shall be accepted in writing per Section 01 63 00.

2. Proposed coating system dry film thickness shall equal or exceed specified system thickness.

3. Proposed coating system shall employ an equal or greater number of separate coats.

4. Proposed coating system shall employ coatings or paints of same generic type.

5. Requests for substitution shall include full descriptive literature and required for submittal above including generic coating type, non-volatile content by volume and list of 10 similar projects ≥3 years old where coatings or paints have been applied to similar exposure.

6. City’s Representative may also require submittal of laboratory data sheets certified by independent testing laboratory satisfactory to City’s Representative, showing results of complete spectrographic and durability tests on proposed substitute.

7. City’s Representative shall be sole and final judge of acceptability of substitutions.

J. In addition to requirements stated elsewhere, acceptable manufacturers shall demonstrate ≥10 years’ domestic experience in manufacture of coating systems similar to those furnished.

K. In addition to requirements stated elsewhere, painting, coating, and coating application accessories shall be products of 1 manufacturer.

L. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and additives shall conform to Manufacturer’s application instructions.

2.2 Materials - General
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Surface preparation, prime coatings, and finish coats for various systems are specified herein.

1. Intermediate and finish coats shall be of slightly contrasting shades of specified color.

2. Coating alternates specified shall serve as general guide for type of coating desired.

C. Painting and coating materials shall be specially adapted for use around surface to be coated in its expected environment.

1. Primer coats shall be used as recommended by Manufacturer for these conditions and shall be applied at rates and thicknesses recommended by Manufacturer.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C D. Materials schedules below list competing products of 2 or 3 manufacturers to establish general standard of quality required.

1. Other listed manufacturers shall furnish products of equivalent chemistry, thickness and product life where their products are not itemized.

E. The following colors are required:

ITEM FINISH COLOR

TREATMENT
PLANTS

FINISH COLOR

PUMPS, WELLS,

AND ENCLOSED
PIPING

FINISH COLOR (AT
GRADE or EXPOSED)

RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
Air and Vacuum Relief Valve Assemblies Brown Purple Purple Air and Vacuum Relief Valve Covers Purple Purple
Piping Brown Purple Purple
Pressure Vessels Brown Purple Purple
Pump and Pump Bases (excluding motor) Brown Purple Purple Valves (all types) Brown Purple Purple
Valve Can Lids Purple Purple Purple
Vault Hatch Lids Factory Finish Factory Finish Factory Finish Fire Hydrants Purple Purple

SITE AND BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS
Safety Markings Safety Yellow Safety Yellow Safety Yellow Electrical Equipment, Controls, Panels ANSI safety white ANSI safety white ANSI safety white Electrical Motors (Do not field coat) ANSI 61 light grey ANSI 61 light grey ANSI 61 light grey Instruments ANSI 61 light grey ANSI 61 light grey ANSI 61 light grey Plant Process Wastewater Piping Refer to Section
01 73 33
Refer to Section 01 73
33 Refer to Section 01 73
33 Other Plant Piping Refer to Section
01 73 33
Refer to Section 01 73
33 Refer to Section 01 73
33 Valve Interiors White White White
F. Color definitions shall be as follows:

COLOR PANTONE ID #
(CLOSEST MATCH

IN SUNLIGHT)

COMMERCIAL COLOR NAME
PPG/PMC Sherwin Williams Tnemec
ANSI Safety Green Pantone 335C Safety Green4085 -
384U
ANSI Safety Red Pantone186C Safety Red 4081 -
485C 2X
ANSI Safety
Orange
Pantone151C Safety Orange 4083 -
021C
ANSI Safety Yellow Pantone109C Flirtatious 1212-7 Safety Yellow 4084 - U2X
89HT
ANSI Safety Purple Pantone 259C
ANSI Safety White White High-Reflective White
7757
White 00WH
ANSI Safety Gray
ANSI Safety Brown
ANSI Safety Blue Pantone 285C
ANSI 24 Gray ANSI 24
ANSI 33 Gray ANSI 33
ANSI 45 Gray ANSI 45
ANSI 49 Medium
Light Gray
ANSI 49
ANSI 61 Light Gray ANSI 61
Flint Gray Flint Gray 4019
Light Blue Pantone 2925C
Dark Blue Pantone 2766C Blue Tang 1160-7 Honorable Blue 6811 Old Glory Blue 78BL Purple Pantone 512C
Reclaimed Water
Purple
Pantone 522 Grape Arbor 1247-5 Berry Frappé 9068 Reclaimed Water Purple 16SF
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C Green Royal Hunter Green
1133-7
Derbyshire 6741 Garden 35GN
Olive-lite Pantone 451C
Safety Orange Field Poppy 1195-7 Invigorate 6886 79HT
Safety Red Rum Punch 1190-7 Positive Red 6871 69HT
Desert Sand Desert Camel 12-16 Ligonier Tan 7717 Desert Sands 04BR Brown Fudge 1073-7 Rugged Brown 6062 Safety Brown 15SF
G. Color trade names are provided for reference and do not indicate preference for Manufacturer.

1. Alternative Manufacturers may be furnished, provided colors can be matched H. Final colors will be selected by City from submitted color samples.

I. Color pigments shall be pure, non-fading, types to suit substrates and intended service shown.

1. Lead content shall not exceed amounts permitted by federal, state and local government regulations.

2. Paints applied to submerged concrete or metal contacting potable water shall be approved by the California State Department of Health Services

2.3 Materials – Painting and Coating of Valves, Pumps, Flow Meters, Pipe Supports, Exposed Piping, and Pipeline Appurtenances
A. Coating shall occur as follows:

1. Shop prime exteriors at place of manufacture.

2. Prepare the following surfaces to conform to SSPC-SP6/NACE3 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” before shop priming:
a. Exterior items
b. Items to receive zinc-rich primer
c. Items to receive high-performance coatings

3. Prepare other surfaces to conform to SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning” before shop priming.

4. Shop prime to conform to applicable sections of SSPC PA1 “Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting”

5. Coat buried metal valves, above ground metal valves, flow meters, and pumps at place of manufacture unless otherwise directed.

6. Apply other primer, intermediate, and finish coats to exterior of pipe supports, exposed piping, and pipeline appurtenances in field unless otherwise directed.

7. Finish coat on exposed pipe, valves, and appurtenances shall match color and sheen of adjacent piping.
a. Where factory coat does not match color and sheen of adjacent piping, apply additional finish coat to match adjacent piping.

8. Coat hand-wheels, pipe supports, and floor stands same as valves.

9. For pipe areas employing grooved or shouldered couplings, limit coating thickness in groove or shoulder area to ≤10 mils.

B. Coat non-buried piping and piping appurtenance exteriors with this coating system:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Valve, Pump, ,
Flow Meter, Pipe
Support, Piping, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Exterior Coating
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy / Aliphatic
Acrylic Urethane
Total DFT 8.0-15.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat (ShopApplied) Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2 VOC
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Series L69
Epoxoline
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Intermediate Coat Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69
Epoxoline
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2 VOC
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Finish Coat Aliphatic or Acrylic
Urethane or
Polysiloxane
Tnemec
Endura-Shield II
Series 1095
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sher-Loxane-800
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amershield VOC
Polyurethane
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils
C. Coating systems for buried valve, flow meter, pipeline and pipeline appurtenance exteriors shall meet requirements for buried metal specified elsewhere in this section.

D. Apply interior lining of valves 3” and larger as follows:

1. Coat interior metal surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces.
a. Remove protuberances which may produce pinholes in lining. b. Round sharp edges to be coated.
c. Remove contaminants which may prevent bonding of lining.

E. Apply interior lining of valves 3” and larger per AWWA C550.

2.4 Metal, Interior and Exterior, Normal Exposure
A. Coat exposed non-galvanized steelwork, non-galvanized handrails, exposed pipework, fittings, mechanical equipment, pumps, machinery, doors, door frames and window sash with this coating system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for NormalExposure Steel
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy / Aliphatic
Acrylic Urethane
Total DFT 8.0-15.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
(Where blast cleaning is not possible, provide SSPC SP-15 CommercialGrade Power Tool cleaning.) Base Coat (ShopApplied) Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69 Epoxoline
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2 VOC
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Intermediate Coat
(Field-Applied)
Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69 Epoxoline
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2 VOC
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Finish Coat (FieldApplied) Aliphatic or Acrylic
Urethane or
Polysiloxane
Tnemec
Endura-Shield II
Series 1095
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sher-Loxane-800
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amershield VOC
Polyurethane
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils
B. Metalwork previously given shop prime coat accepted by City's Representative shall be touched up as required in field with Tnemec Series 27 WB Typoxy or equal.

2.5 Metal, Severe Exposure to Moisture or Chemical Fumes A. Coat exterior non-submerged metal with severe exposure to moisture or chemical fumes with this coating system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for Metal
Exposed to
Moisture or
Chemical Fumes
Aromatic Urethane
Zinc-Rich Primer /
Modified Polyamine
Total DFT 8.5-14.5 mils
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Epoxy / Aliphatic
Acrylic Urethane
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-white metal blast cleaning

2.0-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat Aromatic Urethane
Zinc Rich Primer
Tnemec
Series 94 H2O
Tneme-zinc
DFT 2.5-3.5 mils
Gray Green
Sherwin Williams
Corethane Galvapac
2K100
DFT 2.5-3.5 mils
Gray Green

PPG/PMC
Dimetcote 21-5
DFT 2.0-5.0 mils
Gray
Intermediate Coat Modified Polyamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69 Epoxy
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 4.0-6.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2VOC
DFT 4.0-6.0 mils
Finish Coat Aliphatic or Acrylic
Urethane or
Polysiloxane
Tnemec
Series 1095

2.0-3.0 mils DFT
Sherwin Williams
Sher-Loxane-800
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amershield VOC
Polyurethane
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils
B. Coat interior non-submerged metal with severe exposure to hydrogen sulfide fumes with this coating system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for Interior
Metal Exposed to
High Hydrogen
sulfide fumes
Modified Polyamine
Epoxy
Total DFT 30.0-40.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-white metal blast cleaning
≥3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat Modified Polyamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 435 Perma
Shield
DFT 15-20 mils
Sherwin Williams
Duraplate 6100
DFT: 15-20 mils

PPG/PMC
Novaguard 810
Phenolic novolac epoxy
DFT 15-20 mils
Finish Coat Modified Polyamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 435 Perma
Shield
DFT 15-20 mils
Sherwin Williams
Duraplate 6100
DFT: 15-20 mils

PPG/PMC
Novaguard 810
Phenolic novolac epoxy
DFT 15-20 mils

2.6 Nonferrous Metal, Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, Aluminum, Copper, or Brass A. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, nonferrous, and factoryfinished materials and surfaces shall not be painted except as otherwise specified.

1. Nameplates painted over shall be replaced in kind.

2. Grease fittings painted over shall be replaced in kind.

3. Galvanized finish will not be considered factory finish.

B. Coat aluminum embedded in or in contact with concrete to prevent electrolysis.

C. Coat galvanized metal, aluminum, copper or brass with this coating system where coating is required.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
Galvanized Metal,
Aluminum, Copper
or Brass
Hydrophobic
Acrylic Primer /
HDP Acrylic
Polymer Finish
Total DFT 4.0-10.0 mils
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed by SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
Prepare and scarify galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM D6386 Base Coat Etch Chemically etch in
accordance with
Tnemec Technical
Memo #10-78 and in
Chemically etch in
accordance with
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
Prepare surface in
accordance with
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
accordance with
ASTM D6386

Intermediate Coat Hydrophobic
Acrylic
Tnemec
Series V115 Uni Bond
DF
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2VOC
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
Finish Coat HDP Acrylic
Polymer or
Polysiloxane
Tnemec
Series 1029
Enduratone
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sher-Loxane-800
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amershield VOC
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

2.7 Metal, Buried
A. Coat buried metal which includes valves, bolts, nuts, structural steel and fittings with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for Buried
Metal
Hybrid Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Total DFT 12.0-24.0
mils
Total DFT 16.0-24.0
mils
Total DFT 16.0-24.0
mils
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
≥1.5-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat Hybrid Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 27 WB Typoxy
DFT 6.0-12.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sherglass FF Low
VOC
DFT: 8.0-12.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2VOC
DFT 8.0-12.0 mils
Finish Coat Hybrid Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 27 WB Typoxy
DFT 6.0-12.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sherglass FF Low
VOC
DFT: 8.0-12.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2VOC
DFT 8.0-12.0 mils

2.8 Materials – Painting and Coating of PVC, CPVC and FRP A. Coat PVC, CPVC and FRP items with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
PVC, CPVC and
FRP pipe
Modified
Polyamine Epoxy
/ Pigmented
Aliphatic Acrylic
Urethane
Total DFT 4.0-8.0 mils
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning followed by thorough and uniform abrasion with medium grain sandpaper
Base Coat Modified
Polyamine Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69 Epoxy
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646-100
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amerlock 2VOC
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils
Finish Coat Pigmented
Aliphatic Acrylic
Urethane or
Polysiloxane
Tnemec
Endura-Shield II
Series 1095
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils,
Sherwin Williams
Sher-Loxane-800
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils

PPG/PMC
Amershield VOC
Polyurethane
DFT 2.0-4.0 mils
B. Coat PVC, CPVC and FRP where such pipe is above grade and exposed to sunlight, or where required in vaults and buildings for color coding of pipes, or to match adjacent finishes.

2.9 Masonry, Exterior, Normal Exposure
A. Where Contract Documents require masonry to be painted, paint exterior masonry surfaces subject to normal exposure with this system.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for Exterior
Masonry Surfaces
Modified
Waterborne
Acrylate
Total DFT 8.0-16.0 mils
Surface Preparation Remove dirt, dust, grease, laitance or other deleterious matter.

Filler Filler Fill cracks and voids with suitable caulking material compatible with specified coating.

Base Coat Modified
Waterborne
Acrylate
Tnemec
Series 156
Envirocrete
DFT 4.0-8.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Loxon Block Surfacer
DFT 8.0–12.0 mils
PPG Paints
Perma-Crete 4-100
DFT 9.3 – 11.6 mils
Finish Coat Modified
Waterborne
Acrylate
Tnemec
Series 156
Envirocrete
DFT 4.0-8.0 mils
Sherwin Williams Pro
Industrial Acrylic
DFT 2.0–4.0 mils
PPG Paints
Pitt-Tech Plus
DFT 2.0 – 4.0 mils
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Pre-application meeting shall be held 1 to 2 weeks before start of coating system application for products covering > 100 ft2.

1. Meeting shall be attended by Contractor, applicator, Manufacturer’s representative and City’s Representative and shall cover:
a. Environmental requirements set by Manufacturer for their product b. Protection of surfaces not scheduled to be coated
c. Stormwater pollution prevention requirements
d. Surface preparation
e. Application
f. Repair
g. Field quality control
h. Dust control
i. Cleaning
j. Protection of coating systems
k. 11-month inspection
l. Coordination with other work
B. Notify City’s Representative ≥3 days before start of field surface preparation Work.

C. Surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in proper condition to receive material specified before coating or painting is done.

1. Do not apply painting materials to wet, damp, dusty, dirty, fingermarked, rough, unfinished, or defective surfaces.

2. Prepare concrete, iron, steel, and wood surfaces in accordance with applicable Manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC standards.

D. Solvent cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP1 and the following:

1. Oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, contaminants, and salts shall be removed by solvent cleaning, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or other methods which may not involve solvent action before hand cleaning or power tool cleaning.

2. Cleaning with solutions of alkaline cleaners shall be followed by fresh-water rinse. a. When recommended by paint Manufacturer or specified, follow fresh-water rinse with passivating dichromate or dilute chromic acid wash.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

3. Remove oil or grease by 1 of the following methods:
a. Wiping or scrubbing surface with rags or brushes wetted with solvent. b. (Final wiping shall use clean solvent and clean rags or brushes.) c. Spraying surface with solvent.
d. (Final spraying shall use clean solvent.)
e. Complete immersion in tank or tanks of solvent.
f. (Solvent for last immersion shall not contain detrimental amounts of contaminant.) g. Emulsion cleaners may be used provided surface treated is subsequently washed to remove detrimental residues.
h. Steam cleaning may be used, using detergents or cleaners provided surface is steamed or washed to remove detrimental residues.

4. If chemical paint strippers are used to remove paint, use suitable solvent to remove wax from stripper remaining on surface.
a. Remove alkaline residues from paint strippers by washing surface with fresh water. b. Remove all detrimental paint residue or stripping agent.

5. Regardless of solvent-cleaning method, no detrimental residue shall remain following cleaning.

E. Hand cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP2 and the following:

1. Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, dirt, and loose or non-adherent paint by hand brushing, hand sanding, hand scraping, hand chipping, hand impact tools, or combination of these methods.
a. Although not all mill scale, rust, and paint need be removed, loose mill scale, rust, paint and other detrimental foreign matter shall be removed. b. Remove stratified rust (rust scale) by hand hammering, hand chipping, hand impact tools or combination of these methods.
c. Remove loose mill scale and loose or non-adherent rust by hand wire brushing, hand sanding, hand scraping, or combination of these methods.

2. Rust and mill scale are classified as “loose mill scale” and “loose or non-adherent rust” if they can be removed from steel surface by vigorous hand brushing with new, commercially available wire brush of suitable type at rate of 2 ft2
per minute.
a. This test shall be conducted on area not previously brushed, scraped, or sanded, but from which all detrimental stratified rust (rust scale), oil, and grease (if present) have been removed.
b. This test establishes standard for surface preparation and shall and shall not be considered as establishing production rate by cleaning. c. Regardless of methods used for cleaning, clean surface at least as well as surface resulting from this test.

3. Operate hand tools in such manner no burrs or sharp edges are left on surface and no sharp cuts are made into steel.

4. After removing loose or non-adherent paint, feather edges of remaining old paint so repainted surface will have smooth appearance.
a. Remaining old paint shall have sufficient adhesion so it cannot be lifted as layer by inserting blade of putty knife beneath it.

5. Remove accessible weld flux and spatter by hand scraping or hand impact tools, followed by wire brushing.

6. Clean accessible portions of all partially enclosed steel members. a. Before assembly, clean new Work areas which will be inaccessible after assembly.

7. Properly clean rivets, welds, corners, joints, and openings.

8. After completing hand cleaning, remove dust and other loose matter from surface.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C a. If detrimental amounts of grease or oil are still present, spot clean these areas with solvent.

F. Power-tool cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP3 and the following:

1. Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint with power wire brushes, power impact tools, power grinders, power sanders, or combination of these methods. a. Although not all mill scale, rust, and paint need be removed, loose mill scale, rust, paint and other detrimental foreign matter shall be removed. b. Remove stratified rust (rust scale) by power impact tools or, if minor quantities are present, by hand.
c. Large areas of tight or well-adhered paint, even if removable, shall only be removed where specified.

2. Acceptable power-tool cleaning methods include:
a. Power wire brushing, using rotary, radial, or cup brushes of suitable size, entering all accessible openings, angles, joints, and corners.
b. (Steel wire of such brushes shall have sufficient rigidity to clean surface, shall be kept free of excess foreign matter, and shall be discarded when no longer effective. c. (Clean surface, but do not burnish to detrimental degree.) d. Power impact tool cleaning, using power-driven chipping or scaling hammers, rotary scalers, single- or multiple-piston scalers, or similar impact cleaning tools. e. (Maintain cutting edges of such tools in effective condition.) f. Power grinding, using abrasive wheels or power sanding using abrasive materials. g. (Discard sanding or abrasive materials when they become ineffective.)

3. Rust and mill scale are classified as “loose mill scale,” “loose or non-adherent rust,” and “loose or removable paint,” if they can be removed from steel surface by power wire brushing using commercial electric or air wire-brushing machine operated at speed under load of 3,450 rpm and equipped with 6” diameter cup brush of double-row, knotted construction, made of No.20-gage music wire.
a. Hold brush against steel surface with force of 16 lbf. b. Rate of cleaning shall be ≥ 2 ft2
per minute
c. This test shall be conducted on area not previously brushed, scraped, or sanded, but from which all detrimental stratified rust (rust scale), oil, and grease (if present) have been removed.
d. This test establishes standard for surface preparation and shall and shall not be considered as establishing production rate by cleaning. e. Clean surface at least as well as surface resulting from this test.

5. Remove accessible weld flux and spatter by hand scraping or hand impact tools, followed by wire brushing.

6. Clean accessible portions of all partially enclosed steel members. a. Before assembly, clean new Work areas which will be inaccessible after assembly.

7. Properly clean rivets, welds, corners, joints, and openings, using power wire brushing, sharp chisels used in chipping, scaling hammers, rotary grinders, sanders, or combination of these methods.

8. After completing hand cleaning, remove dust and other loose matter from surface. a. If detrimental amounts of grease or oil are still present, spot clean these areas with solvent.

G. Power-tool cleaning to bare metal, where specified, shall conform to SSPC SP11.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C H. Abrasive blast cleaning (sandblasting) shall be completed as follows:

1. Abrasive blast cleaning is defined as removing mill scale, rust, rust scale, oxide, paint, contamination, and foreign matter from surfaces, using fine abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh propelled through nozzles or centrifugal wheels..

2. Metal surface may be cleaned by 1 of the following methods:
a. Dry sandblasting, using compressed air blast nozzles and dry sand of particle size no larger than that passing #18 mesh screen, US sieve series. b. Wet or water vapor sandblasting, using compressed air blast nozzles, water, and sand of particle size no larger than that passing #18 mesh screen, US sieve series. c. Grit blasting using compressed air blast nozzles and crushed grit made of cast iron, malleable iron, steel, or synthetic grits other than sand. d. (Largest commercial grade of metal grit permitted shall be SAE Grit #G25 abrasive material.)
e. Shot blasting, using compressed air nozzles and cast iron, malleable iron, steel, or synthetic shot.
f. (Largest commercial grade shot permitted shall be SAE Shot #S330.) g. Closed, re-circulating nozzle blasting using compressed air, vacuum, and any of the preceding abrasives,
h. Grit blasting using centrifugal wheels and crushed grit made of cast iron, malleable iron, steel, or synthetic grits.
i. (Largest commercial grade grit permitted shall be SAE Shot #330.)

3. Compressed air used for nozzle blasting shall be free of detrimental amounts of condensed water, or oil.
a. Provide adequate separators or traps.

4. Do not use abrasives that have become contaminated in automatic equipment. a. When shop or field blast cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles.
b. Abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be new, washed, graded and free of contaminants which might interfere with adhesion of coatings and paints. c. Do not reuse abrasive unless accepted by City’s Representative. d. Particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall produce specified surface profile in per recommendations of Manufacturer of paint or coating system, subject to acceptance by City’s Representative.

5. Implement debris containment systems for surfaces subject to abrasive blast cleaning, regardless of whether LBP/LCP materials are present.
a. Mask openings in motors and machinery to prevent paint and abrasive materials from entering.
b. Place drop cloths or apply masking tape where required to prevent spatter, dripping and overspray from contact with floors, surfaces and equipment not scheduled to receive paint or coatings.
c. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be blasted and/or coated from damage or coloration during surface preparation and coating application. d. Perform blast cleaning operations in manner such that no damage is done to partially or fully completed Work.

6. Remove weld spatter, sharp edges, burrs, and weld slag from metal surfaces. a. Grind smooth rough welds, beads, peaked corners, sharp edges, erection lugs and protrusions in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3. b. Neutralize welds with chemical solvent compatible with specified coating materials. c. Use clean cloths and chemical solvent.
d. Wipe dry with clean cloths.
e. Do not leave residue on cleaned surfaces.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

7. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1. a. Use clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. b. Do not leave film or greasy residue on cleaned surfaces before sandblasting.

8. Do not sandblast or prepare more surface than can be coated or painted in same working day.
a. Sandblasting shall be done not more than 8 hours ahead of painting, subject to humidity and weather conditions between time of sandblasting and painting operations.

9. Complete abrasive blast cleaning using dry or water vapor methods unless otherwise directed.
a. Maintain dust emissions within legal levels and within levels which will not create nuisance.

10. Equip abrasive blasting nozzles with “deadman” emergency shutoff nozzles. a. Blast nozzle pressure shall be ≥95 psi and shall be verified using accepted nozzle pressure gauge at each start-up period or as directed by City’s Representative. b. Nozzles used during blast cleaning operations shall be sufficient to ensure timely completion of Work on schedule.

11. Blast cleaning from rolling scaffolds shall only be done within confines of interior perimeter of scaffold.
a. Reaching beyond limits of perimeter will be allowed only if blast nozzle is maintained in position which will produce profile acceptable to City’s Representative.

12. Keep Work areas clean, and do not allow blasting particles to accumulate and constitute nuisance or hazard.
a. Remove spent abrasives and other debris at Contractor’s expense. b. If waste is determined to be hazardous, dispose of waste as required by law.

13. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. a. Schedule blast cleaning and coating such that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, or mill scale will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.

14. After blast cleaning and prior to applying coating, dry clean substrates by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting.

15. If rusting or discoloration of sandblasted surfaces occurs before painting, remove such rusting or discoloration by additional sandblasting.

16. Clean dry sandblasted and coated/painted surfaces before applying paint or coating systems by combination of blowing with clean dry air, brushing/brooming with clean brushes of hair, bristle, or fiber, and/or vacuuming as directed by City’s Representative. a. Air hose for blowing shall be ≥½” diameter and equipped with shut-off device. b. Remove loose traces of blast products from surface, and remove abrasive from pockets and corners.

17. Clean wet sandblasted surfaces before applying paint or coating systems by rinsing with fresh water to which sufficient corrosion inhibitor has been added to prevent rusting, or with fresh water followed immediately by inhibition treatment. a. Supplement cleaning by brushing or vacuuming to remove residues.

18. Sandblasted surfaces shall not be left overnight before painting.

19. Coat abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces with primer before visible rust forms on surface. a. Do not leave blast-cleaned surfaces uncoated for > 8 hours. b. Cleaned areas not receiving base coat within 8-hour period shall be recleaned prior to application of base coat.

I. White metal blast cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP5/NACE 1, and the following:

1. White metal blast-cleaned surface is defined as surface with gray-white, uniform metallic color, slightly roughened to form suitable anchor pattern for coatings.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C a. Surface when viewed without magnification shall be free from oil, grease, dirt, visible mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint or foreign matter. b. Color of clean surface may be affected by abrasive medium used.

J. Near-white metal blast cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP10/NACE 2, and the following:

1. Near-white blast-cleaned surface is defined as 1 from which all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint, or foreign matter have been removed from surface except for very light shadows, very light streaks, or slight discoloration caused by rust, stain, mill scale, oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or coating that may remain. a. At least 95% of each square inch of surface shall be free of visible residues, and remainder shall be limited to light discoloration mentioned above.

K. Commercial blast cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP6/NACE 3, and the following:

1. Commercial blast-cleaned surface is defined as 1 from which all oil, grease, dirt, rust scale, and foreign matter have been removed from surface and rust, mill scale, and old paint have been removed except for slight shadows, streaks, or discoloration caused by rust, stain, mill scale, oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or coating that may remain. a. If surface is pitted, slight residues of rust or paint may be found in bottom of pits. b. At least ⅔ of every square inch of surface area shall be free of visible residues, and remainder shall be limited to light discoloration, slight staining or light residues mentioned above.

L. Brush-off blast cleaning shall conform to SSPC SP7, and the following:

1. Brush-off blast cleaned surface is defined as 1 from which all oil, grease, dirt, rust scale, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint or coatings are removed, but tight mill scale and tight-adhered rust, paint, and coating are permitted to remain provided all mill scale and rust have been exposed to abrasive blast pattern sufficient to expose numerous flecks of underlying metal fairly uniformly distributed over entire surface. a. Heavy oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent cleaning. b. Small quantities of oil or grease may be removed by blast cleaning. c. Excessive rust scale shall be removed by impact tools and hand cleaning.

M. Prepare galvanized surfaces as follows:

1. Hand clean to remove concrete spatter, heavy grease, and foreign matter by hand scraping or wire brushing.

2. After hand cleaning, clean galvanized surfaces by solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, and detrimental foreign matter.

3. After washing, roughen areas by abrasive blasting using abrasive no larger than #30 mesh.

4. Abrasive blasting shall not remove galvanizing.

N. Prepare wood surfaces as follows:

1. Remove cracked or peeled paint, loose chalky paint, dirt, and foreign matter by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or other accepted means immediately prior to painting.

2. Wipe or dry brush surfaces to remove dust or chalky residue remaining from cleaning.

3. Allow wood surface to dry before painting.

O. Before application, examine areas and conditions under which coating systems are to be applied.

1. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall cure 30 days prior to coating or painting.

2. Ensure surfaces to receive coatings are dry and free from visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, laitance, mill scale, rust, paint oxides, corrosion products, blisters, loose paint, moisture, and other foreign matter in accordance with specified SSPC standards.

3. Neutralize spots showing effects of alkali.

4. Neutralize welds with suitable chemical compatible with specified paint or coating system.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

5. Notify City’s Representative of areas or conditions which are not acceptable to receive coatings.
a. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable areas or conditions have been corrected.

P. Prior to application of paint or coating, notify City’s Representative to inspect and accept prepared surfaces to receive paint or coating.

1. Surface preparation inspection for metals shall be based on comparison with SSPC-Vis1 “Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces”

2. Prepare and submit report of surface preparation inspections. a. Failure to provide inspections and reports shall be cause for rejection of applied coating if there is reasonable doubt, as determined solely by City’s Representative, that specified surface preparation or paint application procedures were not followed.

Q. Touch up shop-primed surfaces to cover scratches or abraded areas, using primer similar to and compatible with shop-primer and specified finish coat.

R. Using brush, stripe paint critical locations such as welds, corners, edges, roof lap seams, nuts, bolts, ends, rafter flanges and other areas identified by City’s Representative using specified primer.

S. Where surfaces are joined so closely that proper surface preparation and paint application is not possible, prepare and paint such surfaces prior to assembly or installation.

3.2 Application
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install paint and coating systems at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. Unless otherwise specified, ferrous surfaces except for stainless steel or galvanized iron or steel surfaces shall be painted or coated, including top surfaces of steel roof support framing and underside of steel roof plates bearing on roof supports.

D. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. SSPC PA3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application

3. NACE 6D-173 Manual for Painter Safety

4. Applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. SSPC-PA1 “Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting
E. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

F. Do not apply coatings when environmental conditions are not appropriate or jeopardize appearance or quality of coating.

1. This includes but is not limited to the following unsatisfactory environmental conditions. a. When air temperature is <50°F or >125°F or is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.
b. When it is expected air temperature will drop to <40°F or rise to >125°F within 8 hours after application of coating.
c. When surface temperature is <5°F (3°C) above dew point or is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application. d. When relative humidity is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.
e. When surfaces are exposed to fog or condensation.
f. During precipitation including rain, sleet, snow, fog or mist.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C g. When wind velocity is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.
h. In dust or smoke-laden atmospheres.
i. When above conditions are prevalent, postpone paint or coating application until conditions are favorable.
j. Complete daily paint or coating application in time to permit film sufficient drying and curing time before damage by atmospheric conditions.

G. Mixing shall be done as follows:

1. Mixing shall occur in enclosed areas designated by City’s Representative where materials are protected from direct sunlight, inclement weather, or freezing.

2. Protect surfaces of City’s paving, structures, and improvements from material spillage within mixing area.

3. Remove surface film, and if necessary, strain paint material before mixing.

4. Mix thoroughly using slow-speed power mixer until components are thoroughly combined and are of smooth consistency.
a. Use exact proportions specified by Manufacturer.
b. Mix only components specified and furnished by Manufacturer. c. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within same generic type of coating.
d. Exercise care to ensure all material is removed from containers during mixing and metering.
e. Do not use partial batches.

5. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life.

6. Provide small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas.

7. When power mixing multiple components, do not introduce moisture or air into product.

8. Do not dispose of coating and coating-system washdown materials using floor drains, dikes, channels, or storm drains.

H. Thinning shall only be permitted within limits set by applicable regulatory agencies and as permitted by Manufacturer and accepted by City’s Representative.

1. Perform thinning in presence of City’s Representative.

2. If thinning is accepted, do not exceed maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material.

3. Stir coating materials when adding thinner.

4. Do not flood coating material surface with thinner prior to mixing.

5. Do not reduce coating materials more than necessary to obtain proper application characteristics and to obtain specified dry-film thicknesses.

6. If paint becomes thick in cool weather, it may be heated by immersing container in hot water.

I. Coating applications shall conform to the following:

1. Painting of structures shall occur after erection or assembly. a. Requests to do painting other than undercoats before erection or assembly shall be submitted to and accepted by City’s Representative in writing before proceeding with coating.
b. Surfaces exposed to atmosphere which would be inaccessible for painting after erection or assembly shall receive full number of coats before erection or assembly. c. Caulk open seams at contact surfaces of stiffeners and built-up members which would retain moisture with non-sag polysulfide material conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-230, Type 2 or other accepted material before applying second coat of primer. d. Emulsion and alkyd paints shall contain mildewcide, and both paint and mildewcide shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-19
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C e. Do not use finish coats containing lead.
f. Do not paint stainless steel surfaces.
g. Except for anchor bolt assemblies, steel surfaces embedded in concrete need not be painted.

2. Schedule coating Work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. a. Protect Work from dust and airborne contaminants during coating application and curing.

3. Work is subject to intermittent shutdown if, in opinion of City’s Representative, cleaning, coating and painting operations are creating localized condition detrimental to ongoing facility activities, personnel or adjacent property.
a. In event of emergency shutdown by City’s Representative, immediately correct deficiencies.
b. Additional costs created by shutdown shall be borne by Contractor.

4. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast-cleaned surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming.
a. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good visibility of working area prior to coating applications.
b. Remove dust from coated surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming prior to applying succeeding coats.

5. Previous paint coats shall be dry and fully cured and surface of paint coat being covered shall be free from moisture, dust, grease, and deleterious material which would prevent bond of succeeding paint coats.
a. In spot coating old paint which lifts after application of first spot coat shall be removed by scraping and the area repainted before applying second coat.

6. Conform to Manufacturer’s Application Instructions, completing Work within over-coating timeframe of prime or intermediate coat.
a. Follow recommendations of Manufacturer including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions.
b. Do not paint under adverse ambient conditions that may affect life or appearance of coating.
c. Do not apply coatings over damp or moist surfaces.

7. Prepare undercoats and intermediate coats to differ noticeably in coloration to each other on succeeding coating applications to ensure even coverage by shading or tinting, as appropriate, for paint material and color.
a. Shading or tinting shall be done by Manufacturer.

8. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT. a. Application shall be by airless spray method, except brush and roller application may be required for exterior surfaces if environmental and neighborhood conditions preclude spray application.
b. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics such as runs or blisters that might adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

9. Spraying shall be done by cross-lap method of spraying, stroking first in 1 direction and shortly later, spraying across this section at right angles to first set of passes. a. Exercise care during spraying to hold nozzle perpendicular and sufficiently close to receiving surface to avoid excessive evaporation of volatile components or loss of material to air or bridging of cracks and crevices.
b. Runs, sags, thin areas in paint coat, or skips and holidays shall be considered as evidence Work is unsatisfactory, and Contractor may be required to apply remaining paint by brush.

10. When finished and dried, brush strokes shall appear in 1 direction only. a. There shall be no curved brush strokes showing.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C b. Primary brush movement shall be such as to fill surface irregularities, after which coating shall be smoothed by series of parallel strokes. c. Paint shall be evenly spread and brushed out.
d. Paint will be considered improperly applied if an inordinate amount of residual brush marks remain.

11. Immediately remove spills, oversprays and coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to receive specified coating.

12. After completing each coat application, request inspection by City’s Representative before applying next coat.
a. Work performed in absence of inspection by City’s Representative may be required to be removed and replaced with proper inspection.
b. Entire cost of removal and replacement, including cost of materials which may be furnished by City and used in removed Work shall be borne by Contractor regardless of whether Work removed is found to be defective or not. c. Do not apply finish coats until total film thickness of paint undercoats is obtained. d. Work covered up without authority of City’s Representative shall, upon order of City’s Representative, be uncovered to extent required, and Contractor shall similarly bear entire cost of performing Work and furnishing materials necessary for removal of covering and its subsequent replacement as directed and accepted by City’s Representative.

13. Pinholes and holidays detected during testing shall be marked, repaired in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions and retested.
a. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in final coating.

14. Coats that do not hide undercoat shall be given another coat.

15. Protect finished surfaces between coats.
a. For subsequent coats, remove dust, dirt, oil, grease and foreign matter which will affect adhesion or durability of finish by washing with clean rags dipped in commercial cleaning solvent approved by paint and coating system Manufacturer. b. Surface shall then be rinsed with clean water and wiped dry with clean rags.

16. Cure coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions. a. Allow ≥24 hours between coats of paint for curing.

17. Strictly observe drying and curing time between coats stated in Manufacturer’s application instructions.

18. Upon completion, remove masking and other temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.

19. Allow City’s Representative to examine each coat of paint, enamel, stain, shellac, and varnish before next coat is applied.
a. Notify City’s Representative such Work is ready for inspection.

J. Apply prime coats to steel or concrete as follows:

1. Apply prime coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions. a. Follow Manufacturer’s recommendations, including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions.

2. Surfaces of metal and steel not embedded in concrete, and surfaces of unprimed plain sheet metalwork shall be primed promptly upon delivery to project site.

3. Galvanized metalwork shall be primed immediately after erection.

4. Reclean surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become moist prior to coating application.

5. Do not apply prime coat over damp or moist surfaces.

6. Prime prepared ferrous surfaces immediately after completing surface preparation and before surface rusting or accumulation of dust, dirt, or foreign matter occurs.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

7. Apply brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces prior to application of primer and finish coat.
a. Brush coat shall be done prior to and in conjunction with spray coat application. b. Apply spray coat over brush coat.

8. For galvanized metalwork, clean oil, grease and foreign materials from surfaces. a. Apply vinyl wash pretreatment coating.
b. Follow manufacturer's instructions for drying time, then prime with 1 coat of metal primer.

9. For unprimed iron, steel, and uncoated metals specified to be painted, prime with 1 coat of metal primer.

10. Apply zinc-rich primer by spray methods.
a. On areas inaccessible to spray application, apply paint by brush or daubers. b. Use mechanical mixers to mix primer.
c. After mixing, strain primer through metal #30 to #60 mesh screen or double layer of cheesecloth immediately prior to or during pour into spray pot. d. Use agitating spray pot for spray application of primer. e. Agitator or stirrer shall reach within 2” of bottom of spray pot and shall be in motion at all times during primer application.
f. Motion shall be sufficient to keep primer mixed.
g. If painting is interrupted, expel primer remaining in fluid hose. h. Primer shall be free from dust, dirt, salt, or deleterious deposits and thoroughly dry before applying pre-treatment vinyl wash primer.
i. Apply wash primer ≤ 72 hours before applying finish coats. j. Apply vinyl wash primer by spraying to produce uniform wet film completely coating underlying surface.

11. For shop-primed metal items, touch up bare and abraded areas with metal primer prior to applying 2nd and 3rd coats.

12. Apply coats evenly and with full coverage so finished surfaces are free of sags, runs and imperfections.

13. Prime coats incompatible with finish coats or applied to improperly prepared surfaces shall be removed and appropriate prime coat applied at no additional cost to City.

14. Cure prime coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s written specifications and instructions.

K. Apply intermediate coats as follows:

1. Apply intermediate coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions, and within over-coating timeframe of prime coat.

2. Follow recommendations of Manufacturer including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions.
a. Do not paint under adverse ambient conditions that may affect life or appearance of coating.

3. After applying prime coat, apply by brush, 1 stripe coat of intermediate coat epoxy, thinned 15% (or as recommended by Manufacturer), to welds, edges and corners, rivets, fasteners, and/or other difficult to reach areas.

L. Apply finish coats as follows:

1. Conform to requirements of SSPC PA-1, Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting.

2. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at uniform consistency during application. a. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

3. Apply coating systems to specified minimum dry-film thicknesses as measured from above peaks of surface profile.

4. Finished surfaces shall be free from holidays, pinholes, bubbles, runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, excessive or unsightly brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and gloss.
a. Verify absence of holidays and flaws by appropriate testing. b. Recoat and retest areas failing these tests.
c. City may require >1 finish coat if required to provide uniform color and texture.

5. Finish coats found to be incompatible with prime or intermediate coats or applied to improperly prepared surfaces shall be removed and appropriate finish coat applied at no additional cost to City.

M. Following application and testing, protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Contractor shall hold current C-33 Painting and Decorating Contractor’s license and have ≥5 years practical experience and successful history in applying specified products to surfaces of steel standpipes, reservoirs, vessels and elevated tanks for water storage.

1. Upon request, they shall substantiate this requirement by furnishing list of references.

B. Employees working on project shall be skilled craftsmen, trained for application of specified coatings and qualified to perform required Work.

1. Work shall be done in manner comparable with best standards of practice found in that trade.

2. Apply materials evenly so as to be free from sags, runs, crawls, brush marks, wrinkles, skips, holidays or other application defects, blemishes or evidence of poor workmanship.

3. Coats shall be of proper consistency.

4. Repair skips, holidays, thin areas, an deficiencies in each paint coat before proceding to next coat.

5. Cut lines shall be sharply cut to lines.

C. Repair or replace damaged or colored materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

D. Touch up or repair damaged coatings shall be acceptable if result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces.

1. Recoat entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture or color.

E. Remove and clean up paint drips, spills, oversprays, and splashes from areas not being painted.

1. Remove rubbish, waste and surplus material and clean woodwork, hardware, floors and other adjacent Work.

2. Remove paint, varnish and brush marks from glazing material and, upon completion of painting Work, wash and polish glazing material both sides.

3. Remove and replace damaged glazing material with new material at no cost to City.

4. Clean hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces with accepted cleaner.

5. Do not use abrasives or edged tools.

F. Repair in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions coatings showing film characteristics or defects that might adversely affect their performance or appearance.

1. Clean and recoat surfaces with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage, if surfaces have improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness.

2. Sandblast or power-sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering edges.

3. Prime and finish coat in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

4. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections.

G. Manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance as needed for proper surface preparation and coating system application.

H. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Surface
Preparation
Visual
Inspection
SSPC Vis 1, ASTM D2200, NACE
Std TM01-70
As directed City City
Contaminants Chemical or ultraviolet tests City’s option City Contractor Anchor Profile As specified or Manufacturer’s
requirement to be verified by
nondestructive instrument such as
Keane-Tator Surface Profile
Comparator or Testex Press-O Film
System
As directed Contractor Contractor

Compressor Verify Absence
of Water and
Oil
Blotter test 1 each startup Contractor Contractor
Atmospheric
Conditions
Dewpoint Sling Psychrometer and US Dept of
Commerce Weather Bureau
Psychrometric Tables
As directed Contractor Contractor
Each
Coating
System
Visual
Inspection
No runs, orange-peels, fisheyes,
bridges, shiners, laps, or other
imperfections.

City’s option City City

Each Coat Holidays NACE RP0188
Nondestructive holiday tester such
as K-D Bird Dog or Tinker-Rasor
Model AP or AP-W
(22.5-80V with approximate
80,000Ω resistance) Use sponge
saturated with 0.5% sodium chloride
solution.

Coating shall be holiday-free.

Contractor to submit written reports
from accepted testing agency on
prime, intermediate, and finish
coating inspections.
100% of surface
of each coating
Contractor Contractor
Dry-Film
Thickness
(Ferrous
Surfaces)
SSPC-PA2
Nondestructive magnetic-type dryfilm thickness gauge such as “Elcometer”, “Inspector”,
ElectroPhysik USA MiniTest”,
“Mikrotest Digital”, or “Positest”
Average of measurements shall
exceed specified DFT.

No spot measurement shall be
<80% or >140% of specified DFT
Submit written report from accepted
testing agency on reinspection
Allow 8 hours to
elapse after
application.

Then take ≥5
spot
measurements in
each area.

Check each coat
for DFT
Contractor Contractor
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Dry-Film
Thickness
(Non-magnetic
Surfaces)
ASTM D4138
Use Tooke Gage or similar
instrument.

Average of measurements shall
exceed specified DFT.

No spot measurement shall be
<80% or >140% of specified DFT
Repair coating at locations where
coupons are removed
Submit written report from accepted
testing agency on reinspection
Allow 8 hours to
elapse after
application.

Then take ≥5
spot
measurements in
each area.

Check each coat
for DFT
Contractor Contractor
Holidays in
Coatings ≤20
mils (except
zinc primers
and
galvanizing)
Nondestructive holiday tester such
as K-D Bird Dog or Tinker-Rasor
Model AP or AP-W
(22.5-80V with approximate
80,000Ω resistance) Use sponge
saturated with 0.5% sodium chloride
solution.

Coating shall be holiday-free.

Submit written reports from
accepted testing agency on prime,
intermediate, and finish coating
inspections.
100% of surface
of each dried
coating
Contractor Contractor

Finished
Coating
System
11-Month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturers
printed literature as described
below.

Repair identified deficiencies.
1 inspection
attended by City,
Contractor, City’s
Representative
and
Manufacturer’s
representative
City and
Contractor’s
respective
duties are
itemized
below
Contractor
I. Furnish inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness of paints and coatings.

1. Also furnish US Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of thickness gauges.

2. Dry film thickness gauges and holiday detectors shall be available until final acceptance of application.

3. Inspection devices shall be operated by, or in presence of City’s Representative with location and frequency basis determined by City’s Representative.

4. City’s Representative is not precluded from furnishing their own inspection devices and rendering their opinion based solely on their tests.

J. Work having improper finish color, insufficient film thickness, holidays, or visual flaws shall be cleaned and top-coated with specified system to obtain specified color and coverage.

1. Sand by hand or power sand nonconforming areas.

2. Feather edges.

3. Prime areas.

4. Apply specified finish coat free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or flaws.

K. City’s Representative shall have right to reject unsatisfactory material or Work and to replace it at Contractor’s expense if deficiencies are found in quality of installed coating.

L. Upon completion of Work, remove staging, scaffolding, drop cloths, rags, brushes, and containers from project site.

1. Remove paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on surfaces not specified to be painted.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings and tape after completing painting operations.

3. Clean and polish glass surfaces.

4. Clean site to satisfaction of City’s Representative.

M. Warranty Inspection shall be conducted during 11th month following completion of coating and painting Work.

1. Repair defective Work in strict accordance with Contract Documents and to satisfaction of City’s Representative.

2. City will establish inspection date and will notify Contractor ≥30 days in advance. a. City will uncover or expose surfaces to be inspected.

3. Contractor shall provide at their expense suitable lighting and ventilation for inspection. a. Provide other necessary inspection equipment to City’s satisfaction.

4. Coating system shall be visually inspected.

5. City’s Representative will prepare Warranty Inspection Report and deliver to Contractor. a. Report will set forth number and type of failures observed, percentage of surface area where failure has occurred, and names of persons making inspection. b. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, City will establish date for Contractor to proceed with remedial Work.

6. Remedial Work shall occur at locations where paint or coating have peeled, scaled, flaked, bubbled, or cracked and at locations where rusting is evident. a. Such locations shall be considered failures.

7. Repair defective coatings and damaged or rusting spots. a. Then test repaired areas as specified herein.
b. Repeat repair/testing procedure until surface meets specified requirements. c. Repairs shall proceed promptly.
d. Delay on part of Contractor to proceed with remedial Work on schedule shall constitute breach of this Contract.
e. In such case, City may remedy defects as outlined in Contract Documents.

8. Make repairs at points where failures are observed by removing deteriorated coating or paint, sandpapering, cleaning surface, and repainting or recoating with same system. a. If area of failure >25% of specific coated or painted surface, entire paint or coating system shall, at City’s option, be removed and recoated or repainted in accordance with original Contract Documents.

9. Contractor shall include appropriate amount for testing and repair in their bid. a. No additional allowance will be paid by City for Warranty Inspection and repairs.

3.4 Protection
A. Abate dust nuisance to protect wet paint film.

1. Dampen adjacent roadbeds and shoulders with water on each side of locations where painting is in progress.

2. Furnish and post “DRIVE SLOWLY” signs and other precautions necessary to prevent dust and dirt from accumulating on freshly painted surfaces.

B. Provide “WET PAINT” signs to protect freshly painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 92 00 - Galvanizing - 1 of 5
SECTION 09 92 00

GALVANIZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and application of galvanizing by hot-dip or electro-depositing process.

B. Steel metalwork, other than stainless steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, except for:

1. Stainless steel items.

2. Teflon® (PTFE)-coated items.

3. Epoxy-coated items.

4. Items to be mortar-coated or embedded in concrete.

5. Items specified to be painted.

6. Items not to be painted or galvanized as directed by City’s Representative C. Refer to the following sections for Work not covered herein.

1. Section 05 12 00 for galvanizing structural steel framing

2. Section 33 05 38 for galvanizing of hangers and supports.

D. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §210-3, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install galvanizing required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Complete machine Work, die Work, cutting, punching, bending, welding, drilling, threadcutting, straightening and other fabrication Work before galvanizing.

C. Galvanize items after fabrication in largest sections possible.

D. Galvanize applicable fasteners before assembling structural units.

E. Zinc coating shall adhere tenaciously to base metal surface.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 92 00 - Galvanizing - 2 of 5

1. Coatings shall be even, smooth, and uniform, free from blisters and excess zinc deposits.

F. Warped or distorted products shall be replaced.

G. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Galvanizing Test Coupon
Preparation
Wire coupon to material
being galvanized before
immersion to represent
coating deposited.
1 coupon each unit galvanized
weighing over 1 lb or where
requested by City’s
Representative
Contractor Contractor
Galvanizing Thickness ASTM E376 1 test each coupon Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM A116 Metallic-Coated, Steel-Woven Wire Fence Fabric

2. ASTM A121 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire

3. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

5. ASTM A239 Locating Thinnest Spot on a Zinc (Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles

6. ASTM A392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

7. ASTM A525 Preparation of Zinc-Coated and Zinc-Alloy-Coated Steel Panels for Testing Paint and Related Coating Products

8. ASTM A767 Galvanizing Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

9. ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

10. ASTM A929 Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe

11. ASTM B6 Zinc

12. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

13. ASTM B695 Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel

14. ASTM E376 Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Testing Methods

15. ASTM F1083 Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded for Fence Structures

16. ASTM F1941 Electrodeposited Coatings on Mechanical Fasteners

17. SSPC Paint 20 Zinc-Rich Primer

18. SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning

19. SSPC SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning

20. SSPC SP7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

21. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §210-3 “Galvanizing”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Compliance Submit galvanizing certificate of compliance with listed ASTM specifications per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Certificate shall identify ASTM standard complied with.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of galvanized materials.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 92 00 - Galvanizing - 3 of 5

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Galvanized Touch Up
Material
American Solder and Flux Company (Drygalv) Paoli, PA (610) 647-3575 Carboline International “Galvanox” St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654 Cominco, Ltd “Galva-Guard” San Diego, CA (619) 233-4763 Glidden ICI Dulux Paints Div PPG Industries (GlidZinc
Organic 5526/5527/5528)
Strongsville, OH (440) 816-9021
Koppers Industries (CarboZinc 11) Pittsburgh, PA (412) 227-2001 Lanco Manufacturing “Galvacon” San Lorenzo, PR (787) 736-6745 Metalloy Products Co (Galvalloy) Los Angeles, CA
Rust-Oleum Corp (2185 Cold Galvanizing Compound) Vernon Hills, IL (877) 385-8155 Sherwin Williams (ZincClad I Low VOC B69AW9) Cleveland OH (800) 524-5979 Tnemec Co Inc (90-97) Kansas City, MO (800) 863-6321
Zaclon, LLC “ Galvanizing Repair Rod” Cleveland, OH (216) 271-1601 ZRC Worldwide Cold Galvanizing Compound Marshfield, MA (781) 319-0400 Accepted lead-free equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §210-3 for materials requirements for galvanizing.

C. Materials for galvanizing shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Galvanizing Zinc Conform to ASTM B6 Prime Western
Steel Products, Structural
Shapes, Tie-Rods, Handrails,
Manhole Steps, Castings, and
Metal Fabrications
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM B633 or ASTM B695
Thickness ≥3.4 mil - 2.00 oz/ft2
Galvanized Steel Rebars Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A767 Thickness as shown in Table 1 or ASTM A767
Structural Steel Bolts, Nuts,
and Washers (Connection
Bolts and Anchor Bolts
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A153, ASTM B633, ASTM B695, or ASTM F1941
Class Fe/Zn 5
Thickness as shown in Table 1 of ASTM A153
Steel or Iron Sheets Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A525 Hangers and Supports Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 33 05 38 Galvanizing Repair Paint Zinc-Rich Primer Conform to SSPC Paint 20 Hot-Stick Galvanizing Rod 50% Zinc, 50% Tin Do not use products containing lead.

D. Shop prime iron and steel Work not shown to be galvanized with exceptions below:

1. Refer to Section 09 90 00 for requirements for shop priming.

2. Do not galvanize or shop prime stainless steel.

3. Do not galvanize or shop prime items to be embedded in concrete, masonry, or sprayed on fireproofing.

4. Provide clean surface for bonding to concrete.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 92 00 - Galvanizing - 4 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

2. Avoid unsuitable marking paints.

3. Remove welding slag, splatter, anti-splatter compounds, and burrs before galvanizing.

4. Consult with galvanizer about removal of grease, oil, paint, and other deleterious material prior to fabrication.

5. Remove surface contaminants not removable by normal chemical cleaning process of galvanizing operation.

6. Use blast cleaning where chemical cleaning is not sufficient.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish galvanizing at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

4. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction §210-3 “Galvanizing” D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Apply galvanizing as follows:

1. Clean steel of rust and scale.

2. Galvanize steel plates, shapes, bars, and fabricated assemblies in accordance with ASTM A123.

3. Galvanize bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and threaded fasteners in accordance with ASTM A153.

4. Straighten galvanized parts that become warped during galvanizing operation.

F. Repair zinc coatings which have been field or shop cut, burned by welding, abraded or otherwise damaged to such extent as to expose base metal.

G. Shop repairs may be made by stripping and cleaning damaged areas and re-applying a zinc coating by hot-dip process as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating ≥½”.

3. Make metalizing repairs using zinc wire containing ≥99.98% zinc..

4. Apply zinc coating per ASTM A780 Annex A3.

5. Use metalizing gun to apply ≥5 mils zinc on damaged areas.

6. Repair coating shall taper to zero thickness at edge of blasted undamaged section.

H. Field repairs to field welded and damaged galvanizing may be made by applying a zinc-dust paint coating as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating ≥½”.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 92 00 - Galvanizing - 5 of 5

3. Field repair using acceptable galvanizing touch-up material.

4. Paint cleaned area with 2 coats un-thinned zinc paint to apply ≥5 mils zinc on damaged areas.

5. Apply repair compound per ASTM A780 Annex A3 and paint Manufacturer's Application Instructions, except coating shall have ≥90% dry film zinc content by weight.

I. Field repairs to field welded and damaged galvanizing may be made by applying zinc-alloy solder coating or a hot stick galvanizing repair rod zinc coating as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating ≥½”.

3. Deposit solder to apply ≥5 mils zinc-alloy solder on damaged areas or make repairs using specified hot stick galvanizing repair rod.

4. Apply repair compound per ASTM A780 Annex A3 and repair rod Manufacturer's Application Instructions.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Galvanizing Visual
Inspection
Conform to ASTM A123 (steel sections),
A153 (fasteners), or A767 (rebar) as
applicable
1 inspection City City
Zinc Coating
Thickness
Conform to ASTM A123 (steel sections),
A153 (fasteners), or A767 (rebar) as
applicable
1 test Contractor Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate Work conforms to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Confirm Work conforms to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 1 of 11 SECTION 09 96 56

EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Requirements for surface preparation, application and testing of fusion-bonded epoxy lining and coating systems for ferrous surfaces of valves, hydrants, flow meters, pumps, , pipelines, fittings, or pipeline appurtenances.

B. Do not apply fusion-bonded epoxy systems to aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic, rubber, or stainless steel surfaces.

C. Where City deems fusion-bonded epoxy coatings to be impractical, or for plug valve lining systems, liquid epoxy lining systems may be substituted as described herein.

1.3 Definitions
A. The following definitions apply:

1. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coat of paint measured in mils (1/1000”).

1.4 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete functional coating system for specified surface in compliance with applicable local air quality management regulations and NSF requirements for use with potable water where applicable.

1. Conformance to NSF 61 shall require concurrent conformance with NSF standards referenced by NSF 61, including NSF 600.

2. Comply with Manufacturer’s application requirements and applicable codes, standards, and South Coast Air Quality Management District regulations, including Rule 1107 for shop coating and Rule 1113 for field coating.

B. Cured lining or coating shall be smooth and glossy with no graininess or roughness.

1. Lining or coating shall have no blisters, cracks, bubbles, under-film voids, mechanical damage, discontinuities or holidays.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 2 of 11 C. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Offsite Surface
Preparation
and Priming
Offsite
Inspection of
Priming
Operation
Applicable standards As directed Contractor Contractor
Paint from
Proposed
“Equals”
Spectrographic
and Durability
Tests
Applicable ASTM standards As directed Contractor Contractor Valve, Hydrant,
Flow Meter,
Pump, Pipe,
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interior Lining
or Coating
Visual
Inspection
AWWA C116 §5.2
Pipe or items will be rejected due to:
1 Sizeable protrusions in lining
obviously caused by lining over
foreign material.
2 Defects indicating double flow or
fold in lining.
3 Chuck marks or gouges extending
to bare metal.
4 Bubbles or area which appears to
be unbonded to underlying metal
surface
Each lined pipe
spool or item
Contractor Contractor
Holidays ASTM D5162 and AWWA C116 §5.3
or AWWA C213 §5.3.3.

If number of holidays or pinholes for
items ≤12” is ≤5 per item, repair per
coating Manufacturer’s
recommendation and retest.

If more holidays are found, sandblast,
recoat and retest entire item.

Each lined
Valve, Hydrant,
Flow Meter,
Pump, Pipe,
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Contractor Contractor
AWWA C116 §5.3 or AWWA C213
§5.3.3 If <1 holiday per 10ft2 of pipe
surface is found, repair per coating
Manufacturer’s recommendation and
retest.

If more holidays are found, sandblast,
recoat and retest entire pipe spool.

Also check weld seam centerlines to
verify no porous blisters, craters or
pimples lie along peak of weld crown.

Each lined
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe Spool,
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
≥16”
Contractor Contractor
Lining
Thickness
AWWA C116 §5.2
Verify thickness with magnetic-type
dry film thickness gauge.

Average shall exceed minimum
thickness, No thickness
measurement shall be >2 mils below
or >3 mils above specified minimum
thickness.

Items not meeting these criteria shall
be sandblasted, recoated and
retested.

Each lined
Valve, Hydrant,
Flow Meter,
Pump, Pipe,
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
at 3 locations
per item
Contractor Contractor

1.6 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM D1002 Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal)

2. ASTM D1044 Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion

3. ASTM D2370 Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 3 of 11

4. ASTM D2583 Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor

5. ASTM D5162 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates

6. ASTM G17 Penetration Resistance of Pipeline Coatings

7. AWWA C116/ANSI A21.16 Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

8. AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings

9. AWWA C213 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings

10. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

11. AWWA C620 Spray-Applied In-Place Epoxy Lining of Water Pipelines 3” and Larger

12. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

13. MSS SP98 Protective Coatings for Interior of Valves, Hydrants, and Fittings

14. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

15. NSF/ANSI 600 Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water

16. SSPC PA1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting

17. SSPC PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges

18. SSPC SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning

19. SSPC SP10/NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaning

20. SSPC Vis1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces

1.7 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit product data sheets per Product Data requirements.

Application Instructions Required for each paint and coating per Application Instruction requirements.

Include:

1.Surface Preparation Requirements.

2.MSDS sheets identifying flammability, toxicity, allergenic properties and other characteristics requiring field precautions.

3.Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats.

4.Percent solids by volume.

5.Statement verifying selected prime coat is recommended by Manufacturer for use with selected intermediate and finish coats.

6.Application and curing requirements and instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Compliance 1.For Work done in California, submit certification coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality Management District rules and regulations for products and application

2.Submit coating system and application certification coatings comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

3.Submit description of repair procedures used if any.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Application Instructions, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

1.9 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 4 of 11 A. Materials shall be of current manufacture and shall meet applicable regulations for their application and intended service.

1. Materials shall meet applicable Federal, state and local regulations, including Air Quality Management District Regulations.

2. Coats of coating system shall be of same Manufacturer and shall be accepted by Manufacturer for intended service.

3. If product specified herein is no longer manufactured or does not meet current regulations, provide substitute, currently manufactured product of at least equal performance which meets applicable regulations subject to City’s Representative’s approval, at no additional cost.

B. Linings and coatings used on Work shall comply with VOC limits set forth in CALGreen Code §5.504.4.3.

C. Factory-applied base coatings to a specific product may differ slightly from those listed below where primers are factory-applied by Manufacturers.

1. Such base-coat substitutions for Contractor’s convenience are subject to the following:
a. Surface preparation shall meet or exceed surface preparations specified below. b. Primer or base coat shall be that recommended and normally used by Manufacturer for condition and exposure of finished installation.
c. Chemical composition of factory-applied base coats shall be similar to chemical composition specified below.
d. If different coating system is recommended by Manufacturer to meet performance specifications of other sections, Manufacturer shall notify Contractor in writing and said notice shall be forwarded to City’s Representative. e. Verify compatibility of adjacent coats with coating Manufacturers. f. Total DFT shall equal or exceed DFT specified below. g. Finish coat shall be as stipulated below.
h. If paint system fails, repair paint system in failed area to specifications of this section.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers for NSF-61 approved fusion-bonded epoxy include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
NSF-Approved FusionBonded Epoxy Linings
and Coatings
3M Scotchkote 134W, 206N or 6233 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577 AkzoNobel Resicoat® R4 Reutlingen DEU (615) 259-2430
Lilly Powder Coatings / Valspar “Pipe Clad” 1500
Red
Kansas City, MO (816) 421-7400
Accepted equal
E. Acceptable Manufacturers for fusion-bonded epoxy where NSF approval is not required include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy
Linings and Coatings
3M Scotchkote 134, 135, 203, 206, 206N or 6233 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577 Axalta Coating Systems Philadelphia, PA (855) 547-1461
AkzoNobel Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Lilly Powder Coatings / Valspar “Pipe Clad” 1500
Red
Kansas City, MO (816) 421-7400
Northtown Keysite 740 Huntington Beach, CA (714) 897-0700 Rohm & Haas / Dow Chemical Philadelphia, PA (215) 537-4000 Sherwin Williams Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979
Accepted equal
F. Acceptable Manufacturers for field-applied epoxy coating for patching include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Field-Applied Liquid 3M Scotchkote 306 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 5 of 11

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Epoxy Linings and
Coatings for Patching
Accepted equal
G. Acceptable Manufacturers for field-applied epoxy coating for patching of welded steel pipe joint interiors include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Field-Applied Liquid 3M Scotchkote 302 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577 Epoxy Linings and Accepted equal
Coatings for Patching
Welded Steel Pipe
H. Refer to City of Corona List of Sole-Source Equipment for Water Facilities for acceptable Manufacturers for high-build-epoxy liner.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers for NSF-61 approved liquid epoxy where permitted include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
NSF-Approved Liquid
Epoxy Linings and
Coatings
3M Scotchkote 323 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
AkzoNobel Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 Carboline / RPM Plasite® 4500 Saint Louis, MO (800) 848-4645 PPG Industries Amercoat 370 Cheswick, PA (888) 774-4332 PPG Industries Amerlock®2 Sigmacover™2 Cheswick, PA (888) 774-4332 Raven AquataPoxy A6 or A61 Broken Arrow, OK (800) 324-2810 Tnemec Pota-Pox L140 Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Tnemec Epoxoline Series 141 Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321 Accepted equal
J. Acceptable Manufacturers for liquid epoxy where NSF 61 approval is not required include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Liquid Epoxy Linings
and Coatings where
NSF 61 Approval is Not
Required
3M Scotchkote 312 or 314 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
AkzoNobel Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267 PPG Industries Amercoat 370 Cheswick, PA (888) 774-4332 Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
(For nonpotable water use Tnemec Series L69)
Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Accepted equal
K. Acceptable Applicators for liquid catalyst epoxy include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Liquid Catalyst Epoxy
Linings and Coatings
Soc-Co Plastic Coating Company Rancho Cucamonga, CA (909) 987-4753 Accepted equal
L. Acceptable Applicators for dry powder fusion-bonded epoxy include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Dry-Powder FusionBonded Epoxy Linings
and Coatings
3M Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
Armstrong Products Lancaster, PA (877) 276-7876
Fusecoat Company, Inc. South El Monte, CA (626) 443-6760 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials - General
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Interior lining of valves and hydrants 3” and larger for use with potable or reclaimed water shall meet requirements of AWWA C550.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 6 of 11 C. Liquid epoxy lining systems for plug valve, interiors shall conform to the following.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Plug Valve Interior
Lining or Coating
Liquid Epoxy AWWA C213 for steel
AWWA C116 for ductile iron
100% solids powdered thermosetting epoxy per AWWA C550
Hardness per ASTM D2583: Barcol 17
Hardness on “M” Scale: Rockwell 50
Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D1044 with Tabor CS17 wheel 1000-gram wheel, 1000 cycles: 0.05 gram removed / 5000 cycles 0.115 gram removed Adhesion 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile Strength per ASTM D2370: 7300 psi
Penetration per ASTM G17: 0 mil
Adhesion Overlap Shear, ⅛” steel panel, 0.010 glue line per ASTM D1002:
4300 psi
Impact (100 in-lb minimum (Gardner ⅝” diameter tip)
Total DFT 16.0 mils
Total DFT 5.0-16.0 mils on ring grooves and flange faces Surface Preparation SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning Base Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy 3M Company Epoxy Primer
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils,
Finish Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy 3M Scotchkote 323 Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
D. Fusion-bonded epoxy lining systems for other valve, hydrant, flow meter, pump, pipe, column, pipe fitting, or interiors shall conform to the following.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Valve, Hydrant, Flow
Meter, Pump, Pipe, ,
Lining or Coating
Fusion-Bonded
Epoxy
AWWA C213 for steel
AWWA C116 for ductile iron
ANSI/NSF 61 certified for use with potable water.
100% solids powdered thermosetting epoxy per AWWA C550
Hardness per ASTM D2583: Barcol 17
Hardness on “M” Scale: Rockwell 50
Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D1044 with Tabor CS17 wheel 1000-gram wheel, 1000 cycles: 0.05 gram removed / 5000 cycles 0.115 gram removed Adhesion 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile Strength per ASTM D2370: 7300 psi
Penetration per ASTM G17: 0 mil
Adhesion Overlap Shear, ⅛” steel panel, 0.010 glue line per ASTM D1002:
4300 psi
Impact (100 in-lb minimum (Gardner ⅝” diameter tip)
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Total DFT 5.0-16.0 mils on ring grooves and flange faces Surface Preparation SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning Base Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy 3M Company Epoxy Primer
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils,
Finish Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy 3M Scotchkote 134, 206N, or 6233 Lilly / Valspar “Pipe Clad” 1500 Red E. Field-applied epoxy coating for patching shall conform to the following.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Valve, Hydrant, Flow
Meter, Pump, Pipe, ,
Pipe Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance Interior
Lining or Coating
Liquid Epoxy ANSI/NSF 61 certified for use with potable water. 80% solids liquid resin
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Patching Compound Polyamide Epoxy Scotchkote 306 or 323 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 7 of 11 F. Liquid epoxy lining systems for valve, hydrant, flow meter, pump, pipe, column, pipe fitting, or pipeline appurtenance interiors shall be used only when City deems fusion-bonded epoxy coating to be impractical.

1. Liquid epoxy lining systems for valve, hydrant and appurtenance interiors shall meet the following requirements.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Valve, Hydrant, Flow
Meter, Pump, Pipe,
Column Pipe, Pipe
Fitting, or Pipeline
Appurtenance Interior
Lining or Coating
Epoxy ANSI/NSF 61 certified for use with potable water.

Total MDFT 16.0 mils
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning Base Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox
L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Company Epoxy
Primer
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe Bar-Rust
233V
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Intermediate Coat
(Apply at Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox
L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Skotchkote 312 or
314
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe Bar-Rust
233V
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
Finish Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox
L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Skotchkote 312 or
314
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe Bar-Rust
233V
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
*Powdered thermosetting epoxy or two coats of polyamide epoxy may be substituted.

G. Epoxy lining shall meet current Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content regulations.

1. Epoxy lining for potable water valves and hydrants shall also be listed by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for contact with potable water and shall contain no perchloroethylene, lead, chromium or zinc.

H. Powdered thermosetting epoxy coating systems for steel architectural surfaces shall meet the following requirements.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Architectural Exterior
Powder-Epoxy
Coating
Powdered
Thermosetting
Epoxy
ANSI/NSF 61 certified for use with potable water.
100% solids powdered thermosetting epoxy per AWWA C550
Hardness per ASTM D2583: Barcol 17
Hardness on “M” Scale: Rockwell 50
Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D1044 with Tabor CS17 wheel 1000-gram wheel, 1000 cycles: 0.05 gram removed / 5000 cycles 0.115 gram removed Adhesion 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile Strength per ASTM D2370: 7300 psi
Penetration per ASTM G17: 0 mil
Adhesion Overlap Shear, ⅛” steel panel, 0.010 glue line per ASTM D1002:
4300 psi
Impact (100 in-lb minimum (Gardner ⅝” diameter tip)
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning Base Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy 3M Company Epoxy Primer
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils,
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 8 of 11 ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Finish Coat (Apply at
Place of Manufacture)
Polyamide Epoxy Scotchkote 134 or 206N
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in proper condition to receive material specified before coating or painting is done.

B. Prepare iron or steel surfaces in accordance with applicable Manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC standards.

C. Grind surface irregularities, welds, and weld spatter smooth before applying epoxy.

1. Remove protuberances including slivers, scales, burrs and gouges which may produce pinholes in lining.

2. Grind ≥0.020” off weld caps on pipe weld seams before beginning surface preparation and heating of pipe.

3. Coat round sharp edges.

D. Allowable grind area shall be ≤0.5 ft2 per location and maximum grind area shall be ≤2ft2 per item or piece of equipment.

1. Do not use items, pipes or pieces of equipment not meeting these requirements.

E. Ensure surfaces to receive coatings are dry and free from visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter in accordance with specified SSPC standards.

F. Preheat pipe, item or piece of equipment prior to blast cleaning to remove surface moisture.

1. Preheat shall ensure surface temperature is ≥5°F above dew point temperature during blast cleaning and inspection.

G. Sandblast surfaces as specified, protecting beveled pipe ends from abrasive blast cleaning.

H. After sandblasting, apply 5% (by weight) phosphoric acid solution wash to pipe, item or piece of equipment.

1. Average temperature measured in three different locations shall be between 80°F and 130°F during acid wash procedure.

2. Duration of acid contact with surface shall be:

TEMPERATURE CONTACT TIME
80°F 52 seconds
85°F 45 seconds
90°F 36 seconds
95°F 33 seconds
100°F 28 seconds
105°F 24 seconds
110°F 21 seconds
130°F 10 seconds
I. After completing acid wash, remove acid with demineralized water having maximum conductivity of 5 micromhos/cm at nozzle pressure of ≥ 2500 psi.

3.2 Application
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and application requirements.

B. Furnish and install fusion-bonded epoxy linings and coatings at locations shown on Plans C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 9 of 11

2. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements including minimum and maximum drying time between required coats, except as modified herein

3. AWWA C116 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

4. AWWA C213 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Coat interior metal surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces.

F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT.

G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics such as runs or blisters that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

H. Apply lining and coating by electrostatic spray or fluidized bed process.

1. Heat and cure per epoxy Manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Heat source shall not leave residue or contaminant on metal surface.

3. Do not allow surfaces to oxidize or flash rust prior to coating.

I. Pinholes and holidays detected during testing shall be marked, repaired in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions and retested.

1. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in final coating.

J. Protect finished surfaces between coats.

1. For subsequent coats, remove dust, dirt, oil, grease, and foreign matter which will affect adhesion or durability of finish by washing with clean rags dipped in commercial cleaning solvent approved by paint and coating system Manufacturer.

2. Surface shall then be rinsed with clean water and wiped dry with clean rags.

K. Coats shall be thoroughly dry and cured according to Manufacturer’s recommendations before next coat is applied.

L. Upon completion, remove masking and other temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.

M. Following application and testing, protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Repair or replace damaged or colored materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

B. Repair in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions coatings that exhibit film characteristics or defects that might adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

1. Wire brush or sandblast damaged areas per SSPC SP10.

2. Lightly abrade or sandblast lining and coating on sides of damaged area before applying liquid repair coating specified above.

3. Patched areas shall overlap parent or base coating ≥½”.

4. If damaged area >20 in2
, remove entire lining and coating and recoat and retest entire item.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 10 of 11 C. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Finished
Lining or
Coating
Holidays Nondestructive holiday tester such as
Tinker-Rasor Model AP or AP-W
Contractor to submit written report from
approved testing agency on re-inspection
City’s option City Contractor
Dry Film
Thickness
SSPC-PA2
Nondestructive magnetic-type thickness
gauge such as “Inspector” or “Positest.”
Coated items failing inspection will be
subject to rejection.

City’s option City Contractor
Film
Characteristics
and Defects
Visual inspection.

Contractor to submit written report from
approved testing agency on reinspection
As directed City Contractor
Finished
Coating
System
11-Month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature as described below.

Repair identified deficiencies.
1 inspection
attended by
City,
Contractor,
City’s
Representative
and
Manufacturer’s
representative
City Contractor
D. Furnish inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness of paints and coatings.

1. Also furnish US Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of thickness gauges.

2. Dry film thickness gauges and holiday detectors shall be available until final acceptance of application.

3. Inspection devices shall be operated by, or in presence of City’s Representative with location and frequency basis determined by City’s Representative.

4. City’s Representative is not precluded from furnish his own inspection devices and rendering their opinion based solely on their tests.

E. City’s Representative shall have right to reject unsatisfactory material or Work and to replace it at Contractor’s expense if deficiencies are found in quality of installed coating.

F. Upon completion of Work, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from Work site.

1. Clean site to satisfaction of City’s Representative.

G. Warranty Inspection shall be conducted between 11
th month following completion of coating
and painting Work.

1. City will establish inspection date and will notify Contractor ≥30 days in advance. a. City will uncover or otherwise expose surfaces to be inspected. b. Contractor shall provide at their expense suitable lighting and ventilation for inspection.
c. Provide other necessary inspection equipment to City’s satisfaction.

2. Entire interior coating system shall be visually inspected. a. Defective coatings as well as damaged or rusting spots shall be satisfactorily repaired by and at sole expense of Contractor.
b. Repaired areas shall then be tested as specified herein and repair/testing procedure repeated until surface meets specified requirements.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 09 96 56 – Epoxy Linings and Coatings - 11 of 11

3. Entire exterior paint system shall be visually inspected. a. Defective, damaged or rusting areas shall be satisfactorily repaired by and at Contractor’s sole expense.

4. Warranty Inspection Report will be prepared by City’s Representative and delivered to Contractor.
a. It will set forth number and type of failures observed, percentage of surface area where failure has occurred, and names of persons making inspection.

5. Repairs shall proceed promptly.
a. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, City will establish date for Contractor to proceed with remedial Work.
b. Repair defective Work in strict accordance with Contract Documents and to satisfaction of City’s Representative.
c. Delay on part of Contractor to proceed with remedial Work on schedule shall constitute breach of this Contract.
d. In such case, City may proceed to have defects remedied as outlined in Contract Documents.

6. Remedial Work shall occur at locations where paint or coating has peeled, bubbled, or cracked and at locations where rusting is evident.
a. Such locations shall be considered failures.
b. Make repairs at points where failures are observed by removing deteriorated coating or paint, cleaning surface and repainting or recoating with same system. c. If area of failure exceeds 25% of coated or painted surface, entire paint or coating system shall, at City’s option, be required to be removed and recoated or repainted in accordance with original Contract Documents.

7. Costs of warranty inspection and repair shall be borne by Contractor, who shall include an appropriate amount for testing and repair in their bid. a. No additional allowance will be paid by City for Warranty Inspection and repairs.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 1 of 13 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
SECTION 26 05 10

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
A. Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, installation, and testing of electrical Work.

B. The following systems and equipment are typical, but not inclusive, for materials furnished in accordance with this section:

1. Control and alarm systems.

2. Raceways and fittings.

3. Wires and cables.

4. Lighting systems.

5. Underground conduit systems.

6. Grounding systems.

7. Instrumentation systems.

8. Pumping power and control systems.

9. Temporary electricity, lighting, and telephone as required during construction operations.

10. Conduit, wire, and control equipment as required for motors and equipment.

C. Refer to the following sections for Work not covered herein.

1. Section 26 05 26 for grounding and bonding requirements.

2. Section 26 08 00 for requirements for commissioning electrical systems.

3. Section 31 05 50 for requirements for protecting existing utilities.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 32 00: Construction Progress Documentation C. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01 35 26: Governmental Safety Requirements
E. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
F. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
G. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
H. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements I. Section 01 73 00: Execution
J. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
K. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
L. Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables M. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems N. Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems O. Section 26 08 00: Commissioning of Electrical Systems P. Section 31 05 50: Protecting Existing Utilities
Q. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill

1.3 Definitions
A. The following definitions apply:

1. Corrosive Locations: Chlorination building interiors, chemical storage rooms, and other spaces so identified on Plans or classified by NEC Article 505.

2. General Purpose (Indoor Dry) Locations: Indoor areas not defined below as wet, damp, hazardous, or corrosive locations.

3. Hazardous Locations: Spaces Classified as Class I, II, or III by NEC Article 505.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 2 of 13

4. Outdoor or Wet Locations: Locations exposed to weather, whether under a roof or not, including below grade structures, handholes vaults unless otherwise designated on Plans.

5. Shop-Fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which no UL test procedure has been established.

1.4 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating electrical system including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building, fire, and electrical codes and standards.

B. Plans indicate connections for typical equipment only.

1. If equipment furnished differs from that shown, provide modifications necessary for safe and properly operating installation in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Use equipment, materials, and wiring methods suitable for types of locations in which they are located as defined below.

1.5 Quality Assurance
A. Electrical Work shall conform to applicable codes and standards.

1. Conform to Cal/OSHA Safety Orders (Title 8 CCR)

2. Conform to California Electrical Code

3. Conform to applicable local codes and regulations.

4. Equipment and materials shall bear UL or ETL labels to indicate manufacturing conforms to specified standards or equal.
a. UL label or listing is required for electrical products and assemblies, except where UL- or ETL- listed products meeting Contract requirements are not manufactured. b. In such case, submittals shall state products or assemblies are not UL- or ETL-listed and no UL- or ETL-listed products are available.
c. Where UL-or ETL-listed products are not manufactured, Work shall conform to independent testing laboratory acceptable to City.
d. Where generic UL label does not apply to an assembly, serialized UL label shall be affixed to assembly by City-accepted inspector and serial number shall appear on assembly Record Drawings.

5. Where 2 codes or standards are at variance, conform to more restrictive requirements:

B. Electrical materials and equipment shall be subject to factory inspection by City’s Representative or City-designated testing agency representatives.

C. Use appropriate conduit and conductor entry fittings with enclosures which maintain specified enclosure environmental capability after proper installation.

D. Use adequate number of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

E. Refer to Sections 01 75 00 and 26 08 00 for commissioning and testing requirements.

1.6 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. Certified Ballast Manufacturers.

2. ANSI/IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code

3. ANSI/IEEE C57.109 Guide for Transformer Through-Fault-Current Duration

4. ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 3 of 13

5. ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

6. ANSI Z244-1 Personnel Protection

7. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California, Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

8. California Building Code (CBC)

9. California Electrical Code (CEC)

10. California Energy Code (CEnC)

11. California Fire Code (CFC)

12. City, County and District Electrical Codes.

13. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories standards

14. IEEE C2 National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

15. IEEE 45 Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery

16. IEEE 86 Airborne Sound Measurement on Rotating Electric Machinery

17. IEEE 112 Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

18. IEEE 115 Test Procedure for Synchronous Machines

19. IEEE 241 Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

20. IEEE 242 Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

21. IEEE 1584 Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations

22. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Standards.

23. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Standards.

24. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards.

25. National Electrical Safety Code.

26. NECA Standard of Installation

27. NEMA WD-1-1.10 General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

28. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

29. NEMA KS1 Enclosed Switches.

30. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems

31. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

32. NFPA 70B Electrical Equipment Maintenance

33. NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employer Workplaces

34. NFPA 78 Lighting Protection Code

35. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

36. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

37. NEMA MG1 Motor s and Generators

38. NEMA MG2 Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.

39. NEMA MG10 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Polyphase Motors

40. OSHA CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

41. OSHA CFR 1926 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

42. Public Utilities Service Requirements.

43. Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.(UL) Standards.

1.7 Submittals

1. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

MOBILIZATION SUBMITTALS
QA/QC Plan On City’s request, submit QA/QC procedures for composite fabrication, including:

1. Qualifications of plant staff directly involved in Work,

2. Current and anticipated plant workload.

3. State how other Work will impact hoist fabrication schedule for this contract.

4. Plant QA/QC recordkeeping and means for transmitting records to City.

5. Shop Drawing submittal process.

6. Materials sources.

7. Plant QA/QC procedures regarding sources of materials.

8. Fabrication schedule.

9. Procedures for materials handling and storage at plant.

10. Fabrication process.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 4 of 13

DRAWINGS AND PART SCHEDULES
Shop Drawings Submit under electrically-controlled equipment Shop Drawing requirements.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Dimensional Outlines
Show front, side, and rear elevations, footprints, and top views of panels, enclosures, and electrically powered equipment.

Single Line Diagrams and Metering Diagrams
Show local and remote devices associated with each installation.

Wiring and Control Diagrams,

1. Schematic wiring diagrams

2. Connection diagrams

3. Terminal diagrams showing numbering of terminal blocks

4. Conductor wire numbers, sizes and types

5. Grounding diagrams

6. Logic diagrams for programmable controllers or relays.

7. Drawings shall reference instrument tag numbers shown on Plans List of Nameplates and Identification Tags

1. Starters

2. Relays

3. Conductors

4. Push buttons

5. Switches

6. Indicating lights

7. Show nameplate material, height of letters, number of lines, inscriptions and dimensions
Materials and
Equipment Schedule
Materials and Equipment List

1. Manufacturers,

2. Brand names,

3. Catalog, model, or part numbers

4. Sizes, and other information needed to identify manufactured items proposed for use.

5. Show instrument tag numbers applicable.

Environmental Ratings
Including temperature, humidity, and elevation ratings
Electrical Ratings

1. Voltage, continuous current, and wattage ratings.

2. Conduit entry restrictions,

3. Enclosure types and dimensions

4. UL or ETL listing or identification of non UL- or ETL-Listed Products Finish Information
Information on Dielectric Connections and materials used to isolate dissimilar metals
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit the following for items of standard manufacture:

Product name or identification in sufficient detail to facilitate reordering.

List of parts and construction materials referenced by ANSI, NEMA, ASTM, SAE or CDA specification and grade.

Standard test reports for mass-produced equipment.

Motor Data Submit in tabular form for each motor:

General

1. Equipment driven and specification number of driven machine

2. Motor Manufacturer

3. Nominal horsepower

4. Service factor

5. Lists of special features being provided as specified DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 5 of 13 Enclosure and Frame

1. Frame size

2. Motor type or model, and dimension drawing

3. Net motor weight

4. Type of enclosure

5. Motor housing material and winding material.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 6 of 13

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Electrical

1. Voltage, phase, and frequency rating

2. Motor locked rotor current at rated voltage

3. Motor no-load current at rated voltage

4. Motor full load current at rated horsepower for rated voltage

5. Motor full-load current at 110% voltage

6. NEMA design letter

7. Starting code letter or locked rotor kVA or current

8. Winding insulation class and treatment

9. Special winding configuration such as part-winding, star-delta.

10. Include winding diagram.

Submit mounting details and templates where required for proper motor installation.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Engineering
Calculations – Seismic
Restraint
Refer to Section 01 73 24.

System Demonstration
Plan
Submit written plan for demonstrating each equipment item provided under Division 26 meets specified operational requirements.

Plan shall detail procedures to be used in final operation testing of entire systems including description of each system, test methods and materials, testing instruments and recorders, and list of equipment involved with functional parameters to be recorded on each item.

Submit written notice to City’s Representative for each motor verifying phasing has been checked and corrected if necessary.

Testing and check-out forms

1. List procedures with instructions for checking and testing of each electrical component of each system.

2. Include job safety rules in test procedures.

3. Provide list of qualified personnel for testing and checkout documentation.

4. Submit test results for specified testing.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Record Drawings Submit per Section 01 78 39.

O & M Instructions Submittal shall include:

Product Data, drawings, descriptions, and schematic drawings.

Include name, address, and telephone number for nearest distributor of each piece of equipment.

Theory of operation.

Expanded parts drawings of electrical parts.

Parts list and part changeout instructions.

List of recommended spare parts.

Specifications and part numbers for replacement parts
Name, address, and phone number for nearest distributor of each equipment item.

Preventative maintenance schedules.

Troubleshooting checklists.

Warranty Unless otherwise stated, furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance

8. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M Instructions, and Test Record Transcripts.

9. Standard test reports for mass-produced equipment shall be submitted along with Shop Drawings for such equipment.

1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Section 01 32 00 for requirements for scheduling.

B. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

C. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of electrical products.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 7 of 13 D. After completing shop assembly, factory test, and approval, pack equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to protect from damage, dust, and moisture.

1. Skid-mount equipment for final transport.

2. Provide external continuous lifting angles for moving heavy equipment without removing protective covering.
a. Lifting rings may be used for items <48” in all horizontal dimensions b. Lifting eyelets are not acceptable

3. Show boxed weight on shipping tags, with instructions for unloading, transporting, and handling at site.

4. Do not drop or knock over electrical equipment and assemblies.

E. Tag each component to identify location, instrument tag number and function in system.

1. Provide permanent stainless steel tag secured and etched with instrument tag number shown in tabulation.

2. Prominently display identification on exterior of shipment packaging.

F. Ensure electrical equipment will pass through building doorways and openings to reach Plan locations.

1. Coordinate shipping splits with Manufacturer to facilitate safe handling and passage through doorways and openings.

2. Ship, handle, and if necessary, assemble equipment at job site in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements to maintain functional integrity.

G. Keep electrical equipment upright during storage and handling.

1. When equipment must be tilted to pass through openings or restrictions, brace equipment to ensure tilting does not impair functional integrity of equipment.

H. Cover and protect materials and equipment to ensure no finished surfaces are damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint.

1. Protect nameplates to prevent defacing.

I. Protect electrical equipment against loss, weather, or mechanical and moisture damage.

1. Do not store electrical equipment outdoors.

2. Store electrical equipment in clean, dry, indoor, shelters or locations.

3. Store products containing electrical insulation such as transformers, conductors, motors, and controls in clean, dry, indoor heated locations.

4. Keep rotating and moving parts clean and dry.

J. Provide temporary heating, sufficient to prevent condensation, in transformers, switchgear, switchboards, motors, and motor control centers which do not have space heaters.

K. Replace Work evidencing moisture or other damage.

1.9 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Electrical equipment Manufacturers shall have manufactured similar electrical equipment for ≥5 years.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 8 of 13

1. On City’s Representative’s request, provide acceptable list of installations with similar equipment to verify compliance.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Furnished electrical system shall be complete and functional.

1. Furnish material incidental to Work of this section.

C. Equipment motors furnished shall operate through their full operating range powered by amperages specified or shown on Plans.

1. Equipment requiring larger amperage than specified or shown is unacceptable absent written statement from City electrical infrastructure and switchgear can support increased amperage.

D. Electrical equipment and panels shall be factory finished with Manufacturer’s standard primer and enamel topcoats, unless stated otherwise in individual equipment specifications.

E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for nameplates:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Dimensions ≥1/16” thick x ≥¾” high x ≥2½” long
Lettering Provide nameplates with engraved lettering ≥¼” high, legible from reasonable angles of observation to distances of at least 10’ Color Use black-engraved-to-white-core laminated plastic (so letters will be white with black background)
Mounting Secure with ≥2 stainless steel panhead sheet metal screws, escutcheon pins, or rivets.

Do not use adhesives.

Do not use embossed plastic adhesive tape.

Where equipment does not have suitable space or surface for mounting nameplate, mount nameplate to adjacent mounting surface.

Nameplates on
Motors and
Equipment
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Permanently attached to motor frame with information impressed, engraved or embossed into plate
Show information required by NEMA MG1-10.39 through 39, Manufacturer’s name, model and serial number, year of manufacture, rpm, horsepower, voltage, phase, full load current, locked-rotor kVA code, motor type, frame, insulation class, centigrade degree rise and motor connection diagram.

Also show bearing numbers for both bearings, efficiency, power factor at full load, and maximum recommended kVAR of power capacitors to result in a 90% power factor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Provide supervision on-site to lay out, check, coordinate, and supervise electrical Work.

1. Plan installation of electrical Work, considering Work of other trades to minimize interference.

B. Lay out Work in advance.

1. Plans were developed from Record Drawings and information received from City. a. Plans diagrammatically show desired locations and arrangements of panelboards, pull boxes, lighting, outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items. b. Where apparatus and equipment, switchboards and transformers, are shown on Plans, dimensions have been taken from typical equipment of class shown.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 9 of 13 c. Plans diagrammatically show desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items.

2. Make field measurements needed to install electrical system and components before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.
a. Determine exact locations in field based on size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, required NEC Article 110-26 clearances and other obstructions. b. Adhere as closely as possible to Plan locations.
c. Verify equipment contemplated for installation will fit through openings and into spaces provided.
d. Verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrified equipment provided by others.

3. Field determine and verify exact location based on physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and obstructions, and submit such location for acceptance by City’s Representative prior to installation. a. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.
b. Minor adjustment entails changes of ≤5’ in any direction. c. Install electrical equipment, including pull or junction boxes ≥ 6” from process gas, air, water, wastewater, or drainage piping and equipment. d. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions shown or reducing clearances to less than those shown on Plans or required by NEC Article 110-26.

4. Where necessary to adjust Plan locations of electrical equipment the following adjustments may be made without securing City’s acceptance provided NEC Article 110- 26 mandated code clearances are maintained.:
a. Adjustments ≤12” at grade, floor and roof level in any direction in horizontal plane. b. Adjustments ≤12” for non-lighting equipment at ceiling level in any direction in horizontal plane.
c. Adjustments ≤12” for lighting fixtures at ceiling level in any direction in horizontal plane.
d. Adjustments≤12” on walls in horizontal direction within vertical plane. e. Obtain acceptance form City’s Representative for changes in location outside the above limits.

C. Install conduit and equipment to avoid obstructions, preserve head room, and keep openings and passageways clear.

1. Where equipment installed without City’s direction must be moved, it shall be moved at Contractor’s expense.

D. Confer with City’s Representative to verify location of existing underground utilities at each area of construction activity

1. Protect existing underground utilities throughout construction.

E. Complete Work involving shutdown of existing services to equipment now functioning or tiein of equipment to existing system at such time as to minimize downtime and inconvenience to City.

1. Do such work when directed by City’s Representative.

F. Do not start Work involving existing electrical system without first obtaining and completing coordination forms required by facility.

1. Submit coordination forms with drawings and procedures showing information about what, where, why, and how Work will be done.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 10 of 13 G. Do not cut, notch, or weld to structural members or building surfaces without acceptance from City’s Representative.

1. Sawcut, channel, chase, or core-drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces as required for installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment.

2. Following such Work, repair, patch and restore surfaces to original condition.

H. Contract Documents show circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment.

1. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers.

I. Provide scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and erection equipment necessary for electrical Work.

1. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

J. Maintain continuity of electric service to functioning portions of process or buildings during hours they are normally in use.

1. Temporary outages will be permitted during cutover Work at such times and places as can be prearranged with City’s Representative and electric utility company providing service to facility.

2. Minimize outages and their duration.

3. Make no outages without prior written authorization of City’s Representative.

4. Include costs for temporary wiring and overtime Work required in Contract price. a. Remove temporary wiring at completion of Work.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Install and wire all electrical equipment, including pre-purchased equipment.

1. Perform tests as necessary to assure compliance with Contract Documents and ensure Work is ready and safe for energizing.

C. Refer to Section 31 23 00 for open trench requirements.

D. Conform to NECA Standard of Installation unless otherwise specified.

E. Make connections to equipment as required and in accordance with accepted Shop Drawings.

F. Analyze systems components, identify terminals, and prepare plans or wiring tables necessary for component interconnection.

1. Furnish and install component interconnections.

G. Conform to the following installation standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. IEEE C2 National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

4. California Electrical Code (CEC)

5. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

6. Applicable building and fire code requirements

7. Servicing electrical utility requirements

8. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements H. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 11 of 13 I. Plans indicate connections for typical equipment only.

1. If equipment furnished differs from that shown, provide modifications necessary for safe and properly operating installation in accordance with equipment Manufacturer’s recommendations.

J. Plans indicate diagrammatically desired locations and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items.

1. Field determine exact location based on physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and obstructions.

2. Work or equipment not indicated or specified but needed for proper operation of electrical systems shall be brought to attention of City prior to installation.

3. Do not mount safety switches or other equipment to equipment enclosures unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment.

K. Install electrical system components to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install components true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

L. Install equipment to be accessible for operation and maintenance

1. Electrical equipment shall not be blocked or concealed, nor interfere with normal operating and maintenance requirements of other equipment.

M. Accomplish Work required to seal penetrations of waterproofing after part penetrating waterproofing is set in place.

1. Seal and make watertight openings made for this purpose.

2. Seal weather-tight equipment or components exposed to weather.

N. In damp, wet, or below-grade areas, provide corrosion-resistant spacers to maintain ¼” separation between metallic equipment and metallic equipment supports and mounting surfaces.

1. Do not place equipment fabricated from aluminum in direct contact with earth, concrete, or steel.

2. Do not use materials that may cause building walls, ceilings, or roofing to discolor or rust.

O. Screen or seal openings into outdoor-mounted equipment to prevent entrance of rodents, birds, and insects.

P. Provide foreign power circuit isolation devices including protection of independently powered PLC input/output circuits located in equipment enclosures.

1. Circuits which are sources of foreign power shall pass through isolation device where wiring penetrates equipment enclosures including control cabinets, and MCC buckets. a. Provide easily accessible isolation point for foreign power sources for circuits in enclosure.
b. Clearly label isolation devices.

2. Manufacturers shall supply isolation devices integral with their equipment whenever possible, such as isolation switches integral with disconnect handles on MCC buckets.

3. Devices shall allow for operation of equipment with doors open to allow for testing and/or maintenance.

Q. Mark circuit breakers, disconnect switches, timer, relays, and contactors to identify each item with its respective service or function and unique identification number as shown on Plans.

1. Provide device tags for all receptacles and switches whether shown on Plans or not.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 12 of 13

2. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than height specified.

3. Use black-on-white laminated plastic, attached with sheet metal screws or self-adhesive backs.

4. Minimum label lettering heights as follows:
a. Main panel identification: ≥⅜”.
b. Panel compartments with hinged doors, and MCC buckets: ≥¼”. c. Device tags: ≥⅛”
R. Show homerun indicating panelboard name and circuit number adjacent to additional devices such as light fixtures and receptacles on same circuit.

S. Repair affected surfaces to conform to type, quality, and finish of surrounding surface in neat and workmanlike manner.

T. Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of devices and equipment.

1. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes closely matching type, color, consistency, and type of surface of original finish.

2. If damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in manner that provides finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets requirements of Contract Documents, and is acceptable to City’s Representative.

U. Where existing materials and equipment are removed or relocated, remove materials no longer used including studs, straps, conduits, and wires.

1. Remove or cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials and equipment to ≥ 12” below final finished surface and ≥ 24” below ground surface.

2. Coordinate such removal with City’s Representative.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 26 08 00 for field testing and commissioning requirements.

B. Schedule tests and inspections as job progresses.

1. Ensure inspections required by permitting agencies and servicing utilities are coordinated, conducted, and documented.

2. Allow City’s Representative to inspect materials, equipment, and workmanship.

3. After each electrical system installation is complete, perform tests to verify system is in proper working order and in accordance with Contract Documents, Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, and applicable codes.

4. Conduct tests in presence of City’s Representative.
a. Notify City’s Representative ≥7 days in advance of tests scheduled to be performed.

5. Perform insulation and ground resistance tests before operating tests.

6. Where motors ≥10hp are part of packaged equipment such as pumps, qualified motor Manufacturer’s representative shall supervise unpacking, installation and field testing.

3.4 Protection
A. Protect Work against corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation until Final Acceptance.

1. If partial dismantling of equipment is required for installation, box or wrap removed parts until reinstalled.

2. Cover materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, so no finished surfaces are damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint.

3. Protect factory-painted surfaces from impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 10 – Common Work Results for Electrical - 13 of 13

4. Protect Work from corrosion, and effects of moisture on insulation.

5. Cap conduit runs and equipment outlets during construction with manufactured seals, plugs, or caps where Work at these locations is not in progress. a. Keep openings in boxes or equipment closed during construction.

6. Keep electrical equipment, materials, and insulation dry. a. Maintain heaters in equipment connected and operating until equipment is placed in operation.

7. Repair or replace damaged Work as directed.
a. Repair stainless steel components using zinc-rich paint. b. Repair painted components using touch-up paint provided by or approved by equipment Manufacturer.
c. Repair PVC-coated components using patching compound of same material as coating, provided by Manufacturer of component.
d. Replaced damaged nameplates.

B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor's convenience in areas subject to dampness, moisture, dirt, or adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, provide protection from these atmospheres.

1. Provide temporary heating, sufficient to prevent condensation, in transformers, switchgear, switchboards, motors, and motor control centers which do not have space heaters.

2. Energize space heaters furnished with equipment.

3. Keep moving parts clean and dry.

C. Replace or have Manufacturer refinish damaged or marred materials or equipment, including face plates of panels and switchboard sections.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 1 of 17 SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of building wire, power cable, control cable, instrumentation cable, wire connectors, insulating tape, and pulling lubricant for conductors and cables rated 600VAC and less.

1.3 Definitions
A. The following definitions apply:

1. Building Wire: Single conductor, insulated, with or without outer jacket depending on type.

2. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated assemblies with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire.

3. Control Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wires #14AWG, #12AWG, or #10AWG.

4. Instrumentation Cable: Multi-conductor insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath including:
a. Analog Signal Cable used to transmit low current (4-20mA DC) or low voltage (0- 10VDC) signals using ≤ #16AWG conductors.
b. Common types include twisted shielded pairs (TSP) or twisted shielded triads (TST) c. Digital Signal Cable: Used for transmission of digital signals between computers, PLC’s, and RTU’s.

5. Power Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wire ≥#8AWG.

1.4 System Description
A. Furnish and install conductors and cables as shown on Plans and as required by NEC to power equipment furnished.

1. Include appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable codes and standards.

1.5 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 2 of 17 B. Conductors and cables shall be UL-listed and bear UL label.

C. Where Manufacturer’s, Electrical Utility or Contract Documents require larger conductor sizes than specified minimum sizes below, larger conductor size shall govern.

D. Wire diameters shall be ≥98% of specified AWG diameter.

1.6 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI C119.1 Electric Connectors-Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA568B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards

3. ASTM B1 Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

4. ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

5. ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft

6. ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

7. ASTM B189 Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

8. ASTM D2219 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Insulation for Wire and Cable, 60°C Operation

9. ASTM D2220 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Insulation for Wire and Cable, 75°C Operation

10. ASTM D2301 Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

11. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

12. California Building Code (CBC)

13. California Electrical Code (CEC)

14. California Fire Code (CFC)

15. ICEA S19 Rubber - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

16. ICEA S58-679 Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification

17. ICEA S61-402/NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

18. IEEE 400 Field Testing and Evaluation of Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems

19. IEEE 1202 Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cable

20. LAEC Los Angeles Electrical Code Article 725

21. NEMA ICS4 Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks

22. NEMA WC55 Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire

23. NEMA WC57 Control Cables

24. NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for Distribution of Electrical Energy

25. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

26. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

27. NFPA 262 Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces

28. TIA/EIA/ANSI 568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

29. UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

30. UL 62 Flexible Cords and Cables

31. UL83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

32. UL444 Communications Cables

33. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

34. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors

35. UL 486C Splicing Wire Connections

36. UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems

37. UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

38. UL 969 Labels

39. UL 1277 Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members

40. UL1581 Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

41. UL 2250 Instrumentation Tray Cable

1.7 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
DRAWINGS AND PART SCHEDULES Refer to Section 26 05 10
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 3 of 17 Product Data Submit the following for items of standard manufacture

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data for each type of conductor.

Product Data is not required for wire connectors, insulating tape, or cable lubricant.

Material List Submit material list for each conductor type.

Show insulation material, conductor material, voltage rating, Manufacturer, and other pertinent data such as type shielding, number of pairs, and applicable standards.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Describe recommended splicing, testing, and installation procedures.

SAMPLES
Material Samples Submit for fireproofing tape materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Engineering Calculations Submit cable pulling calculations for cables sized 4/0 and larger per Engineering Calculations requirements to ascertain cable will not overstrain.

If cable diameters exceed diameters shown, submit calculations verifying larger cables fit within raceways shown in conformance to NEC requirements.

Certificate of Compliance Submit evidence of UL listing for products not bearing UL label.

Test Record Transcripts Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript requirements.

At least 30 days prior to system demonstration, submit transcript for field tests using City-accepted test forms for cable tests, Hi-Pot, and Megger tests.

Field test data.

Show equipment used and time of test.

1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of conductors and cables.

1.9 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

CONDUCTOR WIRES
Insulated Conductor
Wire
Aetna Insulated Wire / Marmon / Berkshire Hathaway Virginia Beach, VA (800) 423-6505 Alpha Wire Elizabeth, NJ (800) 522-5742
American Insulated Wire Corporation Mansfield, MA (440) 235-1140 Belden, Inc. St Louis, MO (800) 235-3361
CerroWire SLiP-Wire® / Marmon / Berkshire Hathaway Chicago, IL (800) 523-3869 Encore Wire Corporation McKinney, TX (800) 962-9473
General Cable Highland Heights, KY (859) 572-8000
Kris-Tech Wire Norwalk, CA (315) 339-5268
The Okonite Company Ramsey, NJ (201) 825-0300
Omni Cable LLC West Chester, PA (888) 292-6664
Pro-Line Safety Products Company West Chicago, IL (800) 554-3424 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 4 of 17

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Rome Cable Corporation Rome, NY (315) 337-3000
Southwire Company “SimPULL” Carrollton, GA (770) 832-4000 USA Wire and Cable, Inc. Austin, TX (800) 880-9473
Accepted equal

INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
Control and Logic
Multiconductor Cable
Aetna Insulated Wire / Marmon / Berkshire Hathaway Virginia Beach, VA (800) 423-6505 Alpha Wire Elizabeth, NJ (800) 522-5742
Belden, Inc. St Louis, MO (800) 235-3361
Encore Wire Corporation McKinney, TX (800) 962-9473
General Cable Highland Heights, KY (859) 572-8000
Mohawk LAN-Trak Leominster, MA (800) 422-9961
The Okonite Company Ramsey, NJ (201) 825-0300
Omni Cable LLC West Chester, PA (888) 292-6664
Rome Cable Corporation Rome, NY (315) 337-3000
Southwire Company “Tappan” Blauvelt, NY (800) 947-3911
Accepted equal
Twisted, Shielded
Pair (TSP) and
Twisted, Shielded
Triad (TST
Instrumentation
Cable
Aetna Insulated Wire / Marmon / Berkshire Hathaway Virginia Beach, VA (800) 423-6505 Alpha Wire Elizabeth, NJ (800) 522-5742
Belden, Inc. St Louis, MO (800) 235-3361
Encore Wire Corporation McKinney, TX (800) 962-9473
General Cable Highland Heights, KY (859) 572-8000
Mohawk LAN-Trak Leominster, MA (800) 422-9961
The Okonite Company Ramsey, NJ (201) 825-0300
Omni Cable LLC West Chester, PA (800) 292-6664
Rome Cable Corporation Rome, NY (315) 337-3000
Southwire Company “Tappan” Blauvelt, NY (800) 947-3911
Accepted equal
Multi-Twisted
Shielded Pairs with
Common Overall
Shield
Instrumentation
Cable Type TC
Alpha Wire Elizabeth, NJ (800) 522-5742
Belden, Inc. St Louis, MO (800) 235-3361
The Okonite Company Ramsey, NJ (201) 825-0300
Rome Cable Corporation Rome, NY (315) 337-3000
Omni Cable LLC West Chester, PA (800) 292-6664
Southwire Company “Tappan” Blauvelt, NY (800) 947-3911
Accepted equal

CABLE AND WIRE MARKERS
Conductor Sleeve or
Tag Markers
Grafoplast Wire Markers Denver, CO (800) 864-3874
Floy Tag & Manufacturing, Inc Type FT200C Seattle, WA (206) 524-2700 Floy Tag & Manufacturing, Inc Type FT200S Seattle, WA (206) 524-2700 Panduit Corporation Tinley Park, IL (800) 344-4539
Phoenix Contact Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388
Thomas & Betts / ABB TY-RAP TY54M Series Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809 W H Brady Type B500 Milwaukee, WI (800) 940-0615
Accepted equal
Conductor Tags
(Embossed Fiber
Floater Markers for
Use in Small Junction
Boxes
Floy Tag & Manufacturing, Inc Type FT205 Seattle, WA (206) 524-2700 Accepted equal
Insulating and ColorCoded Tape
3M “Scotch St Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
Plymouth Bishop Tapes / Plymouth Rubber Canton, MA (800) 458-0336 Red Seal Electric Company Cleveland, OH (216) 941-3900
Accepted equal
OTHER
Pulling Lubricant Ideal Aqua-Gel Sycamore, IL (815) 895-5181 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 5 of 17

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Polywater Stillwater, MN (651) 430-2270
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Conductors shall conform to NEC Article 200.

C. Cables shall conform to NEC Article 340
D. Materials for conductors and cables shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

BUILDING AND INDUSTRIAL CONDUCTOR WIRES
Low-Voltage
Building Wire
#8AWG and
Smaller (600-
VAC Rated)
Conductors
except
#10AWG or
#12AWG branch
power or lighting
circuits
Coated sift-drawn or annealed stranded copper
Conform to ASTM B33 and ASTM B189
Stranding shall conform to ASTM B8 Class B
Conductors -
#10AWG or
#12AWG
designated for
branch circuit
power wiring to
lighting and
receptacle
circuits
Coated sift-drawn or annealed stranded copper
Conform to ASTM B33 and ASTM B189
Stranding shall conform to ASTM B8 Class B
Size Size as shown on Plans and as required per NEC
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
≥#12AWG for power and lighting circuits
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
Conform to ASTM D2220 for 75°C PVC
Rated for continuous operation at 75°C (167°F) / 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 75°C (167°F) / 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Location Permitted
Insulation
Standard
Architectural and NonArchitectural Finished
Areas
Type XHHW2,Flame-retardant XLPE Conform to
NEMA WC70 and UL 44

THHN/THWN
or
THHN/THWN2
Thermoplastic PVC with nylon jacket
Conform to NEMA WC70 and UL 83
Below Grade Type XHHW2
Flame-retardant XLPE Conform to
NEMA WC70 and UL 44
Wire Size THWN
Insulation
Thickness
PVC
Insulation
Thickness
Clear Nylon Jacket Thickness
#14AWG ≥12 mils ≥16 mils ≥4 / 5 mils
#12 AWG ≥14 mils ≥19 mils ≥4 / 5 mils
#10AWG ≥16 mils ≥22 mils ≥4 / 5 mils
≥#8AWG ≥4 / 5 mils
Jacket ≥4 / 5-mil nylon jacket on THHW and THWN cables
Moisture, sunlight, oil-and-heat-resistant, flame-retardant cross-linked polyolefin outer jacket on multi-conductor XHHW-2 cables
No jacket required for single conductor XHHW-2 cables
Labeling Permanently imprint along length of each conductor

1. Manufacturer Name or Trademark

2. Insulation Type Letter Designation
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 6 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

3. Voltage Rating

4. Wire Size

5. UL Label
Control Cable
(600-VAC
Rated)
Type TC
Conductors Conform to NFPA 70 (NEC) Type TC
Coated sift-drawn or annealed stranded copper
Conform to ASTM B33 and ASTM B189
Stranding shall conform to ASTM B8 Class B
Size Size as shown on Plans and as required per NEC
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
≥#14AWG for control circuits.provided fuse or circuit breaker sized at ≤15A protects circuit
Number of
Conductors
As required, provided with or without bare ground conductor of same AWG size.

When bare ground conductor is not provided, provide additional insulated conductor for ground conductor
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
Flame-retardant cross-linked thermoplastic PVC with nylon jacket (THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2) conforming to NEMA WC57 and UL83 and UL 1277 Type XHHW-2 for below-grade runs
Type XHHW-2, THHN, or THWN for above-grade runs
Rated for continuous operation at 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Location Permitted
Insulation
Standard
Architectural and NonArchitectural Finished
Areas
Type XHHW2,Flame-retardant XLPE Conform to
NEMA WC70 and UL 44

THHN/THWN
or
THHN/THWN2
Thermoplastic PVC with nylon jacket
Conform to NEMA WC57, UL 83, and
UL 1277
Below Grade Type XHHW2Flame-retardant XLPE Conform to
NEMA WC70 and UL 44
Individual
Conductor Color
Coding
Conform to ICEA S58-679 Method 1, Table E2 where not otherwise shown Jacket ≥4-mil nylon jacket on THHW and THWN cables
Moisture, sunlight, oil-and-heat-resistant, flame-retardant cross-linked polyolefin outer jacket on multi-conductor XHHW-2 cables
No jacket required for single conductor XHHW-2 cables
Labeling Permanently imprint along length of each conductor

1. Manufacturer Name or Trademark

2. Insulation Type Letter Designation

3. Voltage Rating

4. Wire Size

5. UL Label
Grounding
Conductors
Conductor Stranded soft-drawn copper
Required in multi-conductor power cables.

Size –
Alternating
Current System
Ground
As shown on Plans and sized per NEC Table 250.66
Size –
Equipment
Ground
As shown on Plans and sized per NEC Table 250.122
Minimum Size of
Ground
Conductors
(Use where wire
size not shown)
≥#12AWG
Insulation Insulation material shall match that used for phase conductors DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 7 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Color – Green or Green with yellow stripes per NEC 250.119 Jacket ≥4-mil nylon jacket on THHW and THWN cables
Moisture, sunlight, oil-and-heat-resistant, flame-retardant cross-linked polyolefin outer jacket on multi-conductor XHHW-2 cables
No jacket required for single conductor XHHW-2 cables
Labeling Permanently imprint along length of each conductor

1. Manufacturer

2. Insulation Type Letter Designation

3. Voltage Rating

4. Conductor Size

5. UL Label
Direct-Buried
Grounding
Conductors
Conductors
#10AWG or
smaller
Soft or annealed copper wire
Conform to ASTM B3
Conductors -
8AWG –
500kcmil
Bare stranded soft-temper high-conductivity copper grounding cable Conform to ASTM B8 Class B
Identify ground conductor with green electrical tape spiral-wound around conductor for exposed lengths in boxes, enclosures, or where emerging from protective raceways.

Size –
Alternating
Current System
Ground
As shown on Plans and as required per NEC Table 250.66
Fixture Wires Conductor Copper
Conform to NEC Article 402
Type AVA
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
≥#14 AWG
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
Flexible Cords
and Cables
Conductor Copper
Conform to NEC Article 400
Type SO or SJO
Insulation Rated for 600VAC

INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
Digital Control
and Logic
Cables (for
Control Logic,
PLC Outputs
and Inputs)
Type TC
Conductor Conform to NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 336 Type TC
Copper
UL-listedmulti-conductor cable with ground
Conform to NFPA 262
As recommended by PLC, RTU, or digital equipment Manufacturer Ground Include 1 full-size green equipment grounding conductor Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
≥#14AWG
7-strand
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
Conform to ASTM D2220 for 75°C PVC
15-mil PVC+4-mil nylon jacket insulated wires
UL listed as Type THHN/THWN
Color code to ICEA S61-402 Appendix K, Method 1 Table K2 Rated for continuous operation at 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Flame-retardant
Shield Bind conductor groups with spiral wrap of barrier tape.

Outer Jacket PVC
Flame-retardant, sunlight, abrasion, moisture and oil-resistant and suitable for wet or dry locations
Dimension 4-pair OD ≤0.50” 45-mil nominal jacket thickness 8-pair OD ≤0.68” 60-mil nominal jacket thickness
12-pair OD ≤0.82” 60-mil nominal jacket thickness
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 8 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
16-pair OD ≤0.95” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
20-pair OD ≤1.05” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
24-pair OD ≤1.16” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
36-pair OD ≤1.33” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
50-pair OD ≤1.56” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
Labeling 1. Manufacturer Name or Trademark

2. Maximum Working Voltage (Rating) for which cable was tested

3. Type of Cable

4. UL Label

5. Verified performance level
Horizontal Voice
and Data Cable
Category 6 per TIA/EIA/ANSI 568
Label-verified
≥#24AWG solid untinned copper conductors
Rated CMP per NFPA 70
Use where recommended by PLC or RTU manufacturer
Service Multi-conductor control circuit interconnection cable with ground Suitable for installing in cable trays, conduit or other accepted raceways Passes vertical tray flame test
Instrument
Analog Cable –
Single Pair
Type TC (UL 62
and UL 1277 or
UL 1581)
Conductor Conform to NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 336 Type TC
Conform to UL2250
Conform to UL1581 for cable tray use
Conform to UL1277 for direct burial or sunlight exposure Bare soft annealed stranded tinned copper
Class B 7-strand
≥ 6 twists per foot
Concentric conforming to ASTM B8
Drain Wire Pair drain wire #20AWG 7-strand tinned copper Increase wire size for runs >1000’
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
Two or 3 ≥#18AWG for runs <1000’
Two or 3 ≥#16AWG for runs >1000’
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
15-mil PVC+4-mil nylon jacket-insulated twisted-pair wires Color code to ANSI/ICEA standards
Rated for continuous operation at 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Flame-retardant
Pair conductors integrally pigmented black and red.

Individual
Conductor Color
Coding
Conform to ICEA S58-679 Method 1, Table E2 where not otherwise shown Shield Spiral-wound 1.35-mil aluminum/mylar metal-foil tape Overlap to provide 100% coverage
Jacket 45-mil PVC
Flame-retardant, sunlight, abrasion, moisture and oil-resistant and suitable for wet or dry locations
Dimension Nominal OD – 0.31”
Service Instrument cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications
Suitable for installing in cable trays, conduit or other accepted raceways Instrument
Analog Cable –
Single Triad
Type TC (UL 62
and UL 1277 or
UL 1581)
Conductor Conform to NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 336 Type TC
Conform to UL2250
Conform to UL 1581 for cable tray use
Conform to UL 1277 for direct burial or sunlight exposure Bare soft annealed stranded tinned copper
Class B 7-strand
≥ 6 twists per foot
Concentric conforming to ASTM B8
Drain Wire Triad drain wire #20AWG 7-strand tinned copper DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 9 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Increase wire size for runs >1000’
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
Two or 3 ≥#18AWG for runs <1000’
Two or 3 ≥#16AWG for runs >1000’
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
15-mil PVC+4-mil nylon jacket-insulated twisted-triad wires Color code to ANSI/ICEA standards
Rated for continuous operation at 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Flame-retardant
Triad conductors integrally pigmented black, red, and blue Individual
Conductor Color
Coding
Conform to ICEA S58-679 Method 1, Table E2 where not otherwise shown Shield Spiral-wound 1.35-mil aluminum/mylar metal-foil tape Overlap to provide 100% coverage
Jacket 45-mil PVC
Flame-retardant, sunlight, abrasion, moisture and oil-resistant and suitable for wet or dry locations.

Dimension Nominal OD – 0.32”
Service Instrument cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications
Suitable for installing in cable trays, conduit or other accepted raceways Instrument
Analog Cable –
#18AWG MultiTwisted
Shielded Pairs
with Common
Overall Shield
Type TC (UL 62
and UL 1277 or
UL 1581)
Conductor Conform to NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 336 Type TC
Conform to UL2250
Conform to UL 1581 for cable tray use
Conform to UL 1277 for direct burial or sunlight exposure Bare soft annealed stranded tinned copper
Class B 7-strand
≥ 6 twists per foot
Concentric conforming to ASTM B8
Drain Wire Pair drain wire #20AWG tinned copper
Group drain wire #18AWG tinned copper
Increase wire size for runs >1000’
Minimum Size
(where wire size
not shown)
Two or 3 ≥#22AWG for runs <1000’
Two or 3 ≥#20AWG for runs >1000’
Insulation Rated for 600VAC
15-mil PVC+4-mil nylon jacket-insulated wires twisted together Color code to ANSI/ICEA standards
Rated for continuous operation at 90°C (194°F) in dry locations, 90°C (194°F) in wet locations
Flame-retardant
Twisted-pair conductors integrally pigmented black and red with red conductor numerically printed for group identification
Individual
Conductor Color
Coding
Conform to ICEA S58-679 Method 1, Table E2 where not otherwise shown Shield Spiral-wound 1.35-mil aluminum/mylar metal-foil tape Group shield 2.35-mil aluminum/mylar metal-foil tape
Overlap to provide 100% coverage
Jacket 45-mil PVC
Flame-retardant, sunlight, abrasion, moisture and oil-resistant and suitable for wet or dry locations.

Dimension 4-pair OD ≤ 0.50” 45-mil nominal jacket thickness 8-pair OD ≤ 0.68” 60-mil nominal jacket thickness
12-pair OD ≤ 0.82” 60-mil nominal jacket thickness
16-pair OD ≤ 0.95” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
20-pair OD ≤ 1.05” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 10 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
24-pair OD ≤ 1.16” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
36-pair OD ≤ 1.33” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
50-pair OD ≤ 1.56” 80-mil nominal jacket thickness
Service Instrumentation, process control, and computer cable suitable for installing in cable trays, conduit or other accepted raceways.

Network Cables
– Ethernet
Cable

TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS
Twist / Screwon Type Wire
Connectors
Copper 600VAC-rated
For phase and neutral conductors, conform to UL 486C
For ground conductors, conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 as required by local codes.

Compression
andMechanical
Screw Type
Wire
Connectors
Copper –
Electro-TinPlated
600VAC-rated
For phase and neutral conductors conform to UL 486A
For ground conductors, conform to UL 467
Terminal BlockType Wire
Connectors
Copper –
Electro-TinPlated
High-density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marking strip 600VAC-rated for power circuits
600VAC 20-Amp-rated for control circuits
600VAC 15-Amp-rated for instrumentation circuits
Conform to NEMA ICS4 and UL486A
Terminals -
≥#6AWG
Copper –
Electro-TinPlated
UL-listed, solderless, compression type.

Terminals -
≤#8AWG
Copper –
Electro-TinPlated
UL-listed, solderless, compression type connectors, or mechanical seamless tubular ring tongue terminals.

Terminals –
Control and
Instrumentation
Cable
Copper –
Electro-TinPlated
Ring tongue terminals.

Terminal barrel shall be internally serrated and covered with color-coded PVC insulation sleeve.

Terminals – For
Terminations on
Screw-Type
Terminal Strips
Supplied
Integral to
Devices
Copper – TinPlatedRing-tongue, nylon- or vinyl-insulated copper crimp terminals and ferrules with insulating sleeves for terminal blocks, except for light switches and receptacles.

Taps in Wires
#6AWG and
Larger
Copper Mechanical tap with preformed insulating cover.

Taps -
≤#8AWG
Copper Make “pigtail" or connections with compression connection with thermoplastic insulating cover.

CABLE AND WIRE MARKERS
Labeling
System
Label Stock,
Laminating
Adhesive and
Ink
Conform to UL969
Cable Markers Nylon
Identification
Ties
Hot-stamp with black letters ≥5/32” high
Wire Markers Hot-Stamped
PVC Sleeves
White with black lettering for uniform appearance
Hold sleeve length to uniform length at each terminal board Where hot-stamped sleeve is unavailable, mark wire with clip sleeve covered with transparent heat-shrink tubing.

Heat-Shrink
Polyolefin
White with black lettering for uniform appearance
Hold sleeve length to uniform length at each terminal board DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 11 of 17

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Sleeves
OTHER
Wire and Cable
Supports
Baskets, grips, clamps, wedge assemblies and other devices designed for cable support
Heavy-duty split-lace
Pulling
Lubricant
Cable Manufacturer’s standard containing no petroleum or other products which deteriorate insulation.

E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Wire Color Phase Conductors
#8AWG and
smaller
Factory color coding with integrally pigmented solid color insulation along full length
Do not use on-site coloring of conductor ends or apply colored plastic adhesives in lieu of factory color-coding.

Ground
Conductors
Factory color coding with integrally pigmented solid green color insulation along full length, or
Stripping insulation from entire exposed length, or
Covering entire exposed length with green tape.

Purple-Colored
Wiring
Use to identify wires connecting to PLC input/output circuits.

Use white or purple with white stripe for PLC neutral throughout Work.

This requirement is a worker safety precaution to identify foreign power sources in equipment and applies to internal wiring in PLC enclosure cabinet, interconnecting wiring to devices and equipment, and internal equipment wiring.

F. Color-code low-voltage building and power wire as follows:

PHASE 240/120 VOLTS 208/120 VOLTS 240 VOLTS
Phase A Black Black Black
Phase B Red Red Red (Orange for high leg
of Delta system)
Phase C --- Blue Blue
Neutral White White White
Ground Green Green Green

OTHER WIRING
Control Red (and see below)
PLC (Field) Purple
PLC (Neutral) White or Purple w/ White Stripe
+24VDC Blue
-24VDC Blue w/ White Stripe
Instrument Signal Wiring +White
-Black
Wires energized by
sources external to control
panels
Yellow

1. Phases A, B, and C denote direction of positive phase rotation.

G. Control wires shall have colored insulation.

1. Provide separate color codes for each wire in each conduit that has ≤ 7 wires.

2. Conduits with >7 wires shall have ≥7 types of colored insulation.

H. Refer to individual cable type specifications for color coding of multiconductor control and instrumentation cable.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 12 of 17 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install conductors and cables before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install conductors and cables at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. Conform to the following installation standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. California Electrical Code Article 300 “Wiring Methods”

4. California Electrical Code Article 310 “Conductors for General Wiring”

5. California Electrical Code Article 320 “Armored Cable: Type AC”

6. California Electrical Code Article 334 “Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable: Types NM, NMC, and NMS”

7. California Electrical Code Article 336 “Power and Control Tray Cable: Type TC”

8. California Electrical Code Article 340 “Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable:

Type UF”

9. California Electrical Code Article 400 “Flexible Cords and Cables”

10. California Electrical Code Article 402 “Fixture Wires”

11. Other applicable building, fire and electrical code requirements

12. NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) ATS standards a. NETA ATS 7.3.2 for low-voltage cable inspections and tests.

13. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above docume8ts and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Tag control wires and instrument cables at terminations and visible and accessible locations in maintenance holes, hand-holes, panels, switchboards, pull boxes, terminal boxes, and at control device.

1. Tag power wires in pull boxes or similar structures where there is more than 1 circuit.

F. Tags shall conform to the following:

1. Tag wires within ≤ 2” of termination at each device and terminal board.

2. Tag both ends of wires ≥ 12” long.

3. Do not use tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers.

4. Provide conductor tags for conductors ≤ #12AWG with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking.

5. Provide tags for cables, and for conductors ≥ #10AWG, consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on plate. a. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with nylon tie cord.

6. Position wire markers to be readily visible for inspection.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 13 of 17 G. Assign tag numbers as follows:

1. Identify power and control conductors at each termination and at all accessible locations including maintenance holes, handholes, panels, switchboards, pull boxes and terminal boxes.

2. Tag numbers for conductors shall follow 3-segment numbering scheme, defining origin of conductor, function of conductor, and destination of conductor. a. For example: MCCA-P-MCCB shows MCCA is origin, P is function identification (P=power, L=lighting or receptacle, C=control, S=signal, etc.), and MCCB is destination.

3. Where Plans, Shop Drawings, or interconnection diagrams show circuit numbers or where conductors have multiple destinations, append circuit numbers or identifiers to letters showing function of conductor, eg PA, PB.

4. Make origin and destination identification the specific names of equipment or instruments used on Plans
H. Install Conductor Arc and Fireproofing Tapes as Follows:

1. Wrap together single conductors and cables in maintenance holes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations using arc and fireproofing tapes. a. Wrap all conductors entering from each conduit together as 1 cable.

2. Follow tape Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

3. Throughout their exposed length, bundle and secure arc and fireproofing tape at intervals ≤18” on centers with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties or bands of specified glass cloth electrical tape.
a. Make each band of ≥2 wraps of tape directly over each other.

4. Wrap together as far as possible, conductors carrying phases A, B, and C of same feeder.
a. Do not wrap together conductors carrying only 2 of 3 phases.

5. Train cables as closely as possible to their final positions.

6. Clean cables of oil, grease, and cable pulling compounds, using suitable solvents and cleaners non-injurious to cable, and then wipe dry.

7. Cover projecting surfaces such as fittings, ground connectors or bonding connections with insulating compound to present smooth continuous surface for taping.

8. Fireproofing tape shall be 3” width half-lapped and extend ≥6” into raceway. a. Use ¾” glass tape at 3’ intervals to hold tape in place.

I. Install wiring within raceways unless otherwise shown.

1. Do not combine feeder, branch, control, and instrumentation circuits in same raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except:
a. Where shown in Contract Documents
b. Where field conditions dictate and where written acceptance is obtained from City’s Representative.

2. Isolate control circuits from feeder and branch power circuits and from instrumentation circuits.
a. 12VDC, 24VDC, and 48VDC control circuits may be combined. b. Isolate AC control circuits from DC control circuits. c. Isolate 125 VDC control circuits from all other AC and DC circuits.

3. Isolate instrumentation circuits from feeder and branch power circuits and from control circuits.
a. Isolate analog and digital instrumentation circuits. b. Analog instrumentation signal circuits may be combined.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 14 of 17 c. Digital instrumentation signal circuits may be combined.

4. Multiple branch circuits for lighting, receptacle, and other 120VAC circuits may be combined into a common raceway.
a. If circuits are combined, upsize raceway as required by NEC for size and quantity of conductors.
b. If circuits are combined, upsize conductor sizes as required by NEC for ampacity deratings for number of conductors in raceway. c. Neutral conductors may not be shared.

J. Pull cables and conductors into place as follows:

1. Do not install conductors or cables in conduits, ducts or trays until raceway system is completed.

2. Size raceways to accommodate number and size of cables shown in accordance with NEC Article 300.

3. Immediately prior to placement of each cable or cable group, inspect raceway route to be followed and verify installation is complete and free of materials detrimental to cable or its placement.
a. Brush, scrape, or swab embedded or buried conduits and ducts before pulling in conductors.

4. Do not damage conductors or insulation.
a. Handle conductors carefully to avoid kinks or insulation damage. b. Do not pull cables tight against bushings nor press cables heavily against enclosures.

5. If during Work progress, raceways appear inadequate to accommodate assigned cable, notify City’s Representative and discontinue further Work within questionable raceway until advised by City’s Representative on how to proceed.

6. Group cables assigned to each conduit and pull in simultaneously, using cable grips and UL-accepted lubricants compatible with insulation.

7. Check size and length of cables before pulling into conduits.

8. Install shielded instrumentation wire from terminal to terminal with no splicing at intermediate points.
a. Remove cable pulled into wrong conduit or cut too short and replace at no additional cost to City.
b. Do not reuse cable removed from 1 conduit or duct without permission from City’s Representative.

9. Where pulling compound is used, use UL-listed compound acceptable to cable Manufacturer and compatible with cable outer jacket or insulation and with raceway involved.

10. Accomplish fishing and pulling with flexible round metal or non-metallic tape, carbon dioxide or forced air propelled polyethylene cord, nylon rope, or manila rope. a. Use woven wire cable grips to pull single conductor cable, #2/0AWG and larger, and multiconductor cable.
b. Use pulling loops to pull single conductor cable smaller than #2/0AWG. c. Use only those pulling mechanisms of both manual and power types with rated capacity in tons clearly marked on mechanism.
d. Do not exceed cable Manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii.
e. Do not use vehicles to pull conductors.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 15 of 17 f. If pulling mechanism capacity exceeds recommended pulling tension of cable as given by cable Manufacturer, provide dynamometer to monitor cable tension, and observe indicator throughout pulling.
g. If excessive strain develops, stop pulling operation, determine difficulty, and make corrections.
h. When cable grip is used for pulling, cut off area of cable covered by grip plus 6” and discard.

11. Leave spare conductors at their maximum length for possible use as replacements. a. Coil each spare conductor neatly and then tape to conductors being used.

K. Install low-voltage (600VAC) building wire and power wire as follows:

1. Install wiring and cable in conduit and terminate unless otherwise noted.

2. To reduce pulling tension in long runs, coat wires and cables with pulling compound recommended by wire or cable Manufacturer before pulling into conduits.

3. Remove debris and moisture from conduits, boxes, and cabinets prior to wire or cable installation.

4. Install wires and cables in each voltage classification in separate raceways and completely isolate at cable and wire terminations.

5. Group conductors #1/0 AWG and smaller in panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes, and switchboard wireways.
a. Tie with plastic ties, and fan out to terminals.

6. Do not insulate soldered mechanical joints with tape.

7. Vinyl plastic insulating tape for wire and cable splices and terminations and for color coding shall be flame retardant, rated for ≥ 90°C, conforming to UL510. a. Use tape ≥ 7-mil thick for ≤ #8AWG size wire.
b. Use tape ≥ 8.5-mil thick for outdoor or cold-weather applications for ≤ #8AWG size wire
c. Use tape ≥ 10-mil thick for ≥ #6AWG size wire.

8. Arrange wiring in cabinets, panels, and motor control centers neatly, cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bridle and secure in acceptable manner. a. Identify circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with conductor identification system specified.

9. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated with UL-listed end caps.

10. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect conductors.

11. For conductors to be connected by others, provide ≥6’ spare conductor in freestanding panels and ≥2’ spare in other assemblies.
a. Provide more spare conductor in assemblies where it is obvious more conductor will be needed to reach termination point.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 16 of 17 L. Splice low-voltage (600VAC) cable and building wire as follows:

1. Splices shall be as follows using connectors listed under Acceptable Manufacturers.

FEEDER AND POWER BRANCH CIRCUITS
Location Wire Size Type of Splice or Termination
Device Outlet Boxes ≤#10AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors or crimp connectors with tools by same Manufacturer or UL listed for connector
≤#8AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors
Junction and Pull Boxes
and Wireways
≤#10AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors or crimp connectors with tools by same Manufacturer or UL listed for connector
≤#8AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors
≥#6AWG Use compression sleeve, mechanical screw or terminal block, or terminal strip-type connectors.

Stagger sleeves to minimize completed splice diameter
Cover sleeves with Thermofit insulation sleeve, extending ≥3 wire diameters beyond each end of compression sleeve after shrinking.

Heat source and shrinking techniques shall conform to Manufacturer’s Installation instructions.

Motor Terminal Boxes ≤#10AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors or crimp connectors with tools by same Manufacturer or UL listed for connector
≥#8AWG Use insulated mechanical screw-type connectors
Manholes or Handholes ≤#8AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors pre-filled with epoxy ≥#6AWG Use watertight compression sleeve or mechanical screw-type connectors

CONTROL CIRCUITS
Junction and Pull Boxes ≤#8AWG Use terminal-block-type connector Manholes or Handholes ≤#8AWG Use twist/screw-on-type connectors pre-filled with epoxy Control Panels or Motor
Control Centers
≤#8AWG Use terminal block or strips provided within equipment or field-installed within equipment by Contractor.

INSTRUMENTATION CIRCUITS
May be spliced where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from City’s Representative.

Maintain electrical continuity of shields when splicing twisted shielded conductors.

Junction and Pull Boxes ≤#10AWG Use terminal-block-type connector Control Panels or Motor
Control Centers
≤#10AWG Use terminal block or strips provided within equipment or field-installed within equipment by Contractor.

2. Retighten bolt-type connectors 24-48 hours after initial installation and before taping. a. Tape connections made with non-insulated-type connectors with rubber-type tape, 1½ times thickness of conductor insulation, then cover with Scotch 33 tape.

3. Do not splice wires in underground handholes or pull boxes unless shown on Plans. a. Seal splices in underground handholes and pull boxes and in light poles with individual sealing packs of Scotchcast Brand 400 Resin or equal.

M. Terminate low-voltage (600VAC) wires as follows:

1. Terminate wires and cables at each end.

2. Do not splice feeders without written acceptance from City’s Representative.

3. Provide terminals and connectors acceptable for material type used.

4. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. a. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring (except solid thermocouple leads) with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs

5. Install compression-type lugs or connectors with specially-designed hydraulic or mechanical tool conforming to Manufacturer's Installation Instructions to ensure permanent, secure, high-conductivity joint.
a. Tooling shall provide complete, controlled crimp where tool will not release until crimp is complete.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 17 of 17 b. Do not use plier-type crimpers.

6. Provide color-coded system on terminal and die sets to provide correct number and location of crimps.
a. Permanent die index number shall be embossed on completed crimp for inspection purposes.

7. For terminals designed to accept only bare wire compression terminations, use only stranded wire.
a. Terminate only 1 wire per terminal.
b. Tighten terminal screws with torque screwdriver to recommended torque values.

8. Tighten screws and terminal bolts using torque-type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to inch-pound requirements of Manufacturer, NEC, and UL.

9. Lace control leads between conduit ends and terminal blocks located in control panels, cabinets and similar locations neatly together with non-releasing nylon ties.

N. Install instrument cables as follows:

1. Do not splice instrument cables without permission of City’s Representative. a. Cables shall be continuous from device to RTU unless shown otherwise on Plans.

2. Cable splices shall be made by qualified cable splicers following Manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Locate splices, when permitted, only in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips.
a. Splices will only be permitted where proven necessary by accepted pulling tension calculations.

4. Where connections of cables are to be made for instrumentation and control cables, leave pigtails of adequate length for neat, bundled type connections.

5. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. a. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over shield.

6. Seal cables entering maintenance holes, hand-holes or vaults using accepted expanding foam product.

7. Ground drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at source terminal strip end only. a. Preferred grounding location is at load (eg control panel), not at source (eg fieldmounted instrument).

8. Use small piece of heat-shrink tube or signal wiring to cover area where outer cable jacket is cut to expose inner conductors.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 26 08 00 for field testing requirements.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 1 of 8 SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of grounding and bonding conforming to CEC and NEC Article 250.

B. Refer to Section 26 05 19 for wiring requirements.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating grounding and bonding including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. System shall bond and ground exposed non-energized metal surfaces containing energized devices, parts, or conductors, building steel, other metals, metallic electrical raceways, and neutrals of transformers and generators.

1. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout Work.

B. Furnished equipment shall be UL listed and labeled.

C. Work shall conform to applicable requirements of NEC and Cal OSHA Title 8.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. California Building Code (CBC)

3. California Electrical Code (CEC)

4. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

5. IEEE 81 Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of Ground System

6. IEEE 142 Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

7. IEEE 837 Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding

8. NEMA/ANSI GR1 Ground Rod Electrodes and Ground Rod Electrode Couplings DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 2 of 8

9. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

10. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

11. UL 467 Safety Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS AND PART SCHEDULES
Shop Drawings Submit per equipment Shop Drawing requirements. .

Material List Submit list of grounding materials and equipment.

Show size, material and manufacturer.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit for the following per Product Data requirements:

1. Exothermic welding materials

2. Terminal lugs and clamps

3. Copper grounding cable

4. Ground rods

5. Ground connection hardware
Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Field Test Procedures Include list of test equipment to be used.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Field Test Record
Transcripts
Indicate overall resistance to ground, resistance of each electrode, and plot of resistance vs distance from grid.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of grounding and bonding equipment.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Concrete Grounding
Wire Boxes and Cover
Brooks Products Ontario, CA (909) 947-7470
Eisel Enterprises, Inc. Placentia, CA (714) 993-1706
J&R Concrete Products #10-R Perris, CA (951) 943-5855
Accepted equal
Grounding Rods and
Connectors
Burndy® Corporation Manchester, NH (800) 346-4175
Erico/ Pentair “Eritech” Solon, OH (440) 349-2630
Harger Lighting and Grounding Grayslake, IL (800) 842-7437 Henry Brothers Springville, NY (716) 941-6141
Jocelyn Forge, Inc. Bulacan, PHI (632) 984-8582
Lyncole Grounding Solutions/ VFC XIT® Torrance, CA (310) 214-4000 Robbins Lightning Protection Maryville, MO (800) 426-3792 Thomas & Betts (Blackburn) / ABB Memphis, TN (800) 888-0211 Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. Saint Paul, MN (800) 777-1230 Accepted equal
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 3 of 8

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Exothermic Weld
Equipment
Erico / Pentair Cadweld Electrical Products Solon, OH (440) 349-2630 Furseweld Torrance, CA (310) 214-4000
Harger Lighting and Grounding Ultraweld Grayslake, IL (847) 548-8700 ThermOweld / Continental Industries Tulsa, OK (800) 558-1373 Accepted equal
B. Molds, cartridges, powder, and accessories for exothermic welds shall be furnished by same Manufacturer.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for grounding and bonding shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Grounding Conductors Insulated Copper Refer to Section 26 05 19.

Color-coded to code requirements.

Conduit Refer to Section 26 05 33.

Bonding Jumpers Multiple-Circuit
Lighting Systems
#6AWG
Cross-sectional areas of jumper shall match cross-sectional area of conductors in circuit
Series and Other
Lighting Systems
#8AWG or larger
Cross-sectional areas of jumper shall match cross-sectional area of conductors in circuit
Main Ground Conductor Loop
when Exposed within Buildings
Copper Minimum ¼” x 1” rectangular bar ground bus supported with suitale spacers at ½”-1” from structure
Grounding System Bond to
Piping
Copper Connect to 1
st pipe flange inside structure on either suction or
discharge pipe using copper bar or strap and drilling and tapping flange to provide bolted connection
Ground Connection Hardware,
Bolts, and Nuts
High-Strength HighConductivity Copper
Alloy
Ground Rods Copper-Clad Steel UL listed
Conform to ANSI/NEMA GR1
¾” diameter nominal
≥10’ long
≥80,000 psi tensile strength
≥10 mil Cu plating
With hardened steel points
Provide heavy uniform coating of electrolytic copper
molecularly bonded to rigid steel core.

Hard drawn for scar-resistant surface.

Connections – Ground Clamps
or Lugs, Connectors and
Terminals – Mechanical Type
Copper Conform to UL 467
Connections – Ground Clamps,
Connectors and Terminals –
Compression Type Suitable for
Direct Burial in Earth or
Concrete
Bronze High Copper Alloy Content
Conform to UL 467
Conform to IEEE 837
Non-Reversible
Connections – Ground Clamps,
Connectors and Terminals –
Compression Type for Interior
Locations
Bronze High Copper Alloy Content
Conform to UL 467
Non-Reversible
Provide 2 bolt holes for terminals for connection to bus bars Connections – Ground Clamps,
Connectors and Terminals –
Compression Type Suitable for
Direct Burial in Earth or
Concrete
Bronze High Copper Alloy Content
Conform to UL 467
Conform to IEEE 837
Non-Reversible
Exothermic Weld Connections Copper oxide Properly size molds for application.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 4 of 8

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
reduction by
aluminum process
Above-Grade Outdoor
Connectors
Exothermic Weld,
Compression, or
Brazed Type
Of proper size for conductors and ground rods specified Below-Grade Connectors Exothermic Weld
Type
Of proper size for conductors and ground rods specified.

Bare Copper Conductor and Bus
Splice Protection
Heat-Shrink Tape or
Sleeve
Grounding Wire Boxes Precast Concrete H25-rated
Grounding Wire Box Cover Cast Iron 13-lbm minimum
Embossed “GROUND”
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Noncurrent-Carrying Metal Parts 25j
All other Grounds 25j
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install grounding and bonding before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

C. Coordinate installation of embedded ground cables with concrete Work.

D. Remove paint, rust, or other nonconducting material from contact surfaces before making ground connections.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Refer to Section 31 23 00 for open trench requirements.

C. Furnish and install grounding and bonding at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

D. Install grounds in presence of City’s Representative.

E. Conform to the following installation standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders.

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

3. California Electrical Code Article 250 “Grounding and Bonding”.

4. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

5. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements.

6. NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) ATS standards a. NETA ATS 7.13 for grounding inspections and tests.
b. NETA ATS 7.14 for ground fault protection inspections and tests.

7. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

F. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 5 of 8 G. The following shall be grounded:

1. Handhole and maintenance hole exposed metal covers

2. Handrails

3. Motors

4. Pumps

5. Casings

6. Magnetic flow meters

7. Process equipment with exposed metal parts

8. Exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment.

9. Raceways and neutral of wiring systems.

10. Neutrals of transformers.

11. Metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements of buildings.

12. Metal fences enclosing electrical equipment.

13. Metal equipment platforms supporting electrical equipment. (Bond platform to equipment.)

14. Bond metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, instrument cabinets to raceways carrying circuits to these devices.

15. Exposed metallic equipment that may contact electrical equipment due to close proximity.

H. Ground both ends of conduit where possible.

I. Install ground electrode as follows:

1. Construct grounding system at each structure where panels or other electrical equipment are installed.

2. Install ground rods and grounding conductors in undisturbed, firm soil. a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and ground conductors.

3. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors prior to constructing concrete slabs and duct banks.
a. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends of sectional rods.

J. Bond and ground raceways as follows:

1. Install metallic conduit so it is electrically continuous.

2. Conduits shall contain grounding conductor with insulation identical to phase conductors, unless otherwise shown.

3. NEC-required grounding bushings shall be of insulating type.

4. Provide double locknuts at panels.

5. Bond conduit, at entrance and exit of equipment, to equipment ground bus or lug.

6. Provide bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts.

7. Make metallic raceway fittings and ground clamps tight to ensure equipment grounding system operates continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions.

8. Ground raceways and non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment in accordance with NEC Article 250.

K. Connect conductors to grounding rod as follows:

1. Exothermic T or H splices will be permitted at ground rods and where required. a. Splices shall be inspected by City’s Representative.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 6 of 8

2. Provide exothermic welds or compression type connectors between grounding cable installed for building ground grid and each ground electrode in ground grid system. a. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage structure grounding conductor is being welded to.

3. Install grounding cable near base of structures in undisturbed, firm earth and as far from structure as excavation permits and ≥18”.

4. Provide sufficient slack in grounding conductor to prevent conductor breakage during backfill or due to ground movement.

5. Extend pigtail conductors at structures or risers 6’ above finished grade.

6. Protect pigtail conductors from damage by coiling, tying, and bagging in 10-mil polyethylene.

7. Backfill excavation completely, tamping to provide contact between backfill materials and ground rods and conductors.

8. Extend grounding conductors through concrete foundations or building walls within 3’ below finish grade
a. Where ground conductors penetrate floor slabs or building walls provide non-metallic water-stop sleeves.

9. Extend grounding conductors within structures to accessible points for grounding equipment and electrical enclosures.

10. For isolated well sites, construct bare copper ground wire from MCC ground bus to well casing as shown.

11. Construct concrete-encased bare ground conductor in each duct bank. a. Run grounding electrode system conductors continuously in duct banks, through maintenance holes, handholes, raceway boxes and cable tray exteriors. b. Connect conductors to structure ground ring or grounding system to provide continuous grounding electrode system.
c. Bond to metal lid or cover.

12. Bond electrical enclosures, pedestals, and support racks, including metallic raceways, panels, switchboards and other similar metallic panels, cases, and devices associated with power, instrumentation, and control systems to grounding electrode system. a. Connect using ≥#6AWG bare copper conductor to ground b. Connect metal light or utility poles to ground rod using ≥#6AWG bare copper conductor.

13. Extend both ends of loop to ground bus within main service switchboard or motor control centers as appropriate.

14. Buried or concealed joints or terminations are not permitted.

15. Protect wires with rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 PVC conduit where exposed wires stub up through slab at switchboard or motor control centers.

L. Where grounding conductors are shown, bond wires to metallic enclosures at each end and to intermediate metallic enclosures.

1. Provide ground rod, when shown or when needed in each electrical maintenance hole and handhole with exposed metal parts.
a. Expose ≥4” of rod above floor for field connections to rod. b. Connect exposed metal parts including conduits and cable racks to ground rod.

2. Bond ground cables in underground circuits with main ground cables in each electrical maintenance hole and handhole.

3. Ground maintenance hole hardware and cover.

4. Connect grounding conductors to all grounding bushings on raceways.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 7 of 8

5. Run ground conductors inside conduits enclosing power conductors.

6. Buried or concealed joints or terminations are not permitted.

7. Protect wires with rigid steel conduit where wires stub up through slab at switchboard or motor control centers.

8. Protect exposed splices and connections for bare copper conductors and buses by wrapping with heat-shrink tape or covering.

M. Make connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals using clamp type lugs added under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and added through enclosures other than explosion proof, or by grounding locknuts or bushings.

1. Do not connect ground cables to anchor bolts, against gaskets, paint, or varnish, or to bolts holding removable access covers.

N. Ground shields of shielded power cable at each splice or termination in accordance with recommendations of splice or termination Manufacturer.

O. Ground shields of control cables in accordance with details shown.

P. Ground equipment as follows:

1. Connect ground buses of lighting panels, distribution panels, switchboards, motor control centers and switchgear to common ground bus with grounding conductor.

2. Use metallic conduit system for equipment and enclosure grounding. a. Grounding through conduit system shall be in excess of ground conductors shown in Plans.

3. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduits with separate equipment grounding conductors sized per NEC.

4. Where equipment contains ground bus, extend and connect grounding conductors to that bus.

5. Form equipment ground conductors to contour of equipment and firmly support.

6. Run ground conductors to equipment neatly along face of concrete surfaces or structural steel.
a. Support and secure ground conductors with cable fasteners at ≤5’ intervals.

7. Bond equipment grounding conductor to approved grounding bushing and terminal lug. a. Install grounding conductor outside conduit if required size is >#10.

8. Connect equipment enclosure containing ground bus to that bus.

9. Construct grounding bushings at both ends of rigid conduit runs. a. Bond grounding bushings to grounding system.

10. Run conductors to equipment neatly along face of concrete surfaces or structural steel.

11. Support and secure conductors with cable fasteners at ≤5’ intervals.

Q. Install ground test well as follows:

1. Provide handhole and ground rod as detailed on Plans to aid in performing ground testing and connecting additional ground rods if required by test results.

2. Connect ground wire from ground rod to main service switchboard or motor control center ground bus as shown on Plans.

R. Obtain City’s written approval of each below-grade connection before backfilling.

1. After installation and inspection, backfill trench with earth and other low resistivity materials.

2. Exclude stones, gravel, or crushed rock.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 8 of 8

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Grounding
and
Bonding
Installation Visual inspection and testing of finished
grounding installation per NETA ATS 7.13
Notify City’s Representative 24 hours before
below-grade connections are ready for
inspection.
1 inspection Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 1 of 30 SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of conduit, raceway, boxes and fittings to contain conductors for electrical power, communications, control circuits and feeders for Work outside public right-of-way.

B. Refer to the following sections for Work not covered herein.

1. Section 01 73 33 for identification procedures for above-ground raceways.

2. Section 03 30 00 for procedures for concrete encasement.

3. Section 31 23 00 for trenching procedures.

4. Section 33 05 26 for identification procedures for buried raceways.

5. Section 33 05 38 for requirements for hangers and supports.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 01 73 33: Mechanical Identification
I. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
J. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
K. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
L. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical M. Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables N. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems O. Section 26 08 00: Commissioning of Electrical Systems P. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill
Q. Section 33 05 26: Utility Identification
R. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install raceway and boxes as shown on Plans and as required by CEC to deliver power to equipment furnished.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.
29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 2 of 30 B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Raceway,
Conduit,
Fittings and
Boxes
NEMA
Compliance
NEMA Standards All products furnished Contractor Contractor UL Compliance Products shall be UL listed and
UL labeled
All products furnished Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

2. ANSI C33.84 Safety Standards for Outlet Boxes and Fittings

3. ANSI 61

4. ANSI C80.1/UL6 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

5. ASME/ANSI B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Including ratings for Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500)

6. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

7. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

8. ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings

9. ASTM A1008 Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

10. ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength ASTM B63 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

11. ASTM D1785 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

12. ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping

13. ASTM D2855 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

14. ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation

15. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

16. California Building Code (CBC)

17. California Electrical Code (CEC)

18. California Fire Code (CFC)

19. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

20. Federal Specification WW-C-581E Conduit, Metal, Rigid, and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple,

21. IEEE C2 National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

22. NEMA 5-19-1986

23. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

24. NEMA FB1 Conduit Fitting, Cables Fittings and Accessories

25. NEMA/ANSI OS1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Devices, Covers, and Box Supports

26. NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

27. NEMA TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

28. NEMA TC3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

29. NEMA TC6 and TC8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations

30. NEMA VE1 Ventilated Cable Tray

31. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

32. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers SCTE 77 Underground Enclosure Integrity

33. UL1 Flexible Metal Conduit

34. UL 6/ANSI C80.1 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel (ERSC)

35. UL 6A Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel

36. UL 35-L4

37. UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

38. UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

39. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

40. UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

41. UL 514B Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings

42. UL 514C Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

43. UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 3 of 30

44. UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit

45. UL 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

46. UL 884 Underfloor Raceways and Fittings

47. UL 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for use in Hazardous (Classified Locations)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS AND PART SCHEDULES
Shop Drawings Submit conduit layout and installation drawings Show individual conduit numbers, proposed routing, conduit sizes, circuit numbers contained in each conduit, and size of wires in each conduit.

Show dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used.

Verify conduit sizes meet NEC requirements.

City’s review of layout drawings will be solely for aesthetics and Operator access.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit the following for items of standard manufacture:

Product Data for each type of conduit, fittings and boxes.

List of conduits, fittings, boxes, conduit boxes, mounting hardware, and accessories.

Product data is not required for conduit fittings or support systems QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS Refer to Section 26 05 10

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, and Product Data.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of raceway and boxes.

C. Ship conduit with thread protectors.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for conduit and raceways include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

CONDUIT FITTINGS
Conduit Bodies Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Crouse Hinds / Eaton Form 8 Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 Killark / Hubbell Saint Louis, MO (314) 531-0460
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® (Occidental Coating
Company)
Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Accepted equal
Conduit Fittings (Metal) Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Hubbell-Raco South Bend, IN (800) 992-7030
Killark / Hubbell Saint Louis, MO (314) 531-0460
Osburn Associates, Inc. Saint Petersburg, FL (888) 672-8767 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 4 of 30

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Robroy Industries Gilmer, TX (903) 843-6562
Steel City / ABB Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® (Occidental Coating
Company)
Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Accepted equal
Conduit Fittings (PVC) Atkore International (Allied Tube and Conduit) Harvey, IL (800) 882-5543 Carlon / Lamson & Session Co “PV-Duit” Cleveland, OH (800) 346-2646 Cantex Inc. Fort Worth, TX (817) 215-7000
SAF-T-CO Supply Santa Ana, CA (714) 547-9975
Accepted equal
Conduit Hubs Atkore International (Allied Tube and Conduit) Harvey, IL (800) 882-5543 Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Myers™ Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 Hubbell-Raco South Bend, IN (800) 992-7030
Killark / Hubbell Saint Louis, MO (314) 531-0460
Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® Bullet Type Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809 Accepted equal
Conduit Unions Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® Erickson Type Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809 Accepted equal
Conduit ExpansionDeflection Couplings
Appleton / Emerson Type DF Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Type XD Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type AXDX Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Flexible Couplings Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Killark / Hubbell Saint Louis, MO (314) 531-0460
Accepted equal

CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
Conduit Automatic
Drains
Crouse Hinds / Eaton ECD Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Accepted equal
Conduit Clamps O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Conduit Seals for
Sealing Around Pipe or
Conduit
Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton “EYS” and “EYD” Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 O-Z Gedney / Emerson CSMI Type Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Conduit Seal Bushings
for Sealing Around
Cables in Conduit
Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
O-Z Gedney / Emerson CSB Type factoryprepared for each cable applicaiton Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Accepted equal
Locknuts O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Bushings Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. Stratford, CT (203) 377-5944 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type B Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Grounding Bushings Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. Stratford, CT (203) 377-5944 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type BLG Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Phenolic Bushings for
Protecting Cables
Penetrating Metal
Partitions or Barriers
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type ABB Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal

NEC TYPE RMC RIGID METAL CONDUIT (PVC-COATED)
29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 5 of 30

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
PVC-Coated NEC Type
RMC Electrical Rigid
Steel Conduit (PVCERSC) ½”-6”
Robroy Industries “KorKap” Gilmer, TX (903) 843-6562
Robroy Industries “Perma-Cote” Gilmer, TX (903) 843-4388 Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® (Occidental Coating
Company)
Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Accepted equal
PVC-Coated Electrical
Rigid Steel Conduit
(PVC-ERSC) and
Fitting Coating Repair
Material
Robroy Industries “Plastibond” Gilmer, TX (903) 843-6562 Accepted equal
Electrical Rigid Steel
Conduit (ERSC)
Expansion Fittings for
Exposed Locations
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type “AX” with jumper Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Electrical Rigid Steel
Conduit (ERSC)
Expansion Fittings at
Structural Expansion
Joints
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company
Type “D”
Spring City, PA (610) 948-4000
Accepted equal

NEC TYPE PVC RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
NEC Type PVC
Rigid Nonmetallic
Conduit (RNC) (PVC)
and Fittings
Atkore International (Allied Tube and Conduit) Harvey, IL (800) 882-5543 Carlon / Lamson & Session Co “PV-Duit” Cleveland, OH (800) 346-2646 CertainTeed Corporation / Saint-Gobain Corona, CA (951) 272-1300 Cantex Inc Fort Worth, TX (817) 215-7000
Condux International Rancho Cucamonga, CA (909) 989-4377 Heritage Plastics Carrolton, OH (330) 627-8002
Highland Plastics, Inc. Shepherd, MI (800) 866-8208
JM Eagle Inc Los Angeles, CA (310) 693-8200
Kraloy® Products Co., Inc. London, ON (800) 265-1815
Osburn Associates, Inc Saint Petersburg, FL (888) 672-8767 PW Eagle Eugene, OR (800) 347-0200
Triangle Conduit & Cable New Brunswick, NJ (412) 920-7190 Accepted equal

NEC TYPE LFMC AND TYPE LFNC LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT NEC Type LFMC
Liquid-Tight Flexible
Metal Conduit
AFC (American Flexible Conduit) Cable
Systems® / Atkore International (Allied Tube and
Conduit)
Harvey, IL (800) 882-5543
Anamet Electrical Sealtite® / Anaconda Mattoon, IL (800) 230-3718 Electri-Flex Company Liquatite® Type LA Roselle, IL (800) 323-6174 Flexible Metal Inc (FMI) / Hyspan Tucker, GA (770) 493-1100 General Electric Company Fairfield, CT (203) 373-2211
International Metal Hose Company Bellevue, OH (419) 483-7690 LTV Steel Company Cleveland, OH (216) 622-5000
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Southwire Company “Titan®” Carrollton, GA (770) 832-4000 Thomas & Betts / ABB Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Triangle Industries PWC Line New Brunswick, NJ (412) 920-7190 Universal Hose & Braid. South Holland, IL (888) 277-9927 Accepted equal
Liquid-Tight Flexible
Metal Conduit Fittings
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Thomas & Betts / ABB sealing rings
(5262 = ½” 5263 = ¾” 5264 =1” or “Jake”
Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Thomas & Betts / ABB Ocal® (Occidental Coating
Company) Liquidtight
Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Accepted equal
Liquid-Tight Flexible
Metallic Conduit
Appleton / Emerson “Series ST” or Jake Type
“BC”
Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 6 of 30

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Connectors Pyle-National / Hillcrest Enterprises Series “CT” Ashland, VA (800) 848-3106 Accepted equal
NEC Type LFNC
Liquid-Tight Flexible
Non-Metallic Conduit
Ultratite® / Southwire Company Carrollton, GA (770) 832-4000 Accepted equal

CONDUIT AND RACEWAY ACCESSORIES
Plastic Wire Duct and
Spiral Binding
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Accepted equal
Wireway Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730 Accepted equal
Conduit Hangers and
Supports
Refer to Section 33 05 38.

Duct Spacers and
Supports
Atkore International (Allied Tube and Conduit) Harvey, IL (800) 882-5543 Carlon / Lamson & Session Co Cleveland, OH (800) 346-2646 George Fischer Sloane, Inc. Little Rock, AR (501) 490-7777 Queen City Plastics Fort Mill, SC (803) 548-0685
Accepted equal
Conduit Through-Wall
Seals
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Type “WDK” Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Cable-Lubricating
Compounds
CRC Industries Powerlube with Teflon Horsham, PA (800) 556-5074 Accepted equal
B. Acceptable Manufacturers for boxes include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
Cast Steel (CS) Outlet
and Device Boxes
Appleton / Emerson Type FD or FS Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Bell Outdoor / Hubbell South Bend, IN (574) 234-7151
Crouse Hinds / Eaton / B-Line Condulet® Type FD or
FS
Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Eaton / B-Line Circle AW Highland, IL (800) 851-7415
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Hubbell Wiegmann Santa Fe Springs, CA (714) 620-6300
Killark / Hubbell Saint Louis, MO (314) 531-0460
Thomas & Betts / ABB Memphis, TN (800) 816-7809
Accepted equal
Nonmetallic (NM) Outlet
and Device Boxes
Carlon / Lamson & Session Co Cleveland, OH (800) 346-2646 George Fischer Sloane, Inc. Little Rock, AR (501) 490-7777 Accepted equal
Galvanized Pressed
Sheet Steel Switch and
Outlet Boxes
Adalet / Scott Fetzer Westlake, OH (440) 892-3000
Hubbell-Raco South Bend, IN (800) 992-7030
O-Z Gedney / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Accepted equal
Galvanized Sheet Steel
Outlet Boxes
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Accepted equal

JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Cast Steel Embedded
Pull Boxes Above
Grade
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Series W Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Series Y Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Cast Steel Embedded
Pull Boxes Below
Grade
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Type WJBF Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 O-Z Gedney / Emerson Series YR Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Accepted equal
Nonmetallic Pull Boxes Crouse Hinds / Eaton Type NJB Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 Accepted equal
Fasteners Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730 Accepted equal
Fiberglass and Armorcast Products Company Ontario, CA (909) 390-1365 29 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 7 of 29

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Composite PolymerConcrete Hand-Holes
Carson Industries H Series Glendora, CA (909) 592-6272
J &.R Concrete Products Perris, CA (951) 943-5855
Accepted Equal
Precast Concrete HandHoles
Brooks Products 3½T Ontario, CA (909) 947-7470
Eisel Enterprises, Inc. Placentia, CA (714) 993-1706
Ford Meter Box Co. Wabash, IN (260) 563-3171
Jensen Precast Sparks, NV (775) 352-2700
J &.R Concrete Products Perris, CA (951) 943-5855
Oldcastle Precast (formerly Utility Vault Company) Fontana, CA (800) 626-3860 Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Do not use aluminum conduits, fittings, elbows, supports or boxes.

C. Mark raceway products to show:

1. Nominal trade size.

2. Name or trademark of Manufacturer.

D. Materials for NEC Type RMC PVC-coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) and fittings shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

PVC-COATED ELECTRICAL RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PVC-ERSC)
PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid
Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
and Fittings
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Conform to UL6/ANSI C80.1
Conform to NEMA RN1
Conform to CEC Article 344
Finish Zinc with Epoxy
Primer and PVC
Coating
Conduit shall be bendable without coating damage.

See below for PVC final coating and urethane final lining Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized after threading Treat zinc surface to enhance metal-plastic bond
Epoxy-Acrylic Primer Provide 0.5-mil thick coating over steel surface to ensure bond between steel exterior and PVC coating
Apply exterior coat by dipping in liquid plastisol or equal method producing finished product conforming to NEMA 5-19 Exterior Coating PVC 40-mil thick for full conduit length except threads.

Bond between PVC and conduit surface shall exceed tensile strength of plastic.

Provide 2-mil clear urethane coating to threads.

Interior Lining Urethane ≥2-mil thick on conduit and fittings Sufficiently flexible to permit conduit bending without coating cracking or flaking.

PVC Sleeve on
Female Opening
40-mil PVC coat extending 1 conduit diameter or 2” beyond opening, whichever is less.

Sleeve interior diameter shall be same as conduit OD before coating.

CONDUIT FITTINGS
Conduit Bodies (Ells and Tees) Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide types, shapes, and sizes to suit individual
applications.

Oblong
Provide threaded hubs.

Standard and Mogul type
When fittings are used with #2AWG or larger multi-conductor cables, fittings shall be Mogul type
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Conduit Body Covers (Ells and Same Material as Form 8 secured with ≥2 captive stainless steel screws DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 8 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Tees) Conduit Bodies With tongue-in-groove (V-seal) gasket to seal out corrosive elements.

Conduit Bodies (Round) Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide types, shapes, and sizes to suit individual
applications.

Oblong
Provide threaded hubs.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Conduit Body Covers (Round) Same Material as
Conduit Bodies
Form 8 secured with ≥2 captive stainless steel screws
With tongue-in-groove (V-seal) gasket to seal out corrosive elements.

Conduit Fittings and Elbows –
Indoor Dry Non-Corrosive
Locations
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Conform to UL 514B and NEMA FB1
Standard threaded
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Conduit Fittings and Elbows –
Outdoor, or Wet or Corrosive
Locations shown on Plans
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide wedge nut covers (Form 8) weathertight
Galvanizing 2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Conduit Fittings and Elbows –
Outdoor, or Wet or Corrosive
Locations shown on Plans
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide wedge nut covers (Form 8) weathertight
Listed for use in Class I Groups C and D locations
Conform to UL886
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Fittings, FS and FD Boxes,
Condulets and Accessories
Conform to UL 514A
≥40-mil PVC coat similar to conduits.
≥2-mil urethane liner similar to conduit
Otherwise same as specified for Electrical Rigid Steel
Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Screws on Form 8 fittings shall be stainless steel with encapsulated plastic heads
Encapsulate screw heads on condulets with corrosionresistant material recommended by Manufacturer.

Service Entrance Heads Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide insulated knockout cover for use with variety of sizes and number of conductors
Sealing Fittings Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Provide threaded hubs with PVC oversize sleeve
Standard and mogul size
With or without drain and breather
Fiber and Sealing
Compound
UL listed for use with sealing fitting.

Expansion Couplings Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel with
Insulating Bushing
Allow ≥2” expansion or contraction
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Gasketing Gasketed for wet locations
Grounding Internally or externally grounded
Expansion-Deflection
Couplings
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Allow ≥¾” expansion and ≥30° deflection from relaxed
position.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Outer Jacket Neoprene
Jacket Clamps Stainless Steel
Gasketing Watertight, raintight and concrete-tight
Grounding Internally or externally grounded
End Caps Protect threads using color-coded end caps to provide quick trade size identification.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 9 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Long Radius Elbows ¾”-1¼” ≥12” radius
1½”-2½” ≥15” radius
Conduit Hubs Plated Steel or
Malleable Iron
Threaded type
Insulated and gasketed for raintight connection
Shall have PVC sleeves equal to those on couplings.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Box Connectors for Damp and
Wet Locations
Provide watertight threaded hub on enclosure consisting of sealing fitting with tapered conduit thread, neoprene O-ring, and 105°C rated insulating throat with grounding and bonding lug.

Sealing locknuts are allowed but are not a substitute for threaded watertight hubs or sealing fittings.

Conduit Unions Threaded Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Do not use running threads.

Required for connections
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Couplings Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
IPS-threaded, Hot-dipped after fabrication.

Provide ribbed loose coupling with each conduit length
Bond PVC coating to coupling outer surface.

PVC sleeve equal to OD of uncoated conduit shall extend 1 pipe diameter or 2” (whichever is smaller) beyond both ends of coupling.

Sleeve’s wall thickness shall be same as plastic coating on pipe.

PVC coating on coupling shall be ribbed to enhance
installation.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153

ACCESSORIES
Fasteners Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
PVC-Coated Steel
Screws, Bolts, Nuts, Washers,
and Hardware
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Locknuts Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Threaded, gasketed, insulated
Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into metal
enclosure wall
Grounding or non-grounding type
Bushings Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Galvanized Malleable
Iron
Threaded type with 105°C-rated plastic insulated throat and grounding and bonding lug
Plastic bushings with 105°C temperature rating may be used for conduits 1” and smaller where hubs are not required and circuit conductors are supplying less than 480V
Grounding or non-grounding type
Grounding Bushings Plated Steel or
Malleable Iron with
Insulating Molded
Phenolic or Nylon
Dielectric Collar Insert
Threaded type
Provide 105°C-rated plastic insulated throat and grounding and bonding lug
Do not use all-metal or all-plastic bushings.

Plastic bushings with 105°C temperature rating may be used for conduits ≤1” where hubs are not required and circuit conductors are supplying <480V
Grounding type
Conform to UL467
U-bolts and RA Clamps Stainless Steel Size to fit conduit Encapsulate nuts in plastic.

ConduitMounting Strut Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 10 of 29 E. Materials for NEC Type PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC) and fittings shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

PVC RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)
NEC Type PVC
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
(PVC)
PVC Conform to ASTM D1785, NEMA TC2 Type EC40 and UL651 Conform to CEC Article 352
Schedule 40
Type EB for concrete encased conduit ≥2”
UL labeled for above-ground and underground use
Rated for direct sunlight exposure
Fire retardant and low smoke emission
90°C rise rating – marked “maximum 90 Deg C”
Type 1 (normal impact) Grade 1 (high chemical resistance) Add inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat
distribution
Buried Rigid Nonmetallic
Conduit (PVC)
PVC Conform to ASTM F512, NEMA TC6 and TC8 and UL651A
UL labeled for above-ground and underground use
Schedule 40
90°C rise rating

CONDUIT FITTINGS
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
(PVC), Connectors, and
Fittings
PVC Conform to UL 514C and NEMA TC3
Schedule 40
Same thickness and construction as adjacent conduit
Homogeneous plastic free from cracks, nicks, holes, blisters, foreign inclusions or imperfections which could damage
conductors
As recommended by conduit Manufacturer.

Elbows (90°) PVC Schedule 80
Same dimension as specified for Electrical Rigid Steel
Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Couplings, Adapters,
Expansion Couplings, Elbows
and 30° turns
PVC Factory-made
Conform to NEMA TC2 and TC3
Couplings PVC Socket-type for use with solvent weld cement Provide bell-end fitting upon termination in maintenance holes, hand holes, or pull boxes.

ACCESSORIES
Joint Cement As recommended and furnished by conduit Manufacturer for climate
Furnished with instructions to achieve watertight joints.

Conform to ASTM D2564.

Fasteners PVC-Coated Steel or
Nonmetallic
ConduitMounting Strut Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
F. Materials for NEC Type LFMC liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (LFMC)
NEC Type LFMC Liquid-Tight
Flexible Metal Conduit and
Fittings (FLEX)
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Conform to UL1
Conform to CEC Article 350
Size ≥¾”.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication NEC Type LFMC Liquid-Tight
Flexible Metal Conduit and
Fittings (FLEX-LT)
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Conform to UL360
Conform to CEC Article 350
Core of continuous, spiral wound, steel strip with interlocking convolutions.

Liquid- and vapor-tight
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication Jacketing Extruded PVC positively locked to steel core
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 11 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NEC Type LFMC Liquid-Tight
Flexible Metal Conduit and
Fittings (HAZ-FLEX)
Bronze (Use in dry,
damp, or wet areas)
Conform to CEC Article 350
Liquid-tight and arc-resistant
Electrically conductive so no bonding jumper is required Provide bronze braided covering over flexible brass core, bronze end fittings, and hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron unions and nipples
Stainless Steel (Use in
corrosive areas)
Conform to CEC Article 350
Liquid-tight and arc-resistant
Electrically conductive so no bonding jumper is required Provide stainless steel braided covering over flexible
stainless steel core, stainless steel end fittings, and aluminum unions and nipples.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication

CONDUIT FITTINGS
Fittings NEC Type LFMC
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal
Conduit and Fittings (FLEX)
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Zinc-Plated Malleable
Iron Insulated Type
Conform to UL 514B and NEMA FB1
Conform to ANSI C33.84
UL listed for use with conduit
Provide Steel or plastic compression rings and glands for tightening.

Provide 105°C rated insulated throats.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Grounding Provide threaded grounding cones or grounding and bonding lugs.

For sizes ≤1¼”, UL listed for grounding
For fittings ≥1½” trade size, provide external grounding lugs.

Fittings NEC Type LFMC
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal
Conduit and Fittings (FLEX-LT)
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel or
Zinc-Plated Malleable
Iron Insulated Type
UL 514B and NEMA FB1
Conform to ANSI C33.84
UL listed for use with conduit
Straight or angle type
Liquid-tight
Provide steel construction, insulated and gasketed with locknut, grounding ferrule, and gland compression nut
Provide 105°C rated insulated throats.

Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Grounding Conform to UL 467
Provide threaded grounding cones or grounding and bonding lugs.

For sizes ≤1¼”, UL listed for grounding
For fittings ≥1½” trade size, provide external grounding lugs.

Conduit Fittings and Elbows –
Outdoor, or Wet or Corrosive
Locations shown on Plans
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Provide captive-screw covers (Form 8) weathertight
Do not use setscrew connectors
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153

ACCESSORIES
Bushings Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Compression type
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Integral Copper Bonding
Conductor
Copper Required on conduit 1¼” and smaller
Wind spirally in space between each convolution on conduit interior
Conform to UL360
Jacket Gray PVC Vinyl Extend around and into helical grooves of core.

ConduitMounting Strut Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 12 of 29 G. Materials for conduit identification tags shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ACCESSORIES
Conduit Identification Tags Stainless Steel 19-gauge
With ½” stamped letters and numbers as shown on Plans
H. Materials for duct spacers and supports shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Duct Spacers and Supports High-Density
Polyethylene (HDPE)
or High-Impact
Polystyrene
Interlocking
Provide ≥3” spacing between parallel conduits
Provide 1” clearance between perpendicular conduits or
conduits and pipes.

Spacers for Wall-Mount Boxes
and Cabinets
Hot-Dipped
Galvanized Steel
If spacers are cut from galvanized stock, coat cut surfaces with 2 coats cold galvanizing compound
Galvanizing ≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Accessories Provide hold down bars
Provide duct-bank strapping
I. Materials for wireways shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Bodies and Covers Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
≥14-gauge without knockouts
≥10-gauge SS flanges
Conform to CEC Article 376
Gasketed cover held in place with captive clamp type latches Cast Rustproof Metal
where required by
NEC or Plans
Gasketed with bolted flanges
Provide hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.

J. Materials for outlet, junction and pull-boxes shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
Cast Outlet Boxes Cast Steel (CS) Outlet
and Device Boxes
May be used in exterior or interior wet or dry locations with the following raceway systems

1. PVC-coated electric rigid steel conduit (PVC-ERSC)

2. Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit

3. PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit (RNC)

4. Concealed raceway systems

5. Concrete-encased raceways
Use where required by NEC or Plans
Conform to UL 50, UL 514A, and NEMA/ANSI OS1
Hot-dipped galvanized cast steel box
Provide cast mounting lugs where required
Zinc-plated cast steel cover, watertight and gasketed
Fabricate bodies without holes or knockouts
Provide threaded cast hubs for connections
Provide removable gasketed screw-cover in accessible
location.

Use stainless steel fasteners.

Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes Sheet Steel (SS)
Outlet and Device
Boxes
May be used in interior dry locations with the following raceway systems

1. PVC-coated electric rigid steel conduit (PVC-ERSC)

2. Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit

3. PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit (RNC)

4. Exposed or concealed raceways >4’ above floor

5. Ceiling portion of lighting circuits
Use in NEMA 1 areas where required by NEC or Plans
Conform to UL 50 and UL 514A
Hot-dipped galvanized of 1-piece drawn carbon steel sheet ≥14-gauge thick body
≥12-gauge thick cover
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 13 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Continuously welded seams
Shop fabricate when nonstandard size boxes are shown
Provide removable gasketed screw-cover in accessible
location.

Use stainless steel fasteners.

Stainless Steel (SS)
Outlet and Device
Boxes
May be used in exterior or interior wet or dry locations with the following raceway systems

1. PVC-coated electric rigid steel conduit (PVC-ERSC)

2. Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit

3. PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit (RNC)

4. Exposed or concealed raceways >4’ above floor

5. Ceiling portion of lighting circuits
Use for NEMA 4X enclosures
Use where required by NEC or Plans
1-piece drawn stainless steel sheet
≥14-gauge thick body
≥12-gauge thick cover
Continuously welded seams
Conform to UL 50 and UL 514A
Shop fabricate when nonstandard size boxes are shown
Provide removable gasketed screw-cover in accessible
location.

Use stainless steel fasteners.

Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes Nonmetallic (NM)
Outlet and Device
Boxes
May be used in exposed, concealed, or concrete-encased
exterior or interior locations with the following raceway systems

1. PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC)
Use where required by NEC or Plans
Conform to UL 50 and UL 514A
PVC box
Provide mounting lugs where required
PVC cover, watertight and gasketed
Fabricate without holes or knockouts
Provide threaded hubs for connections
Use stainless steel fasteners.

Outlet and Device Box
Dimensions
Factory-made standard sizes ≥1½” deep
Use ≥4”x4”x1½” boxes for switches and receptacles.

Use ≥4” octagonal boxes for ceiling outlets.

For hollow masonry construction, provide boxes of depth to allow hubs to be in masonry void space.

Where field conditions or fixture requirements mandate use of smaller box dimensions than specified, obtain acceptance from City’s Representative before ordering boxes.

Outlet Box Extensions Prohibited Do not use box extensions to provide NEC-required wiring space.

Concealed and Flush-Mounted
Boxes (Use with concealed
conduits)
Galvanized Steel Gang sizes as required by code
Do not use sectional boxes for multi-gang applications.

Use square cornered tile-type rings for exposed masonry wall construction
Use square corner tile-type covers with ribs or extensions for casting in concrete
Use stainless steel fasteners.

Type Type FS or FD
Grounding Screw Required
Coating ≥40-mil PVC exterior coating
≥2-mil urethane interior coating
Exposed and Surface-Mounted
Outlet Boxes (Use with
exposed conduits)
Cast Iron with
Threaded Hubs
Provide boxes with mounting flanges
Conduit bodies may be used instead of boxes except where boxes contain devices.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 14 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Outlet boxes connecting to PVC-coated rigid conduit shall be of same material and coating as conduit, with metal threaded hubs.

Provide gasketed covers secured with ≥2 stainless steel capture screws.

Type Type FS or FD
Grounding Screw Required
Coating ≥40-mil PVC exterior coating
≥2-mil urethane interior coating
PVC-Coated Steel ≥40-mil PVC exterior coating
≥2-mil urethane interior coating
Outlet Boxes Encased in
Concrete
Cast or Sheet Metal as
required by NEC or
Plans
Moisture-proof and concrete-tight boxes designed for
concrete encasement

JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Outlet and Device Boxes See above Use outlet boxes as junction boxes and pull boxes where possible and allowed by applicable codes
Cast Steel Boxes Cast Steel May be used for above-grade or below-grade conduit Hot-dipped galvanized cast steel box
Neoprene gasketed watertight
Hinged cast steel full access screw-mounted covers.

Drilled and tapped conduit entrances.

Use stainless steel fasteners and hinges
Size ≥8”x8”x6”
Sheet Steel Boxes Galvanized Steel Code gauge with gasketed full-access screw covers Use stainless steel fasteners
Stainless Steel Boxes Stainless Steel May be used for above-grade or below-grade conduit Use for NEMA 4X enclosures
Code gauge with gasketed full-access screw covers
Use stainless steel fasteners
Nonmetallic Boxes Fiberglass-Reinforced
Polyester
May be used for above-grade or below-grade conduit
Corrosion resistant FRP with stability to high heat
Gasketed watertight
Hinged full-access screw-mounted FRP cover
Provide mounting lugs where required
Provide threaded hubs for connections
Use stainless steel fasteners and hinges
Size ≥7”x10”x6½”
Concrete Boxes Reinforced Cast
Concrete
May be used for below-grade conduit
Interior Size ≥10”x17”
Cast Iron Cover
Mark” ELECTRICAL”

NEMA-RATED JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
NEMA 4X Watertight Metallic
Corrosion-Resistant Boxes
(Use for pull and junction boxes
in outdoor, wet, damp, or
corrosive areas)
Stainless Steel ≥14 gauge wall thickness
SAE Type 316
Seams Continuously welded and ground smooth
Mounting Flanges External
Knockouts Prohibited
Cover Hinged cover secured with stainless steel screws and clamps Gaskets Provide oil-resistant gaskets
NEMA 4X Watertight
Nonhmetallic CorrosionResistant Boxes (Use for pull
and junction boxes in outdoor,
wet, damp, or corrosive areas)
Fiberglass Ultraviolet light-protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester Mounting Flanges External
Knockouts Prohibited
Cover Hinged door with quick-release latches and padlocking hasp Gaskets Provide oil-resistant gaskets on door
NEMA 12 Industrial Use Boxes
(Use for indoor pull and
junction boxes in dry areas)
Hot-Dip Galvanized
Code Gauge Steel
≥14 gauge wall thickness
Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication
Seams Continuously welded and ground smooth
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 15 of 29

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Mounting Flanges External
Knockouts Prohibited
Cover Flat
Continuous hinged cover with 3-point latch or SS bolts and clamps
Gaskets Provide oil-resistant gaskets on door
Finish 1 coat rust-inhibiting primer + 1 coat primer seal inside and out
Factory paint with ANSI 61 gray exterior finish and white interior finish
Accessories Handles Provide rigid handles for covers ≥9 sf or ≥25 lbm.

Provide split covers when >25 lbm.

Weldnuts Provide weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.

Terminal Blocks Provide screw-post barrier-type terminal blocks rated ≥600VAC and ≥20A
K. Materials for conduit sealant shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Moisture Barrier Types Water-Tight Material Nontoxic, nonshrink, nonhardening, putty-type, hand-applied material providing effective barrier under submerged
conditions
Fire-Retardant Types Fire-Stop Material Reusable, nontoxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty-type material with 3-hour rating in accordance with UL35L4.

L. Materials for tape coating system shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Tape Coating System Water-Tight PVC Tape Conform to AWWA / ANSI C209 and C214 Provide protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage.

Suitable for direct burial.

Primer Hot Dip Galvanized
≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Inner Layer Tape
(Corrosion Protection)
≥30 mils thickness
Outer Layer Tape
(Mechanical
Protection)
≥30 mils thickness
Complete System ≥60 mils thickness
M. Materials for pull cord shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cord, Pull Tape, or Rope Polypropylene or
Nylon
¼” diameter 1800-lbf-rated
Polyester Tape Flat, woven, lubricated, soft-fiber polyester 1800-lbf-rated
With painted sequential measurement markings each 3’
N. Materials for concrete hand-holes shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Hand-Holes Steel-Reinforced
Concrete
Weatherproof concrete with pull-in irons
Fiberglass-Reinforced
Polymer-Concrete
Cable Racks Galvanized Steel with
Porcelain Blocks
≥2.0 oz/sf conforming to ASTM A123 or A153
Cover and Frame Ductile Iron Traffic-rated 20-lb Lid and Lid Ring ELECT shall be cast into lid in 1” letters
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 16 of 29

6. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pre-Cast Concrete Hand-Hole
Sections
Base Solid bottom with 12”x12” or 12” diameter opening to French drain beneath hand-hole.

Sections Mating edges shall be tongue-and-groove-type
Top Slab Gasketed removable top slab with lifting eyes and cast-in iron frame and cover.

Provide cover extension rings as required.

Design Surcharge and
Lateral Earth Pressure
AASHTO H25 Loading
28-day Compressive
Strength f’c
≥4500 psi
Steel Reinforcing Yield
Strength fy
60 ksi
Size As shown on Plans or as required for number and size of entering conduits.

Openings Knockouts Full round openings with thin walls
Diameter = pipe penetration OD + 4”

7. Install the following types of conduits and fittings in locations listed, unless otherwise shown on Plans.

1. Definitions and requirements of NEC apply unless modified below.

2. Installation of buried or concealed conduit Work shall be witnessed and accepted by City’s Representative or inspector.

EXPOSURE ALLOWABLE SIZE
RANGE

ALLOWABLE MATERIALS
Indoor Exposed Dry, Wet and
Damp Noncorrosive Locations
¾” – 4” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) In wet locations provide watertight joints.

Indoor, Concealed, Dry or Damp
Locations
¾” – 4” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Outdoor Exposed Dry Locations ¾” – 4” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Underground Vault Interiors ≥¾” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Corrosive Locations Indoor and
Outdoor
≥¾” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Embedded in Concrete Slabs
and Masonry Walls
≥1” PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Underground, Including Below
Concrete Slabs
≥1” Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 PVC) or PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
≥24” cover
Provide red-colored concrete encasement
Watertight
Stub-ups into
Equipment Pads or
Floor
Provide PVC Schedule 80 elbows and stub-ups
Extend exposed stub-ups ≥6” above grade or finish floor Stub-ups into
Exposed Areas
PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Conduit
Connect underground Non-Metallic Conduit to PVC-Coated
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) with 90° PVCCoated Rigid Steel elbows before emergence.

Extend ≥6” above grade or finish floor.

Apply corrosion-resistant coating consisting of heavy coat of coal-tar paint or 3 wraps of 10-mil pipe wrap tape extending 1” on each side of turn-out point.

Stub-ups to be
Embedded in Walls
PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Conduit.

Connect underground Non-Metallic Conduit to PVC-Coated
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) Conduit with 90° DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 17 of 29 PVC-Coated Rigid Steel long-radius elbows before
emergence.

Extend ≥12” above and below grade or finish floor.

Apply corrosion-resistant coating consisting of heavy coat of coal-tar paint or 3 wraps of 10-mil pipe wrap tape extending 1” on each side of turn-out point.

Long sweeping
bends >15° and ≥2”
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Final Connections to Lighting
Fixtures and Appliances
≥½” Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
≤3’ long unless otherwise authorized by City
Final Connections to Motors,
Solenoids, Transformers,
Vibrating Equipment,
Appliances, or Instruments
½”-2½” Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
≤3’ long unless otherwise authorized by City
≥3” Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
≤5’ long unless otherwise authorized by City
Direct-Buried Conduit for
Telemetry Cable
≥2”
Underground Duct Banks ≥2” Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 PVC) or PVC-Coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC)
Watertight
Provide red-colored concrete encasement.

8. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505
Classification
Conform to NFPA 820
Nonhazardous
Enclosures – Outdoor or Wet
Locations
NEMA 250
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant, Stainless steel All Enclosures Construction Lockable
With powdercoat epoxy finish on steel surfaces
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install raceway and boxes before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

1. Locations shown are approximate.

2. Study Plans in relation to spaces and equipment around outlets and devices.

3. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or mechanical or structural conflicts.

B. Determine conduit routing conforming to installation requirements set forth in Contract Documents and Raceway and Cable Schedules.

1. Not all conduit routing is shown on Contract Documents.

2. Route conduit to City’s satisfaction, including those shown on:
a. Control block diagrams
b. Home runs shown on Plans
c. Manufacturer’s equipment installation instructions.

3. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits whether or not shown on Plans for circuits and circuit numbers shown.

4. Conduit routings and stub-up locations shown are approximate. a. Coordinate stub-up locations with conduit entries of furnished equipment. b. Modify stub-up locations as required to accommodate equipment furnished and field conditions.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 18 of 29

5. Where circuits are indicated as "home-runs," provide necessary fittings and boxes for complete raceway installation.

6. Use conduit and conductor sizes shown for entire branch circuit.

7. Supports, pull-boxes, junction boxes, and other ancillary equipment are not usually shown.
a. Provide pull-boxes and junction boxes where shown.
b. Provide pull-boxes and junction boxes as required by NEC.

8. Provide additional pull boxes and junction boxes required to permit pulling wires without damage to conductors or insulation.
a. Bends shall total ≤270° total deflection between pull points. b. Conduit runs shall total ≤100’ between pull points.
c. Provide boxes where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit runs

9. Coordinate motor terminal box locations with motor branch circuit conduit and wiring.

C. Verify with City’s Representative exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation.

D. Set and mount outlet and device box locations as follows:

DEVICE TYPE HEIGHT TO CENTERLINE
Wall Switches All 48” above floor
Thermostats All 48” above floor
Receptacles Near Floor 12” above floor

1. Where above heights are inappropriate for construction or finish, locate boxes as directed by City’s Representative.

2. Locate light switches on lock side of doors.

3. Locate light fixture and utility outlets in symmetrical pattern according to room or vault layout.

E. Support surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, and conduit with spacers to provide clearance between walls, equipment, and parallel or perpendicular pipe or conduit crossings.

F. Provide and place sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, and partitions.

1. Locate necessary slots for electrical Work and form before concrete is poured.

G. Seal openings, sleeves, penetration, and slots.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00, 01 73 24, and 01 73 33 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Refer to Section 33 05 26 for identification procedures for buried raceways.

C. Refer to Section 33 05 38 for installation procedures for hangers and supports.

D. Furnish and install raceway and boxes at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

E. Conform to the following installation standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. California Electrical Code Article 312 “Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures”

4. California Electrical Code Article 314 “Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole Enclosures”

5. California Electrical Code Article 344 “Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC” DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 19 of 29

6. California Electrical Code Article 350 “Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC”

7. California Electrical Code Article 352 “Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC”

8. California Electrical Code Article 366 “Auxiliary Gutters”

9. California Electrical Code Article 376 “Metal Wireways”

10. California Electrical Code Article 378 “Nonmetallic Wireways”

11. California Electrical Code Article 386 “Surface Metal Raceways”

12. Other applicable building, fire, and electrical code requirements

13. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements F. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

G. Size raceways as follows:

1. Raceway sizes are shown on Plans.

2. If not shown on Drawings, size in accordance with NFPA 70.

3. For runs not sized on drawings, compute maximum conduit fill using NEC (NFPA 70) requirements for Type THW conductors (larger if applicable), although actual wiring may be with conductor types having smaller cross sections.

4. For multi-conductor cables, size conduit to ≤40% fill considering overall outside diameter of multi-conductor cable.

5. Unless shown otherwise, conduit size shall be ≥¾” for exposed conduit and ≥1” for buried conduit.
a. Use 1”, 2”, 4” and 5” conduit only.

6. Wireway size shall be ≥4” x 4”
H. Construct raceway system to provide firm mechanical assemblies with electrical conductivity throughout.

I. Install raceway and boxes to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install raceway and boxes true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

2. Do not use diagonal runs except when expressly shown on Plans.

J. Install outlet and device boxes as follows:

1. Metallic outlet boxes may be used for:
a. Housing wiring devices.
b. Pull or junction boxes above gypsum board or acoustical tile ceilings. c. Pull or junction box ≥10’ above floor in architecturally finished area with no ceiling.

2. Recess metallic outlet and device boxes:
a. In stud-framed walls and ceilings using appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers to mount boxes flush with wall face. b. In poured concrete walls of architectural finished areas and exterior building walls. c. In ungrouted cells of concrete block in architectural finished areas and exterior building walls, with bottom box edge flush with bottom edge of block.

3. Cast outlet boxes may be used for:
a. Housing wiring devices surface-mounted in non-architecturally finished areas. b. Pull or junction boxes surface-mounted in architecturally finished area with no ceiling.

4. Mount outlet and device boxes at locations and elevations shown on Plans. a. Set outlet and device boxes plumb and vertical to floor.

5. Mount box edges flush with finished surface.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 20 of 29 a. Provide proper type extension rings or plaster covers for this purpose. b. For flush-mounted boxes, make holes in surrounding surface no larger than required to receive box.

6. Mount boxes in secure, substantial manner supported independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.
a. Fasten boxes with bolts and expansion shields on concrete toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded, threaded studs on steelwork. b. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
c. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

7. Provide flush or recessed lighting fixtures with separate junction boxes when required by fixture terminal temperature.
a. Where boxes support fixtures, provide proper means of attachment with adequate strength.

8. Outlet boxes connected to PVC-coated conduit shall also be PVC-coated.

9. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel boxes than are required. a. Seal used openings in boxes with insert plugs.

K. Install junction and pull boxes as follows:

1. Make boxes and covers accessible.

2. Do not install boxes in finished areas until surfaces receiving boxes are accepted by City’s Representative.

3. Mount boxes plumb and level.

4. Use flush mounted boxes with concealed conduits.
a. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.

5. Mount boxes in secure, substantial manner, supported independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.
a. Fasten boxes with bolts and expansion shields on concrete toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on steelwork. b. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
c. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

6. Install boxes for conduits under grade flush with finished grade in locations outside paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

7. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.
a. If it is found desirable to locate boxes in paved areas, roadways, or walkways, obtain City’s Representative’s written acceptance.
b. Use boxes and covers suitable for traffic loadings to which they may be subjected.

8. Support pull boxes independently of raceways, walls, and partitions. a. Securely mount surface boxes, cabinets and apparatus. b. Unless otherwise specified, space wall-mounted boxes, cabinets and apparatus enclosures out from walls ≥½”.
c. Equip NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X boxes and boxes located in wet locations with automatic drain.
d. Install flush-mounted wall or ceiling boxes with raised covers so front face of raised cover is flush with surface.
e. Install surface-mounted wall or ceiling boxes with surface-style flat or raised covers.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 21 of 29 L. Route conduits and raceways as follows:

1. Construct conduit and fittings as required to provide complete system with neat appearance conforming to applicable codes.

2. Run raceways concealed except where otherwise shown. a. Install conduit in walls or slabs which have reinforcement in both faces between reinforcing steel mats.
b. In slabs, with only 1 layer of reinforcing steel, install conduit under reinforcement. c. Install PVC conduits not embedded in slabs ≥6” thick under bottom of concrete slab floors.

3. Run conduits parallel and perpendicular to building lines, walls, surfaces or exposed structural members.
a. Follow surface contours as much as practicable to provide neat appearance. b. Unless otherwise shown, keep legs of bends in same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel.

4. Do not route conduits:
a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs.

5. Install rigid conduits exposed with the following exceptions:
a. Embedded in ground-level floor slabs or buried under floor where accepted by City’s Representative.

6. Conduit shall not interfere with or prevent access to piping, valves, ductwork, or equipment for operation, maintenance, or repair.

7. Maintain spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs for runs >30’ as follows:

ITEMS REQUIRED SEPARATION

SEPARATION FROM FLUES, HOT WATER PIPES, STEAM PIPES, HEATING APPLIANCES AND HEAT SOURCES All conduit ≥12” wall-to-wall

SEPARATION FROM PROCESS, GAS, AIR, AND WATER PIPES AND DUCTS All conduit ≥6” wall-to-wall
SEPARATION FROM AC POWER CONDUCTORS, >600VAC
Instrumentation or Telecommunication ≥12” wall-to-wall
AC Power Conductors ≤600VAC ≥2” wall-to-wall
DC Power Conductors ≤125VAC ≥2” wall-to-wall
SEPARATION FROM AC POWER CONDUCTORS, ≤600VAC
Instrumentation or Telecommunication ≥6” wall-to-wall
DC Power Conductors ≤125VAC ≥2” wall-to-wall
SEPARATION FROM DC POWER CONDUCTORS ≤125VDC
Instrumentation or Telecommunication ≥2” wall-to-wall

SEPARATION FROM INSTRUMENTATION CABLE OR CONDUIT
Telecommunication ≥1” wall-to-wall

8. Provide ≥1” wall-to-wall separation at crossings.

9. Slope horizontal outdoor and indoor runs exposed to moisture to low point or to downturned elbow to drain internal moisture.
a. Equip low points with automatic drains.

10. Where space exists within housing of roof- or floor-mounted equipment, stub up conduit within housings.

11. Route exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space, and work space.

12. Construct conduit runs to avoid interference with both proper and safe equipment operation, and ingress or egress including equipment removal hatches.

13. Install exposed, parallel, or banked conduits together. a. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline so bends are parallel.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 22 of 29 b. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel.

14. Buried conduits shall penetrate surfaces at 90°
M. Install conduits as follows:

1. Conduits shall be continuous from outlets to cabinets, pull or junction boxes and secured to boxes with locknuts and insulated bushings such that each system is electrically continuous throughout.

2. Cut conduit joints square so ends butt together for full circumference of cut. a. Ream ends of conduit smooth, interior and exterior, whether shop-cut or field-cut, to remove burrs and rough edges.
b. Degrease threads after threading.
c. Thread, and draw up tight.

3. Before installing fittings, paint male threads of field-threaded galvanized rigid-steel conduit with:
a. Zinc-rich paint or
b. Homogenized blend of colloidal copper and rust corrosion inhibitor joint pre-treating pipe compound from acceptable Manufacturer.

4. For PVC-coated rigid conduits, use Manufacturer's recommended style threading and installation tools.

5. Before installing fittings, coat male threads of conduit with electrically conductive antiseize compound.

6. Make threaded connections wrench-tight.

7. Anchor conduits in place at ≤10’ intervals, at elbows, and within 24” of outlet boxes or cabinets.
a. Provide hangers, supports, channel strut systems, fastenings, or clamps at elbows and at ends of straight runs terminating at boxes or cabinets. b. Do not use perforated metal or "plumber's tape."
c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs.

8. Space out raceways and conduits run on building surfaces from surface ≥¼” using clamp backs and nest backs.
a. Do not use offset bends at boxes or cabinets except where accepted by City’s Representative.

9. Make connections from metallic to non-metallic conduits with accepted fittings. a. Limit use of threadless couplings to applications joining new conduit to existing conduit when existing conduit is not threaded and it is not possible to cut threads on existing conduit with pipe threader.

N. Bend conduits as follows:

1. Make offsets and right-angle bends in conduit runs with hub-type conduit fittings, or standard or long-radius elbows.

2. To make field bends and cuts, use tools, equipment, benders or hickeys recommended by conduit Manufacturer and designed for bending or cutting conduit material. a. Use Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) for bends b. Make bends and offsets so inside diameter of conduit is not reduced. c. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to PVC coatings. d. Make bends to radii not less than those specified for standard or long-radius elbows depending on wire pull conditions.

3. Number of bends shall not exceed NEC limitations.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 23 of 29 O. Install PVC-coated Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-ERSC) as follows:

1. Use Manufacturer’s recommended installation tools and recommendations.

2. Manufacturer shall certify installer before installation proceeds.

3. Provide expansion fittings where conduit crosses expansion joint in structure a. Provide expansion fittings with #8AWG copper bonding jumper.

4. Bend rigid metallic conduit without crimping or flattening with radius of ≥6 x conduit inside diameter.

5. Fittings shall be galvanized steel.

6. Securely tighten couplings to provide electrical and mechanical connection throughout conduit run length.

7. When standard coupling cannot be used, use UL or ETL listed threaded union coupling accepted by City’s Representative.

8. Where rigid metallic conduit is capped and caps are removed, provide ends of conduit with conduit bushings.

P. Install Rigid Nonmetallic (PVC) Conduit as follows:

1. Conform to installation provisions of NEMA TC2, except as modified below.

2. Install rigid PVC for underground portions of conduit for power, control, communication and instrumentation cables.

3. Provide rigid PVC conduit for underground portions of telephone conduit unless otherwise required by telephone utility.
a. Conduits shall have end bells where terminated at walls.

4. Provide specified cover and concrete encasement for buried conduit.

5. Conduits shall have end bells where terminated at walls, or adapters for steel conduit continuations where required.
a. Solvent weld PVC conduit joints per Manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Immediately after installing PVC conduit and fitting, rotate fitting or conduit 90° to provide uniform contact while drawing joint up tight to shoulder. c. Cementing and joining operation take ≤20 seconds.
d. Do not disturb joint for 5 minutes, longer (up to 10 minutes) at lower temperatures. e. Make joints watertight.
f. Joining procedure shall conform to ASTM D2855.

6. Provide ground wire with power wiring and increase conduit size as required.

7. Make cuts with fine tooth handsaw.
a. For sizes 2” and larger, use miter box or similar saw guide to assure square cut.

8. Use factory-made couplings for joining conduit.

9. Ream square-cut ends smooth, and wipe clean.

10. Provide expansion fittings as follows:
a. Provide expansion fittings when conduit is left exposed in trenches for time period during which conduit’s temperature may vary by >2°F.
b. Provide near fixed end of runs and 100’ on center.
c. Provide where shown on Plans.

11. Install expansion/deflection fittings as follows:
a. Provide where conduits enter structures other than electrical manholes and handholes except where ductbank is tied to structure with rebar. b. Provide where conduits span structural expansion joints. c. Provide where shown on Plans.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 24 of 29

12. Convert to steel conduit through adaptors when entering buildings and for risers.

13.For direct buried conduit transition from PVC to PVC-ERSC, provide half-lapped 5-mil plastic protective tape-coating over PVC-ERSC.

Q. Install flexible metallic conduit as follows:

1. Provide separate insulated stranded copper equipment ground conductor in areas exposed to weather, damp locations, and connections to transformer enclosures regardless of location.

2. Connect ground conductor to enclosure or raceway at each end.

R. Seal conduit entries with silicone conduit sealant when conduit:

1. Exits areas identified as corrosive.

2. Exits underground structures.

S. Provide grounding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

1. Use grounding bushings for conduits carrying grounding conductor or not installed into threaded hubs.

2. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductor, and in flexible conduit for feeders and motor terminal connections.

3. In exposed, damp, or wet locations, provide equipment grounding conductor with raceway or in liquid-tight flexible conduit.

4. Size grounding conductors according to NEC §250.

T. Install raceway embedded in concrete and below slabs as follows:

1. Perform trenching and backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

2. Perform cutting and patching of curbs and pavements required for proper installation of electrical Work.
a. Use patching of same material, workmanship and finish as existing surface and matching surrounding work to City’s satisfaction.

3. Use PVC-ERSC for bends.

4. Install half-lapped 5-mil plastic protective tape-coating system on buried PVC-ERSC conduits.

5. Install conduits and sleeves passing through slabs, walls, or beams so as not to impair strength of construction.
a. Secure conduit to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

6. Provide ≥1” concrete cover over embedded conduit.

7. Conduits >1½” diameter may be embedded in concrete only after submittal and review of location and reinforcement details.
a. Conduits and sleeves may be installed without specific permission, provided they are ≤1½” in diameter and are spaced ≥3 diameters on centers.

8. Install conduits in slabs other than slabs-on-grade as close to slab center as practical without disturbing steel reinforcement.
a. Conduit outside diameters shall not exceed ⅓ x slab thickness.

9. Do not space parallel runs of conduit ≤3 diameters on centers, except at cabinet and outlet box locations.

10. Install conduit deep enough for elbows to penetrate perpendicular to slab.

11. Concrete encasement of conduits installed below concrete slabs shall be continuous with concrete floor or slab where practical.
a. Otherwise, install below floor slab, under curing or damp-proofing membranes, and under sand blankets.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 25 of 29

12. Locate conduit stub-ups below cabinets and boxes within conduit entry area identified in equipment Manufacturer’s shop drawings.
a. Brace conduits prior to concrete placement to prevent shifting of conduits during placement.

13. Keep raceways clear of motor and equipment foundations.

14. Transition from PVC to steel underground 5’ prior to riser.

U. Install underground raceway as follows:

1. For high-voltage and service entrance conduits, provide burial depth, bedding, and backfill per Electrical Utility service requirements, and provide concrete encasement.

2. Provide cover as follows:
a. Provide ≥30” cover for direct-burial cable.
b. Provide ≥24” cover where PVC or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit is installed underground in locations other than under concrete slab. c. Unless otherwise shown, provide other underground conduits and conduit banks with ≥24” earth cover.

3. Underground conduit bend radius shall be ≥24” at vertical risers and ≥36” elsewhere. a. Requirement for ≥36” radius may be relaxed by City’s Representative where deemed necessary to facilitate and simplify operation.

4. Maintain separations as follows.
a. Maintain ≥12” vertical separation between buried raceways and other systems at crossings.
b. Maintain ≥12” horizontal separation between buried raceways and other utility piping systems in parallel runs.

5. Pitch and slope conduit to drain away from buildings to manholes or pull-boxes.

6. Isolate telephone and communication cables, raceways, conduits, boxes, manholes, and hand-holes from those of other circuits.

7. Isolate communication and instrument cables from power wiring raceways, conduits, boxes, manholes, and hand-holes.
a. Route these cables through manholes and hand-holes in liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

8. Where other utility piping systems are encountered or being installed along raceway route, refer conflicts to City’s Representative before proceeding. a. Do not place raceways over buried valves, couplings or appurtenances.

9. Provide concrete encasement for underground conduit duct banks unless shown otherwise on Plans.
a. Where conduits are concrete- or slurry-encased, provide ≥ 2” wall-to-wall separation between conduits, ≥ 1” wall to edge separation between conduit and reinforcing, and ≥ 3” cover over reinforcing or conduit
b. Provide ≥3” sand-cement slurry with red color additive on all sides of buried conduits. c. Continue concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers to 3” above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered.

10. Where conduit and concrete encasement terminate underground, terminate steel conduit flush at bulkhead with coupling and screw plug.
a. Protect threads with screw-in plastic cap.
b. Form ≥1¾”x¾” deep horizontal shear key in concrete encasement above and below embedded conduits.
c. After concrete placement, clean conduit and bar connector ends and coat with 2 coats of thixotropic coal tar.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 26 of 29

11. Refer to Section 33 05 26 for installation of detectable warning tape above conduits, or, if under slabs, directly beneath concrete subgrade.

12. Isolate low-voltage cable raceways from raceways, conduits, boxes, manholes and hand-holes for other circuits.

13. Separate communication and instrumentation cables from power wiring in raceways, boxes, manholes, and hand-holes.

14. Transitions from PVC to steel conduit shall occur underground.

V. Construct building wall or foundation penetrations as follows:

1. Underground conduit banks through building walls or footings shall be cast in place or concreted into box-outs with water stops on all sides of box-out.

2. Water stops shall conform to Section 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories.

3. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls which have 1 side in contact with earth shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve-andjoint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

4. Maintain integrity of damp-proofing and waterproofing membranes penetrated by conduits and boxes.

5. Buried conduit shall penetrate surface at 90°.

6. Seal between raceway and building where raceway passes through exterior wall or rated firewall as follows:
a. Concrete Construction: Cast conduit in wall or core drill wall and pack around conduit with, dry-pack, fire stop putty or equivalent method accepted by City’s Representative.
b. Frame Construction: Seal with fire-stop rated material compatible with building material through which raceway passes, as accepted by City’s Representative. c. Provide flashing for conduits installed through roofs or metal walls and seal watertight.

7. Fill openings in walls, floors, and ceilings and finish flush with surface.

W. Construct conduit terminations into enclosures as follows:

ENCLOSURE TYPE CONNECTING

CONDUIT

TERMINATION
Metallic Outlet Boxes PVC-ERSC Provide conduit hub and locknut.

Provide insulated bushing and 2 locknuts.

Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC.

Stubups Through Floors
into Floor-Mount Equipment
Provide insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits.

Provide end bells on nonmetallic conduits.

NEMA 1 Enclosures PVC-ERSC Provide conduit hub and locknut.

Provide insulated bushing and 2 locknuts.

Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC.

NEMA 4 and 4X Enclosures Provide watertight, insulated, and gasketed hub and locknut.

NEMA 12 Enclosures Provide watertight, insulated, and gasketed hub and locknut.

Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC.

1. Terminate conduits in manner ensuring each system is electrically continuous throughout.

2. Terminate conduits entering enclosures using fittings ensuring NEMA rating of enclosure is not compromised.

3. Terminate conduits with locknuts and bushings except where threaded hubs are specified.

4. Terminate rigid steel conduits with Meyers-type hubs with bushings.

5. Install conduits squarely to box and provide 1 locknut outside box and 1 locknut and bushing inside box.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 27 of 29

6. Install locknuts with dished side against box.

7. When terminating in threaded conduit hubs, screw conduit or fitting tight into hub so end bears against fire protection shoulder.

8. When chase nipples are used, install conduits and coupling square to box. a. Tighten chase nipple leaving no exposed threads.

9. Cap conduits during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.

10. Ream and taper thread termination and connections of rigid steel conduit.

11. Terminate all sizes with conduit bushings.

12. Terminate concealed conduits for future use within equipment or by galvanized couplings plugged flush with structural surfaces or installed ≥6” from surface if so directed.

13. Terminate exposed conduit stubs for future use with galvanized pipe caps.

14. Space rigid steel conduit stubouts ≥6” apart.

15. Connect underground nonmetallic conduit which turns out of concrete, masonry, or earth to metallic conduit before emergence, with 90° elbows of electrical rigid steel conduit (PVC-ERSC).
a. Ensure conduit risers are vertically plumb.

16. Apply corrosion-resistant coating to conduits that turn out of concrete, masonry, or earth. a. Provide coating which consists of heavy coat of thixotropic coal tar paint extending 1” on each side of point of turn-out.

X. Clean and protect constructed conduit as follows:

1. Maintain protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories.

2. Install conduit systems complete with insulated, grounding bushing before pulling in conductors.

3. Cap or plug open ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts immediately after installation to prevent entrance of foreign matter until wire is pulled.

4. Clean and ensure conduit runs are not crushed or creased. a. After concrete (if any) has set, pull mandrel with diameter nominally ¼” smaller than raceway interior through raceway to remove obstructions. b. Then pull bristle brush through raceways to remove debris. c. Swab conduit by pulling clean, tight-fitting rag through conduit. d. Verify no foreign objects or obstructions are present in conduit prior to installing conductors.
e. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before pulling wire into place.

5. After completing installation of ≥2” conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit cleaner equipped with cylindrical mandrel of diameter ≥85% of nominal diameter of conduit. a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.

6. Where portions of raceways are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as where passing from interior to exterior of buildings, seal raceway to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of raceway.

Y. Install general purpose sheet steel pull-boxes in dry interior locations only.

1. Install cast metal or concrete pull-boxes in exterior locations where boxes are subject to mechanical injury.

Z. Repair damaged conduit as follows:

1. Replace conduit damaged during or after installation.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 28 of 29

2. Replace crushed or clogged conduit or any conduit whose inner surface is damaged or not smooth.

3. Prior to installation, repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation.

4. Repair cuts, nicks, or abrasions in zinc coating of galvanized conduit with:
a. Galvanizing repair stick or
b. Zinc-rich paint.

5. Repair painted components using touch up paint provided by or approved by Manufacturer.

6. Repair cuts, nicks, or abrasions in PVC coatings with PVC material. a. Manufacturer’s furnished or recommended PVC patching compound of same thickness, and color as coating, or
b. Self-adhesive, conformable, cross-linked silicone composition strip, followed by protective coating of vinyl tape.

7. Use patching described above for small areas only.
a. Items with significant damage may require replacement at City’s Representative’s discretion.

AA.Install empty conduit as follows:

1. Provide ≥200-lbf strength pull cord, tape, or rope in empty conduits, with ≥4’ knotted and coiled at each end.

2. Provide waterproof label on each end of pull-cords to indicate destination of other end.

3. Show coordinate dimensions of stub-outs on record drawings. a. Place 1”x12”x12” concrete marker over stub-outs, and engrave with words “Electrical Conduit.”

4. Cap spare PVC conduit stub-outs and stub-ups.
a. Provide #10 THHN green wire below threaded cap.
b. Provide ≥6” of spare wire beyond conduit end to allow future splicing of grounding conductor extension.
c. Secure green wire to conduit interior with suitable tape or adhesive.

5. Provide bonded bushing and bond wire for metallic conduit terminating in equipment enclosures or pull boxes.
a. Provide ≥#10AWG bond wire.

BB.Install outlets for general wiring as follows:

1. Use multi-gang boxes and device plates where several devices are located in same general area.
a. Do not use sectional boxes.
b. Obtain back box requirements for systems provided under other sections and provide them per those requirements.

2. Mount outlets for different conduit systems shown in same wall area ≤6” on center.

3. Rigidly support boxes for wall and ceiling outlets and finish flush and straight. a. Front edge shall be within ⅛” of finished surface and plumb within ⅛”

4. Install outlets and boxes securely and support them substantially. a. Anchor boxes into masonry construction with 1 or more integral flanges.

CC. Seal conduits as follows:

1. Upon completion of installation of conduits and boxes, inspect interiors of conduits and boxes; clear blockages; and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 29 of 29

2. After cable has been installed and connected, seal conduit ends by non-hardening duct sealing compound forced into conduits to depth ≥ conduit diameter. a. This shall apply for conduits at hand-holes, manholes, and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1” and larger conduit connections to equipment.

DD. Provide conduit identification as follows:

1. Provide conduit identification tags in manholes, hand-holes, building entrance pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment.

2. Attach identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps.

3. Position tags to be visible for inspection.

4. Labels shall designate conduit destination.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Install conduit exposed unless specifically noted otherwise.

1. Concealed and underground conduits shall be inspected by City’s Representative prior to concealment.

B. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Raceway
and
Boxes
Installation, &
Leakage
Visual inspection of finished installation 1 inspection City City Cleanliness Snake conduits with conduit cleaner
equipped with cylindrical mandrel of
diameter ≥85% of nominal diameter of
conduit.
1 each
conduit ≥2”
Contractor Contractor
Continuity Test resistance of feeder conduits from
service to point of final distribution using 1
conductor return.

Resistance shall be ≤25Ω
1 each
conduit
Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Confirm Work conforms to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 1 of 9
SECTION 26 05 47

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cabinets and enclosures.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
I. Section 05 05 19: Post-Installed Concrete Anchors
J. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical K. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems L. Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems M. Section 26 08 00: Commissioning of Electrical Systems

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install cabinets and enclosures, including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and applicable building codes and standards.

B. Cabinets and enclosures shall protect enclosed electrical and instrumentation equipment from high or low ambient temperature, freezing, airborne dust, wind, humidity, wet weather, corrosive, and hazardous environments.

1. If equipment enclosed by cabinetry does not incorporate derating and necessary oversizing to meet Manufacturer’s warranty requirements and specified performance criteria at design conditions shown in Section 01 10 01, provide heating, cooling, ventilation, dehumidifying, filtering, or other devices needed to maintain cabinet interior environmental conditions within electrical equipment Manufacturer’s limits and warranty requirements.

2. Size cabinet-mounted HVAC equipment to maintain cabinet interior environmental conditions within Manufacturer’s limits under worst conditions shown in Section 01 10

01. a. Provide air filters to protect against dust in outside air used to cool enclosure interiors.
b. Sizing of cabinet-mounted HVAC equipment shall be supported by Engineering Calculations and include a margin of safety of ≥3°F for refrigeration equipment and 10% of airflow for ventilation equipment.

3. Provide conduit, wiring, and overcurrent protection required to power and control HVAC equipment furnished.

1.5 References
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 2 of 9
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

2. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

3. California Building Code (CBC)

4. California Energy Code (CEnC)

5. California Fire Code (CFC)

6. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

7. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

8. UL50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Non-Environmental Considerations

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings Submit per equipment Shop Drawing requirements. .

Submit information on proposed ventilation or HVAC equipment required to protect furnished equipment.

Include tabulation of Manufacturers’ acceptable cabinet temperatures and humidity’s for control equipment furnished.

Include equipment Manufacturer’s recommendations for venting, forced air ventilation, or refrigeration required to provide enforceable warranties for their equipment.

MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Engineering Calculations Submit for sizing of cabinet-mounted HVAC systems.

Submit for seismic anchorage per Section 01 73 24.

Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of cabinets and enclosures.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
NEMA 1 – General
Purpose Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Integra Enclosures / Winncom Solon, OH (888) 946-6266
Accepted equal
NEMA 2 – Drip-proof
Enclosures
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Integra Enclosures / Winncom Solon, OH (888) 946-6266
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 3 of 9

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Accepted equal
NEMA 3R – Rainproof,
Sleet-Resistant
Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Victory Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Hubbell Wiegmann Santa Fe Springs, CA (714) 620-6300
Integra Enclosures / Winncom Solon, OH (888) 946-6266
Accepted equal
NEMA 4X – Stainless
Steel Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant
Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Victory Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Hammond Manufacturing Company, Inc. Cheektowaga, NY (716)630-7030 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Hubbell Wiegmann Santa Fe Springs, CA (714) 620-6300
Accepted equal
NEMA 4X – Fiberglass
Watertight, CorrosionResistant Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Carlon / Lamson & Session Co Cleveland, OH (800) 346-2646 Hammond Manufacturing Company, Inc. Cheektowaga, NY (716)630-7030 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Hubbell Wiegmann Santa Fe Springs, CA (714) 620-6300
Accepted equal
NEMA 7 – Explosion
Proof Enclosures Rated
for Class I Locations
Adalet / ScottFetzer Hazlo Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Accepted equal
NEMA 9 – Explosion
Proof Enclosures Rated
for Class II Locations
Adalet / ScottFetzer Hazlo Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Appleton / Emerson Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
Accepted equal
NEMA 12 – Industrial
Use Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Victory Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Hammond Manufacturing Company, Inc. Cheektowaga, NY (716)630-7030 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Hubbell Wiegmann Santa Fe Springs, CA (714) 620-6300
Integra Enclosures / Winncom Solon, OH (888) 946-6266
Accepted equal
NEMA 13 – Oil-Tight,
Dust-Tight Enclosures
Adalet / ScottFetzer Genlo Victory Series Cleveland, OH (216) 267-9000 Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Anoka, MN (763) 545-1730
Integra Enclosures / Winncom Solon, OH (888) 946-6266
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Cabinets and enclosures shall meet selection requirements of NEC Table 110.20.

C. Materials for cabinets shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NEMA 1 – General Purpose
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 1
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
NEMA 2 Damp-Proof
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 2
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
NEMA 3 – Dust-Tight, RainTight Enclosures
Steel NEMA 3
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
NEMA 3R – Rainproof, SleetResistant Enclosures
Steel NEMA 3R
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
NEMA 4 – Watertight
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 4
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 4 of 9

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant Enclosures
Stainless Steel NEMA 4X
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Gasketed
Conform to UL50
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant Enclosures
Fiberglass-Reinforced
Polyester
NEMA 4X
Shall contain >25% fiberglass by weight
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant Enclosure
Transparent Covers
Polycarbonate
NEMA 7 – Explosion Proof
Enclosures Rated for Class I
Locations
Steel NEMA 7
Thickness ≥14-gauge
NEMA 9 – Explosion Proof
Enclosures Rated for Class II
Locations
Steel NEMA 9
Thickness ≥14-gauge
NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 12
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Gasketed
Conform to UL50
NEMA 13 – Oil-Tight, Dust-Tight
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 13
Thickness ≥14-gauge
Conform to UL50
D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
All Cabinets and Enclosures Construction Galvanized sheet steel, stainless sheet steel, fiberglass, or polycarbonate as required for NEMA ratings.

Flush- or surface-mounted boxes as shown
Metal frames shall use reinforced code-gauge metal
Doors Provide separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, panel, controller, or other unit.

Door size shall permit ≥110° door swing within
dimensional constraints of equipment room.

Doors shall be key-lockable.

Key door locks alike per City’s requirements.

Dimensions Size to conform with NEC.

Nameplates Refer to Section 26 05 10.

Ventilation Provide adequate ventilation for enclosed equipment Exterior Finish For steel provide rust-inhibiting primer and then Manufacturer’s factory-baked enamel
Refer to Section 09 90 00
Color ANSI 49 Medium-light gray / ANSI 61 Gray / White / selected by City’s Representative.

Plate unpainted parts for corrosion resistance
For stainless steel, do not paint.

Grind door front smooth
For plastic or FRP, do not paint
Interior Finish For steel provide rust-inhibiting primer and then Manufacturer’s factory-baked enamel
on interior panels and directory frame print pockets.

Refer to Section 09 90 00
Color ANSI 49 Medium-light gray /ANSI 61 Gray / White / selected by City’s Representative
For stainless steel, do not paint.

Grind door front smooth
For plastic or FRP, do not paint
Print Pocket Provide with index card holders and cards mounted behind heavy transparent plastic on backside of cabinet doors
Directory Frame Provide interior directory metal frame, heavy transparent DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 5 of 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
plastic cover and enclosed directory card on backside of panel doors
Wall-Mount Cabinets Construction Conform to NEMA type shown Back Panel Provide removable steel back panels for mounting equipment.

Equip cabinet back panels with ground bus bar.

Knockouts Provide appropriate size and quantity of knock-outs for conduit entry.

Floor-Mount Vertical Cabinets Construction Conform to NEMA type shown Free-standing, floor-mounted preassembled type
Provide 19” EIA adjustable mounting rails for front and rear equipment mounting.

Group cabinets side by side with side panels on each
section.

Rear Doors Vented except as otherwise shown
Front Doors Vented top and bottom except as otherwise shown.

Side Panels Thickness ≥ 18-gauge
Top Panel Plain
Exterior Dimensions Overall Width 20”
Overall Height 87” nominal / As shown on Plans
Overall Depth 20” / 25” nominal
Interior Dimensions Panel Width 19”
Panel Height 78¾”
Compartment
Dimensions
Unit Spaces Divide each vertical standard section
into 12 usable 6.5”-high unit spaces
Space Factors 2 unit spaces = 13” = 1 space factor
Do not provide fractional space factor
compartments except where shown on
Plans.

Empty Panel Spaces Provide 19”-wide panels of color matching cabinet for unused vertical mounting units.

Filler panel height shall be ≤10½”
Pedestals Construction Conform to NEMA type shown for outdoor or wet locations.

Continuously welded seams.

Secure panel with security screws.

Pre-drill pedestal for mounting of equipment such as
intercom stations and loop detectors
Access Panel Provide gasketed panel to access enclosed equipment.

Dimensions As shown
Exterior Finish For steel, refer to Section 09 90 00
Color ANSI 61 Gray / selected by City’s Representative.

For stainless steel, do not paint.

Grind door front smooth
Interior Finish Use Manufacturer’s enamel on directory frame print pockets and interior panels.

Color ANSI 61 Gray / White / selected by City’s
Representative
Power Strips General Provide plug-in or hardwired outlet strips as required to support installed equipment.

Case Metallic
Plug-In Power Strips Provide with locking plug and use only with compatible locking-type receptacle
NEMA 3R Rainproof SleetResistant Steel Enclosures
Wrapped around NEMA 1
Gasketed Enclosure
Rainproof Sleet-Resistant Steel
Enclosures
Construction Provide NEMA 1 enclosure inside NEMA3R enclosure Enclosure Continuously welded seams
Provide rolled lip around sides of door and around sides of enclosure opening.

Door Provide full-length piano hinges with door removable by pulling stainless-steel hinge pin.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 6 of 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Gasket Attach with oil-resistant adhesive.

Secure with steel retaining strips
Hardware Provide clamps, screws, hinge pins, hasp, and staple for padlocking
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant Stainless
Steel Enclosures
Enclosure Continuously welded seams
Provide rolled lip around sides of door and around sides of enclosure opening.

Door Provide full-length piano hinges with door removable by pulling stainless-steel hinge pin.

Gasket Attach with oil-resistant adhesive.

Secure with steel retaining strips
Hardware Provide clamps, screws, hinge pins, hasp, and staple for padlocking
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant Fiberglass
Enclosures
Enclosure Heavy-duty hot compression molded
Door Cover hinges manufactured from nonmetallic materials Gasket Neoprene cemented into molded labyrinth on cover Hardware Provide nonmetallic latches suitable for padlocking NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
Enclosures
Enclosure Continuously welded seams
Provide rolled lip around sides of door and around sides of enclosure opening.

Door Provide full-length piano hinges with door removable by pulling stainless-steel hinge pin.

Gasket Attach with oil-resistant adhesive and secure with steel retaining strips
Hardware Provide clamps, screws, hinge pins, hasp, and staple for padlocking
Lighting and Utility
Circuitry (PLC
enclosures)
For PLC enclosures, provide 120VAC 15-amp duplex
output and single-pole 120VAC 15-amp circuit breaker.

Provide fluorescent lamp in panel.

E. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505 Classification Nonhazardous Class I Division 1 (wet well)
Class I Division 2 (dry well)
Enclosures – Indoor Dry
Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
NEMA 1 – General Purpose
As shown on plans
Enclosures – Indoor or VaultEnclosed Damp Locations NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 – Industrial Use NEMA 2 – Drip-tight
As shown on plans
NEMA 4 – Watertight
NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant,
Stainless steel
Enclosures – Outdoor or Wet NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant, Locations Stainless steel
NEMA 3 – Dust-tight, Rain-tight
NEMA 3R – Rainproof, Sleet-Resistant
NEMA 4 – Watertight
As shown on plans
Mount enclosures ≥¼” from walls to provide air
space.

Enclosure entrances shall be threaded.

Enclosures – Class I Division 1
Wet Well Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 – Explosion Proof, Rated for Class I Locations
As shown on plans
Enclosures – Class I Division 2
Dry Well Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 – Explosion Proof, Rated for Class I Locations
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 7 of 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
As shown on plans
All Enclosures Construction Lockable
With powdercoat epoxy finish on steel surfaces
IEC 60529 Enclosure Rating for
Underground Equipment
IP 65 dust-tight + low-pressure water jet
Enclosure or Instrument
Mounting
Local Mount Panel-mount
Surface-mount on wall / instrument board
Pipe-mount
Skid-mount
See plans
Remote Mount MCC
Telemetry cabinet
See plans
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install cabinets and enclosures before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install cabinets and enclosures at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. California Electrical Code Article 312 “Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures”

4. California Electrical Code Chapter 4 “Equipment for General Use”

5. Other applicable building, fire, and electrical code requirements

6. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Install cabinets and enclosures to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install cabinets and enclosures true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Provide pedestals conforming to NEC as required for proper equipment installation.

1. Install pedestal in accessible locations.

2. Coordinate installed conduit locations so conduit is stubbed up inside pedestal enclosure.

3. Provide working clearances meeting NEC requirements for electrical equipment.

4. Secure to concrete with Type 304 SS anchor bolts, self-drilling anchors, or expansion anchors per Section 05 05 19.
a. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 8 of 9
b. Locate anchors so they are only accessible from inside enclosure.

G. Provide cabinets conforming to NEC as required for proper equipment installation.

1. Install cabinets and enclosures in accessible locations.

2. Provide working clearances meeting NEC requirements for electrical equipment.

3. Pedestal cabinets shall be large enough and equipment shall be spaced to provide room for airflow and maintenance.

4. Secure to concrete with Type 304 SS anchor bolts, self-drilling anchors, or expansion anchors per Section 05 05 19.
a. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners.

5. Close unused cabinet openings to provide protection equal to that of cabinet walls.

H. Provide venting, ventilation, heating, air conditioning, and dehumidification as shown, and as required to:

1. Conform to electrical equipment warranty requirements.

2. Prevent condensation from damaging enclosed electrical equipment.

3. Maintain interior cabinet temperatures at ≤95*F.
a. Locate heat-producing equipment including power supplies near top of cabinets.

4. Where forced air cooling is required, provide ventilation fans, vents, and filters. a. For cabinets with forced ventilation, doors and side panels shall be solid with no louvers.

5. Construct top-mounted air-conditioning units to prevent condensation from damaging electrical equipment or enclosure.

6. Maintain temperatures inside cabinet to within recommended Manufacturer’s limits for equipment mounted in cabinet, and ≤14°F (8°C) above ambient.

7. Submit calculations to City for approval prior to manufacturing.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Cabinets
and
Enclosures
Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of finished installation 1 inspection City City Condensation No visible condensation from top-mounted
AC units
1 inspection City City
NEC
Clearances
Meet NEC §110.26 clearance requirements 1 inspection City City Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
Literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
Literature
1 test City Contractor
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 05 47 – Cabinets and Enclosures - 9 of 9

3.4 Protection
A. Dress cables neatly within cabinets and enclosures.

1. Trim and dispose of excess cable.

B. After equipment is installed, touch up scratches and marks incurred during shipment or installation.

1. If required by City’s Representative due to excessive scratching, repaint entire assemblies.

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 1 of 9 SECTION 26 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Testing, commissioning and startup of electrical system equipment, components, materials, wiring, and grounding.

B. Provide services of City-accepted third-party Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) to provide the following acceptance tests and inspections in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS, Contract Documents, and Manufacturer’s recommendations:

1. Field tests for electrical power conductors and cables

2. Field tests of grounding and bonding systems
a. Refer to Section 26 05 26 for field tests of grounding and bonding systems.

3. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are only required where specified.

C. Refer to sections for individual equipment items for additional testing and commissioning requirements.

D. Testing, commissioning and startup of the following electrical Work will be performed by others and are excluded from the scope of this section

1. Testing of instrumentation and controls systems

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 73 00: Execution
F. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical G. Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables H. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Perform factory tests required by applicable industry standards or NRTL before shipping equipment.

C. Factory tests will not be accepted as substitute for specified field accepted tests.

1.4 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. California Electrical Code (CEC)

3. IEEE 400 Field Testing and Evaluation of Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems

4. IEEE 400.3 Partial Discharge Testing of Power Cable Systems in Field Envir0onment

5. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

6. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

7. NFPA 70B: Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance (ANSI)

8. NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employer Workplaces DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 2 of 9

9. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory

10. TIA/EIA/ANSI 455-78-B Optical Fibres Part 1-40 Measurement Methods and Test Procedures - Attenuation

1.5 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals with bid or within 72 hours following bid opening.

1. Failure to submit required information on time may cause City to determine and assign City-accepted testing company to be employed by Contractor at no cost to City.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

PREMOBILIZATION SUBMITTALS
Electrical Test Agency
Qualifications
Submit name and qualifications of ETA
Submit documentary evidence ETA has been in business in California for ≥5 years Submit name and qualifications of lead engineer or engineering technician performing required testing services along with documentary evidence proposed onsite foreman has worked in such capacity in employ of subcontractor ≥3 years and has completed ≥3 installations of product.

Include reference names and telephone numbers
Submit ETA’s quality assurance program
Submit ETA’s instrument calibration and equipment testing program Submit ETA’s electrical safety program.

B. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Pre-Test Submittals Submit equipment Manufacturer’s instructions for testing manufactured products .

Submit phasing diagrams showing coordinated phasing for 3ɸ power showing coordinated phase rotations with generators and motors through transformers.

Submit photocopies of continuity tests before energizing equipment.

Submit test data forms

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Post-Test Submittals Submit summary of testing for Work including date and time of tests Submit information from pre-energization testing.

Submit description of equipment tested
Submit description of tests and test procedures
At least 45 days prior to planned testing, submit acceptance and system functions test plan for each equipment item or system to be field tested Include applicable procedures, forms, and lists of test equipment.

Do not perform testing until test plan and procedures have been accepted.

Submit tabulated data for each piece of equipment tested, including circuit number, equipment or motor name and tag number (where applicable), nameplate fullampere rating, motor service factor, motor ambient temperature rating, overload relay rating, measured full load current, and measured discharge pressures (where applicable)
Submit certified copies of inspection reports, test reports, and system function tests.

Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements including test instrument calibration, identification of deficiencies, and recommendation of corrective action when appropriate.

Type and neatly bind test reports to form part of final record.

Submit conclusions and recommendations
Submit completed test forms in appendix, including witness’s signatures.

Submit list of test equipment in appendix including calibration documents Submit test report ≤10 days after each test is completed Refer to Section 26 08 13 for short circuit and coordination report submittal requirements.

Refer to Section 26 08 16 for arc-flash hazard analysis and report submittal requirements.

Deviations from Contract
Documents
Note or indicate wiring deviations from Contract Documents on Project Record Documents.

C. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for submittals.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 3 of 9 D. Include the following minimum information in each data record:

1. Identification of ETA.

2. Equipment identification: Equipment ID code based on Drawings a. Where applicable, include building number, and system identifier.

3. Humidity, temperature, and other conditions that may affect results of tests or calibration of test equipment.

4. Date inspection, test, or function test was performed.

5. Identification and signature of testing technician.

6. Description of inspections, tests, maintenance, and function tests performed and recorded.

7. Test equipment used and references to calibration records.

8. Indication of as-found condition and as-left results.

E. Include the following information in final test report:

1. Summary of project.

2. Description of equipment inspected and tested.

3. Description of inspections and tests.

4. Data record resulting from each inspection and test.

5. Results of system function tests.

6. Analysis of tests, identification of deficiencies, and recommendations for corrective action.

F. Refer to Part 3 below for schedule of required field tests.

1.6 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Testing Firms
A. Retain qualified engineering appraisal and testing firm to perform inspections, tests, and evaluation to determine equipment designated herein is installed and adjusted for successful energization and operation.

B. Testing firm shall meet Federal OSHA criteria for accrediting testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1910.7, and have work history and qualifications acceptable to City.

1. Appraisal and testing firm shall have ≥2 years of experience in appraising and testing equipment of nature to be tested.

2. Managing or supervising representatives of appraisal and testing firm shall have extensive knowledge of products involved and ≥2 years hands-on experience conducting appraisals and tests.

3. Conduct testing under supervision of managing or supervising representatives.

4. Testing technicians shall be trained and experienced in type of testing to be performed.

C. ETA shall be independent testing organization which shall function as unbiased testing authority, independent of Manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems evaluated.

1. ETA shall be regularly engaged in testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems.

2. ETA shall have documented quality assurance program, documented inspection and test and procedures, and documented electrical safety program.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 4 of 9

3. ETA shall have completed ≥10 acceptance testing, inspection and calibration projects of similar scope to this project.

4. ETA shall have a calibration program
a. Test instruments used shall be calibrated per NETA ATS.

5. ETA technicians performing testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be “qualified persons” as defined by NFPA 70E and NEC.

6. Technicians performing electrical tests and inspections shall be trained and experienced concerning apparatus and systems being evaluated.

7. Technicians shall be capable of conducting tests in safe manner with knowledge of hazards involved and appropriate safety-related work practices.

8. Technicians shall be qualified to evaluate test data and make judgment on serviceability of specific equipment.

9. Testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be performed or supervised on Project site by ETA employee with following minimum qualifications:
a. Personnel shall have ≥5 years’ experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and generation equipment, systems, and devices, and b. Personnel shall have 1 of the following certifications/registrations:
c. Certification to at least Level III per ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians (ANSI), or
d. Certification to at least NICET ET-grade in Electrical Testing Engineering Technology.

10. Responsible ETA employee shall coordinate with City’s system integrators and operators.

D. As an alternative, ETA testing firms and technicians may be certified by electrical equipment Manufacturers and accepted by City for types of tests required on their equipment.

E. Testing firm shall use comprehensive report forms to document engineering appraisal and test results on equipment and products tested.

1. Upon testing completion, managing or supervising engineering representative shall sign forms prior to inclusion in final report.

F. Obtain written acceptance from City of testing firm prior to beginning testing.

1. Testing service or personnel may be accepted or rejected based on, but not limited to testing equipment intended to be used, qualifications of firm, completeness of testing forms, and experience and reputation of personnel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

B. Verify correct phase rotation of equipment before making connections at service entrance, transformers, or motors permanent.

1. Coordinate with Servicing Electrical Utility for phase rotations and Phase A, B, and C markings.

2. Create phasing diagram showing coordinated phase rotations with generators and motors through transformers.

3. Coordinate motor phasing inspections with City’s Representative.

4. Submit written report to City’s Representative for each motor verifying phasing has been checked and corrected.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 5 of 9

5. Install and insulate these connections temporarily while determining proper rotation.

6. Make permanent connections after rotation has been established and subsequent to completion of component insulation resistance and dielectric tests.

C. Schedule project to allow adequate time for electrical acceptance testing before electrical Work is energized.

1. Notify ETA when equipment becomes available for acceptance inspections and tests.

2. Coordinate Work to expedite inspections and tests.

D. Notify City’s Representative ≥7 Calendar Days before tests to allow City to witness testing.

1. Notify City again 24 hours before start of testing.

2. City will arrange for witnessing of tests and inspections by appropriate personnel when required by submitted Test and Inspection Plan, applicable codes and consensus standards, or when City deems appropriate.

E. Supply 1 set of following to ETA prior to final testing:

1. Preliminary short-circuit analysis

2. Preliminary coordination study and protective device setting table

3. Complete set of electrical Contract Documents plus pertinent Change Orders

4. Accepted construction submittal documents.

5. Site specific hazard notification and safety training.

6. Other information necessary for safe and accurate test and inspection of system.

F. Perform installation insulation-resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for electrical Work prior to tests performed by ETA.

G. Provide suitable and stable electrical power, and adequate lighting as required at each test site for ETA to perform specified acceptance testing.

3.2 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution requirements.

B. Conform to the following testing standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. California Electrical Code

4. NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) ATS standards a. NETA ATS 7.3.2 for low-voltage cable inspections and tests. b. NETA ATS 7.6.1.1 for low-voltage molded-case circuit breaker tests. c. NETA ATS 7.10 for instrument transformer inspections. d. NETA ATS 7.13 for grounding inspections and tests.

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. Other applicable ANSI, ASTM, and NEMA standards.

C. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

D. Test electrical equipment in 3 phases.

1. Pre-energization testing.

2. Equipment energized with no load.

3. Equipment energized under load.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 6 of 9 E. Perform calibration and setting checks with calibrated test instruments of at least twice that of accuracy of equipment, device, relay or meter under test.

1. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment.

2. Calibrations > 6 months old are not acceptable on field test instruments. a. Inspect test instruments for proper operation prior to testing.

3. Record serial and model numbers of instruments used on test forms.

F. Testing of installed equipment shall result in acceptable test results.

1. Equipment for which acceptable test data has not been submitted, or has been submitted but rejected, will be deemed as not meeting Contract Requirements.

G. Repair or replace items not passing tests.

H. Do not place equipment into service until required tests have been completed, test results have been evaluated and accepted, and recommended or required adjustments have been completed.

I. Provide supervision, labor materials, tools, test instruments, and equipment or services required to test, adjust, set, calibrate, and operationally check Work and components of various electrical systems and circuitry.

1. During checkout and startup of plant systems, provide skilled workers for checkout and troubleshooting as required by City’s Representative.
a. Since coordination with other crafts and contractors may be required, make workers assigned to checkout available outside normal working hours when necessary.

2. Provide services of factory-authorized representative on-site as needed to provide:
a. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of complete electrical system. b. Field testing and adjustment.
c. Instruction of City’s personnel in operation and maintenance.

J. Tests shall:

1. Provide initial equipment/system acceptance,

2. Provide recorded data for future maintenance and troubleshooting, and

3. Provide assurance each system component is installed satisfactorily and can be expected to perform and continue to perform its function with reasonable reliability.

K. Schedule tests and inspections as job progresses.

1. Allow City’s Representative to inspect materials, equipment, and workmanship.

2. After each electrical system installation is complete, perform tests to verify system is in proper working order and in accordance with Contract Documents, Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, and applicable codes.

3. Conduct tests in presence of City’s Representative.
a. Notify City’s Representative 7 days in advance of tests scheduled to be performed.

4. Perform insulation and ground resistance tests before operating tests.

L. Perform specified tests in presence of City’s Representative.

1. Furnish testing equipment and pay costs of tests, including replacement parts and labor necessary due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from test and correction of faulty installation.

2. Correct test failures in manner satisfactory to City’s Representative.

M. Perform insulation tests on electrical equipment at the following times and conditions:

1. Prior to energizing and/or placing into service.

2. When damage to insulation is suspected.

3. After repairs or modifications to equipment affecting insulation.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 7 of 9

4. When necessary to evaluate condition of equipment insulation, especially in high ambient moisture conditions, and to determine need for drying, cleaning, or other maintenance work or protection of such equipment.

5. Where lightning or other surge conditions are known to have passed through circuit.

N. Make openings in circuits for test instruments and place and connect instruments, equipment, and devices, required for tests.

1. Upon completion of tests, remove instruments and instrument connections and restore circuits to permanent condition.

O. Pay for tests, including expenses incident to retests occasioned by defects or failures of equipment to conform to Contract Documents.

P. Do not void equipment warranties or guarantees by testing.

1. Checks and tests shall be supplemental to and compatible with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and warranty requirements.

2. Where deviations are warranted, obtain Manufacturer's written acceptance prior to testing.

3. Where repairs, modifications, adjustments, or tests are to be made, notify City’s Representative and make such repairs, modifications, adjustments and tests in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

Q. Report to City’s Representative electrical equipment or systems determined to be damaged, or faulty.

1. Report to City, within 3 Working Days, Work or construction found defective based on acceptance tests or inspections by ETA.

2. Obtain acceptance from City’s Representative for corrective action and retesting.

3. Within 21 Calendar Days of direction from City, rework, repair or replace Work found defective based on acceptance tests or inspections.
a. Replace wiring and equipment found defective.

4. Retest Work failing acceptance tests or inspections.

R. Coordinate Work to expedite project schedule.

S. Field inspection and testing shall conform to NETA ATS and include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY

FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Conductors Installation Verify correctness of wiring by visually 1 inspection Contractor Contractor and Cables Examination comparing conductor connections with Section connection diagrams.
26 05 19 Inspect for physical damage and correct 1 inspection Contractor Contractor connections
Inspect for damage to insulation and
jackets
1 inspection Contractor Contractor
Inspect connections for high resistance 1 inspection Contractor Contractor Inspect compression-applied 1 inspection Contractor Contractor connections for correct cable match and
indentation
Low Voltage Refer to NETA ATS 7.3.2 1 inspection Contractor Contractor Cable
Field Tag
Verification
Verify proper identification numbering
and/or color coding for cables and
1 test each
phase of each
Contractor Contractor
wiring during continuity testing. circuit
Continuity Make individual circuit continuity checks 1 test each Contractor Contractor using electrical circuit testers. phase of each
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 8 of 9

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
circuit
High
Resistance
Test connections for high resistance
using low resistance ohmmeter
1 test each
phase of each
circuit
Contractor Contractor
High-Potential
Test
Conduct tests at 1000VDC for 2
minutes
Wire and cable shall withstand test high
voltage without breakdown and have
steady or decreasing leakage during
test
1 test each
phase of each
circuit
≤600VAC
Contractor Contractor
Insulation
Resistance
(Megger Test)
Conductors
≤600VAC
Conduct tests at 1000VDC for 2
minutes to measure insulation
resistance.

Resistance between conductors and
between each conductor and ground
shall be >10 megj and
recommendations of cable
Manufacturer
Measure insulation resistance for motor
feeders after disconnecting motors and
other equipment that might be
damaged.

Measuring from load side of conductors
or circuit breakers.
1 test each
phase of each
circuit
≤600VAC
before
energizing
Contractor Contractor
Uniform
Resistance
On circuits ≥#6AWG, verify uniform
resistance of parallel conductors.

Motors Motor
Inspection and
Tests
NETA ATS 7.15 All motors
≥¾hp
Contractor Contractor
Motor
Operating Test
– Insulation
Resistance,
Continuity,
Rotation
Perform routine insulation resistance,
continuity and rotation tests for
distribution and utilization equipment
including motors >¾Hp before and in
addition to tests performed by test
laboratory.

Supply suitable and stable test power
source to test laboratory at each test
site.

Test laboratory shall specify
requirements.

Notify test laboratory when equipment
becomes available for acceptance tests.

Perform testing in presence of City’s
Representative.

Test laboratory shall implement final
settings and adjustments on protective
devices and tap changes.

Test laboratory shall record test results
and upon completion, assemble and
certify final test report
All motors
≥¾hp
Contractor Contractor
Motor
Operating Test
- Current
Record current in each phase of each
motor ≥¾-hp and include in O&M
manual.

Repair or replace motor or motor-driven
equipment if current > motor nameplate
FLC value.

Each phase
of each motor
≥¾hp
Contractor Contractor
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 08 00- Commissioning of Electrical Systems - 9 of 9

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY

SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
System
Demonstration
Refer to Section 26 08 00. All electrical
systems
Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 1 of 11
SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install wiring devices including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building and electrical codes and standards.

B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Switches and
Receptacles
UL Listing UL Standards All wiring devices Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. California Building Code (CBC)

3. California Electrical Code (CEC)

4. California Fire Code (CFC)

5. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

6. Fed Spec W-C-596 Connector, Receptacle, Electrical, General Purpose, Duplex, General Grade and Hospital Grade, Grounding, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, 20 Amperes 125Voltsw, 50/60 Hertz, Box-Mount and Snap-In Mount

7. Fed Spec W-S-896E Switches, Toggle and Lock., Flush-Mounted (AC)

8. Fed Spec W-S-896F (1P-ZP-3W) Switch, Toggle, Single Unit with Wall Plates for Switches and Receptacles.

9. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

10. NEMA KS1 Enclosed Switches

11. NEMA WD1 General Purpose Wiring Devices.

12. NEMA WD6 Wiring Device Configurations.
10 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 2 of 11

13. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

14. UL 20 General Use Snap Switches

15. UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

16. UL 2682 Switch-Rated Plugs and Receptacles

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Material List Submit material list for each type of switch, receptacle, and cover plate.

Submit material list for each additional type of wiring device listed herein.

Indicate type, voltage rating, continuous current rating, conduit entry restrictions, enclosure type, dimensions, material, color, and Manufacturer.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Compliance Submit evidence of UL listing

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty Furnish 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of wiring devices.

1.8 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for basic wiring devices include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
20-AMP 125VAC RECEPTACLES
Receptacles NEMA 5-
20 20A-125VAC
Straight-Blade GFCI
Ground Fault Current
Interrupter Duplex -
Outlet
3M “GFI-2701” St Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
Arrow-Hart / Eaton GF5342 Series Beachwood, OH (216) 523-5000 Hubbell / Bryant GF5362 Series Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000 Leviton Manufacturing Co “6398-HGI” Melville, NY (800) 323-8920 Pass & Seymour / Legrand 2091-F Series West Hartford, CT (877) 295-3472 Schneider Electric Square D Andover, MA (888) 778-2733
Accepted equal

RECEPTACLE PLATES
Receptacle Plates –
“While-in-Use” Outdoor
Weatherproof (WP)
Crouse Hinds / Eaton Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454
General Electric Fairfield, CT (800) 626-2000
Hubbell / Bell Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000
Hubbell / Bryant RB5000 Series Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000 Pass & Seymour / Legrand West Hartford, CT (877) 295-3472 Sierra Electric Corporation San Francisco, CA (415) 752-2850 Accepted equal

SWITCHES
Wall Switches SPST Arrow-Hart / Eaton 1991 Series Beachwood, OH (216) 523-5000 General Electric GE5951-G Series Fairfield, CT (800) 626-2000 Hubbell / Bryant 1221 Series Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000 Leviton Manufacturing Co “Lev-Spec” 1221-2I Series Melville, NY (800) 323-8920 10 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 3 of 11

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Pass & Seymour / Legrand 20AC1 Series West Hartford, CT (877) 295-3472 Accepted equal
Wall Switches DPST Arrow-Hart / Eaton 1992 Series Beachwood, OH (216) 523-5000 General Electric GE5952-G Series Fairfield, CT (800) 626-2000 Hubbell / Bryant 1222 Series Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000 Leviton Manufacturing Co “Lev-Spec” 1222-2I Series Melville, NY (800) 323-8920 Pass & Seymour / Legrand 20AC2 Series West Hartford, CT (877) 295-3472 Accepted equal
Momentary Contact
Switches 20A
120/277VAC
Arrow-Hart / Eaton 1995 Series Beachwood, OH (216) 523-5000 General Electric GE5935-G Series Fairfield, CT (800) 626-2000 Hubbell / Bryant 1557 Series Shelton, CT (800) 288-6000 Leviton Manufacturing Co “Lev-Spec” 1257-I Series Melville, NY (800) 323-8920 Pass & Seymour / Legrand 1250 Series West Hartford, CT (877) 295-3472 Accepted equal

SWITCH PLATES
Switch Plates – Outdoor
Weatherproof (WP)
Appleton / Emerson “FSK-1VTS” or “FSK-1VS” Rosemont, IL (800) 621-1506 Crouse Hinds / Eaton “DS-181” or “DS185” Syracuse, NY (866) 764-5454 Hubbell / Bryant 7420 Series Milford, CT (800) 288-6000 Accepted equal
B. Acceptable Manufacturers for other wiring devices include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION

PUSH BUTTONS, HAND SWITCHES, AND INDICATING LAMPS
Push Buttons –
Outdoor and Damp
Locations
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation Bulletin 800H Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000 Schneider Electric Square D Class 9001 Type SK Andover, MA (888) 778-2733 Accepted equal
Selector Switches Schneider Electric Square D Class 9001 Type K Andover, MA (888) 778-2733 Accepted equal
Indicating Lights 120V Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation Type PSB120 Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000 General Electric “#CR104PLT22” Fairfield, CT (800) 626-2000 Schneider Electric Square D Class 9001 Type K Andover, MA (888) 778-2733 Accepted equal
RELAYS
Control Relays 24V
DPDT
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HA32Z24 Relay
700 HN 125, 10A, 300V Relay Base
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Accepted equal
Control Relays 24V
TPDT
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HA33Z24 Relay
700-HN126, 10A, 300V Relay Base
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Accepted equal
Timing Control Relays
24V DPDT
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HR52TZ24
Relay
700 HN 101, 10A, 300V Relay Base
700-HN131 Retainer Clip
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Accepted equal
Control Relays 120V
DPDT
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HA32A1 Relay
700 HN125, 10A, 300V Relay Base
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Schneider Electric Square D Class 8501 Type KP NR51 Andover, MA (888) 778-2733 Accepted equal
Control Relays 120V
TPDT
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HA33A1 Relay
700-HN126, 10A, 300V Relay Base
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Accepted equal
Timing Control Relays
120V
Allen-Bradley / Rockwell Automation 700-HR52TA17
Relay
700-HN126, 10A, 300V Relay Base
700-HN131 Retainer Clip
Milwaukee, WI (414) 382-2000
Schneider Electric Square D Class 9050 Type JCK with
socket
Andover, MA (888) 778-2733
10 DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 4 of 10

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Accepted equal
Time-of-Use Override
Switches
Eaton Cutler-Hammer 1025016H Switch
2 NO 10250T2 Contact Block
10250T15112H501 #501CH Key
Cleveland, OH (800) 386-1911
No exceptions
Intrinsically Safe
Barrier 24VDC
Contacts and Relays
Ingram Micro / HNA Two Channel Relay with Intrinsically Safe Inputs, “ISR2-24V-10K”
Irvine, CA (714) 566-1000
No exceptions
Intrinsically Safe
Barrier 120VAC
Contacts and Relays
Warrick / Gems Sensors, Inc Series 27A1DO Plainville, CT (855) 877-9666 No exceptions

TERMINAL BLOCKS
Control Wiring
Terminal Blocks 120V
DIN Rail Mounted
Phoenix Contact USK-4 or USK-10 with mounting rack Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388 No exceptions
Control Wiring
Terminal Blocks DIN
Rail Mounted
Phoenix Contact UK5N (for power and general
terminations)
Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388
Phoenix Contact UKK 5TG (for discrete I/O terminations) Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388 Phoenix Contact DOKD 1.5TG (for analog terminations) Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388 Phoenix Contact ST-SILED 24-UK 4 (for fuse-plug
terminations with indicator)
Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388
Phoenix Contact USLKG 5 (for ground terminations) Middletown, PA (800) 888-7388 No exceptions
Terminal Blocks 600V Electrovert / Wieland Oakville, ON (905) 829-8414 Ideal Industries, Inc. Sycamore, IL (815) 895-5181
Weidmuller USA Richmond, VA (800) 849-9343
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for basic wiring devices shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Receptacle Bases Polycarbonate High-strength
Color Brown
Switch Plate Type varies Toggle switch cover
Mounting Hardware Mounting Holes Countersunk
Mounting Screws Oval-head stainless steel screws of color matching plate Device Plates for
Receptacles and
Switches
General Plates shall fit snugly to box to which they are mounted.

On surface-mounted boxes, plates shall not extend beyond sides of box unless plates are free of sharp corners or edges.

Plate Type Refer to table below
Location Plate Type
Interior Metal (M)
Exterior (WP
Designation)
Weatherproof (WP)
Flush-Mounted
Boxes
Metal (M)
Surface-Mounted
Cast Metal Boxes
Cast Metal (CM)
Surface-Mounted
Sheet Metal Boxes
Metal (M)
Corrosive or Wet
Areas or Areas
Subject to
Hosedown
Polycarbonate
WEATHERPROOF (WP) PLATES (Use for outdoor applications) Receptacle Plates Stainless Steel Provide soft-gasketed “while-in-use” cover plates ≥ 0.040” thick DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 5 of 10

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Provide individual spring-loaded cap over each receptacle opening.

Stainless steel springs shall hold caps closed when receptacle is not in use.

Switch Plates Stainless Steel Provide gasketed plates ≥ 0.040” thick Provide provisions for padlocking switches “ON” and “OFF” Incorporate external operator for internal switch
C. Materials for other wiring devices shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Push Button
Enclosures
Glass Polyester Individually gasketed
Stainless Steel SAE Type 430 with satin finish
Individually gasketed
Terminal Blocks
120V Control Circuits
Molded Plastic
D. Unless otherwise shown, the following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505
Classification
Nonhazardous
Enclosures –
Outdoor or Wet
Locations
NEMA 250
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant, Stainless steel Enclosures Construction Lockable
IEC 60529
Enclosure Rating for
Underground
Equipment
IP 65 water jet
E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for basic wiring devices:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Receptacles
Ground Fault
Interrupter (GFI)
Duplex Receptacles
Conform to NEC Article 406
Conform to UL943, Class A
Molded composition encased specification grade receptacles fitting within standard size outlet box and accepting standard device plates.

Duplex receptacles for 120VAC – 1ɸ 3-wire circuit to be rated 125VAC, 20A NEMA Configuration 5-20R
UL Class A sensitivity - Trip at 5 milliamps after 0.025 seconds Rated and capable of interrupting 1000A without damage
Provide #12AWG copper TW-insulated pigtails
Parallel-blade grounding type for general-duty applications.

Provide front-mount test feature for periodic testing of GFCI circuit Use standard model where ground fault protection is required at individual location.

Use feed-thru model where ground fault protection is specified for “downstream” conventional receptacles.

Special-Purpose
Receptacles
Provide receptacles of type, rating, and number of poles shown or required for anticipated purpose.

Furnish matching plugs with cord-grip features for each special purpose receptacle.

Wall Switches General Conform to NEMA WD 1 and Fed Spec W-S-896E Conform to NEC Article 404
Molded specification grade for flush device boxes or surface-mount FD or FS cast outlet boxes
Totally enclose in composition case with insulated mounting yoke and DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 6 of 10

ITEM DESCRIPTION
side-wired, binding screw-type terminals.

Single pole, 2-pole, 3-way and 4-way as shown
Capable of control of 100% tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads. 120VAC or 277VAC
Lighting Switches
20A rating 120/277VAC
Quiet-operation toggle type
Weatherproof
Switches
Mount in cast metal box with gasketed weatherproof device plate.

Switch-Rated Plugs
and Receptacles
Design Conform to UL 2682
F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for other wiring devices:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Push Buttons Type Conform to NEMA ICS2
Provide contacts with NEMA designation rating A600
Heavy-duty oil-tight
Push-Buttons 30mm diameter round
ON or START pushbuttons colored black
OFF or STOP pushbuttons colored red
Enclosure:

Nonhazardous
Indoor Dry
Locations, including
MCC’s, control
panels, and control
stations
NEMA 12 to match panel in which mounted
Enclosure:

Indicating (Pilot)
Lights
Type Conform to NEMA ICS2
Heavy-duty of same type and rating
High-visibility LED type long-life (≥20,000 hours)
Replaceable from panel front
Color caps shall be interchangeable
Lamps 120VAC
Indicating lights shall be push-to-test type
Enclosure:

Nonhazardous
Indoor Dry
Locations, including
MCC’s, control
panels, and control
stations
NEMA 12 to match panel in which mounted
Enclosure:

Nonhazardous
Outdoor or Wet
Locations
NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant,
SAE Type 316 stainless steel to match panel in which mounted Provide required special gasketing to make complete station watertight DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 7 of 10

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Nameplate Provide extra-large laminated plastic nameplate or legend plate on enclosure front conforming to Section 26 05 10, showing function Selector Switches Type Conform to NEMA ICS2
Heavy-duty
Key-operated
Switches
Key switches alike
Coordinate key type with City.

Operating Levers Standard
Enclosure:

Nonhazardous
Indoor Dry
Locations, including
MCC’s, control
panels, and control
stations
NEMA 4/13 Watertight-Oiltight.

Enclosure:

Nonhazardous
Outdoor or Wet
Locations
NEMA 4X – Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant,
SAE Type 316 stainless steel to match panel in which mounted Provide required special gasketing to make complete station watertight Nameplate Provide extra-large laminated plastic nameplate on enclosure front conforming to Section 26 05 10, showing function
Relay Sockets Type Mounted via DIN rail and related hardware Terminal screws of “pressure screw” type
Rating Rated for 5A
Control Relays Type Conform to NEMA ICS2
Indicating type
Magnetic industrial control type with pilot light and 1 spare contact NEMA Class NEMA Class A300 (300VAC, rated for 10A inductive load continuous, 7200VA make, 720VA break)
Voltage 24VDC or 120VAC coils as shown.

Number of poles and pole arrangement as shown.

Contacts rated for circuit application shown
Contacts Multiple-contact, field-convertible plug-in type with dust cover and sockets.

If additional contacts are required, they shall be ganged.

Time Delay Relays Magnetic type with socket
Timer attachment adjustable over range shown
Latching
(Mechanically-Held)
Relays or ThermalDetector Relays
Magnetic type with mechanical latch attachment and unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts.

Use attachment allowing easy latching and unlatching.

Terminal Blocks
600VAC and less for
120VAC Control
Circuits
Design UL Listed CSA certified
Dead-front barrier type
Size to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes and types Location Provide for termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment panels or boxes
Rating 25A at 600VAC
Yoke Provide yoke to guide wire strands into terminal
Construct of high-strength, high-conductivity metal
Current Bar Shall provide dependable vibration-proof connection.

Shall provide direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.

Construct of high-strength, high-conductivity metal.

Terminals DIN rail-mounted screw-clamp compression box lug type allowing connection of wire with no special preparation other than stripping.

Provide terminals constructed so jumpers may be installed with no loss of space on terminal or rail.

Construct of high-strength, high-conductivity metal
Marking Strips Secure to molded sections.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 8 of 10

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Mark wire numbers or circuit identifications with pre-printed tags or permanent marking fluid
Spare Terminals Provide blocks with 25% spare termination points for City’s use following completion of installation
Intrusion Override
Switches
Switch 2-Position Key Operator, key removal left and right positions Contact Block 1 NC, 1 NO
Time-of-Use Override
Switches
Switch 2-Position Key Operator, key removal left position only Contact Block 2 NO
Intrinsically Safe
Barrier 24VDC
Contacts and Relays
Two Channel Relay with intrinsically safe inputs
Intrinsically Safe
Barrier 120VDC
Contacts and Relays
Required
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install wiring devices before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install wiring devices at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. Conform to the following installation standards:

1. California Administrative Code (CCR) Title 8 §5 Division of Industrial Safety, State of California Cal-OSHA Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders

2. Other applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

3. California Electrical Code Article 404 “Switches”

4. California Electrical Code Article 406 “Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs”

5. Other applicable building, fire, and electrical code requirements

6. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.

E. Install wiring devices to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer.

1. Unless otherwise shown, install wiring devices true and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Mount devices as follows:

1. Secure wiring devices, as shown, avoiding interference with other equipment.

2. Secure nameplates using screws, bolts, or rivets centered under or on device.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 9 of 10

3. Mount wiring devices as follows:

DEVICE MOUNTING

DISTANCE

FROM/TO NOTES

SWITCHES
Wall Switches 40” / 48” Finish floor or grade to center Set for switch operation in vertical position unless otherwise shown.

Safety Switches 54” Finish floor to center of operating handle
SeparatelyMounted Motor
Starter Switches
54” Finish floor to center of operating
handle
Push-Button or
Selector Switch
Control Station
48” Finish floor or grade to center

RECEPTACLES
Outdoor 18” Finish floor or grade to center of
outlet
Set duplex receptacles vertically unless
otherwise shown
Mount with grounding slots down except
where horizontal mounting is required, in
which case mount with neutral slot down

4. Do not mount devices outside limits stipulated in California Building Code §1136A

5. Mount weatherproof receptacles with hinge for protective cover above (not at side or below) receptacle opening.

6. Locate special-purpose receptacles where shown, installing and mounting per Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions and applicable codes.

7. Mount multi-outlet surface raceway systems where shown in accordance with Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

G. Ground devices, including switches and receptacles in accordance with NEC Article 250.

1. Ground switches and metal plates through switch mounting yoke, outlet box, and raceway system.

2. Ground flush receptacles and metal plates through positive ground connection to outlet box and grounding system.

3. Provide bonding jumper between grounded outlet box and receptacle ground terminal. a. Do not rely on yoke or screw contact for grounding.

4. Maintain ground to each receptacle by spring-loaded grounding contact to mounting screw, or by grounding jumper, both making positive connection to outlet box and grounding system.

H. Mount device plates as follows:

1. Secure device plates to appropriate switch or receptacle.

2. Install to alignment tolerance of ± 1/16”

3. Do not use sectional type device plates.

4. Install device plates over flush-mounted boxes so all 4 edges contact finished wall surface without use of mats, plaster or spackle fillings, or similar materials.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 26 27 26 Wiring Devices - 10 of 10

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Wiring
Devices
Installation Visual inspection of finished installation 1 inspection City City Switch
Operation
Operate each switch and verify load turns on
and off.
1 test each
switch
Contractor Contractor
Receptacles Test with circuit tester checking voltage,
polarity and grounded conditions.
1 test each
receptacle
Contractor Contractor
GFI
Receptacles
Test with circuits energized using portable GFI
receptacle tester capable of circulationg 7.5
mA current between “hot” line and ground
when plugged in to produce tripping of
receptacle
2 tests each
GFI
receptacle
Contractor Contractor
Ground Fault
Protective
Equipment

1. NEC 230.95C,

2. Use 3rd-party tester qualified for such
testing.

3. Submit written report of test.

4. Include copy of Manufacturer’s instructions
for test

5. Include statement service grounding
connections are properly installed for
ground fault system.

6. Include statement neutral conductors in
distribution system have been tested and
found to be ungrounded

7. Include description of testing method.

8. Include statement ground fault equipment
functioned properly when tested.

9. Document actual settings and trip times.

10. Provide label on panel above device with
certification and values.

11. Record current pickup level and time-delay
settings to which equipment was finally
adjusted.

12.Measure and record relay pickup current
and relay time-delay at 2 values above
pickup.

13. Test for correct system operation at 57%
rated voltage.

14. If relay pickup current is not within 5% of
Manufacturer's calibration marks or fixed
setting or relay timing does not conform
with Manufacturer's published time-current
characteristic curves, repair or replace
equipment and repeat test.
1 test before
energizing
Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
Literature
1 test City Contractor

END OF SECTION
DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 31 05 50 – Protecting Existing Utilities - 1 of 8 SECTION 31 05 50

PROTECTING EXISTING UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials and procedures to protect existing underground utilities.

B. Refer to General Conditions §5 “Existence of Utilities at Worksite” for additional Corona requirements for protecting existing utilities.

C. Utilities shall include but not be limited to the following, irrespective of ownership:

1. Pipelines (including irrigation lines),

2. Conduits

3. Transmission lines and overhead wires

4. Pipelines, conduits, and appurtenances of “Public Utilities” (as defined in Public Utilities Act of State of California),

5. Pipelines, conduits, and appurtenances of private industry, business, or individuals solely for their own use or their tenants,

6. Storm drains,

7. Sanitary sewers,

8. Culverts

9. Street lighting,

10. Traffic signal systems,

11. Duct banks,

12. Telephone cables,

13. Power lines,

14. Cable television,

15. Fiber optic lines,

16. Gas lines,

17. Petroleum lines,

18. Transmission cables,

19. Completely buried structures.

D. Take necessary measures to protect existing service laterals shown or not shown on Plans.

1. Assume each property contains a service lateral, whether shown or not shown on Plans.

2. Maintain laterals in service throughout construction.

3. Notify City of Corona Fire Department prior to shutdown of existing water main resulting in fire water service or potable water service interruption.

E. Refer to the following City of Corona standard details:

1. Standard Drawing 407 for water main crossing beneath existing utility.

2. Standard Drawing 407R for recycled water main crossing beneath existing utility.

3. Standard Drawing 419 for utility separation requirements.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 10 01: Summary of Work and Sequence of Construction B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 73 00: Execution
D. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 31 05 50 – Protecting Existing Utilities - 2 of 8 E. Section 33 01 19: Connecting to Existing Pressure Pipelines

1.3 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASCE 38 Standard Guidelines for Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Data

2. ASTM C143 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

3. ASTM C425 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings

4. ASTM C700 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated

5. California Administrative Code Title 22 §64572

6. California Government Code §4215-4216

7. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §402 “Utilities”

1.4 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

MOBILIZATION SUBMITTALS
Potholing Results Submit subsurface installation location data before starting Work at each location.

Notify City’s Representative in writing immediately after identifying potential physical conflicts between existing subsurface installations and Work.

Written notification shall include:

1.Date of notification

2.Method of locating

3. Type, size, material, and condition of subsurface installation

4.Horizontal location

5.Elevation (or depth from existing pavement or ground surface) of top and bottom of subsurface installation

6.Presumed owner

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL SUBMITTALS
Working Drawings for
Pipe and Utilities
Supports at Trench
Crossings
Required when utilities to be supported exceed 16” diameter or any transverse dimension.

Required when requested in writing by City's Representative Engineering
Calculations
Submit for pipe supports for existing utilities ≥24” in any dimension.

If concrete beams are used as supports, calculations shall take into account concrete strength based on Calendar Days elapsing between placing concrete and trenching beneath concrete beams.

Do not use 28-day strength unless concrete will be ≥28 days old when beam is placed in service.

B. Immediately notify City and Utility in writing if Contractor discovers:

1. Utility facilities not shown on Plans

2. Utility facilities in field locations different than shown on Plans.

C. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Working Drawings and Engineering Calculations.

1.5 Project Conditions
A. Design Engineer has attempted to show approximate location of buried utilities on drawings pursuant to Utility Quality Level B (QLC) as defined in ASCE 38.

1. These approximate locations are based on:
a. Record maps requested and received during design from utilities identified through an inquiry to Underground Service Alert and utilities.
b. Comments received from Utilities after their review of preliminary plans showing record drawing information.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 31 05 50 – Protecting Existing Utilities - 3 of 8 c. Field surveying and plotting of locations of readily visible surface features including manhole covers, valve covers, utility boxes, marking posts, pavement repair strips, and culvert end sections which might indicate presence of buried utilities. d. Field surveying and plotting of locations of utilities and buried structures marked on ground using ground penetrating radar and/or electromagnetic induction methods. e. Design Engineer’s professional judgment in correlating record map information to surveyed surface features
B. Where potholing has been done at spot locations to measure utility depths at those locations, pothole location and elevation is noted on Plans and shall be construed as accurate to ±0.5’ at point of potholing.

C. Utility locations on Plans are based solely on the above.

1. Plotted locations may not accurately reflect subsurface conditions.

D. Where Plans show underground utilities, assume every property parcel will be served by service connection for each utility type.

E. Prior to excavation, and prior to submittal of cut sheets for pre-engineered pipe, pothole and determine precise locations of all utilities which are:

1. Shown on plans

2. Identified by Underground Service Alert

3. Evident from readily visible surface features including manhole covers, valve covers, utility boxes, marking posts, pavement repair strips, and culvert end sections which might indicate presence of buried utilities.

4. Identified by Contractor by walking alignment using a reliable electronic pipe finder.

1. Hand dig foundations until clear of obstructions.

F. Power trench excavating equipment may only be used when and where all the following conditions exist.

1. Contractor has notified Underground Service Alert, and all known Utility Owners at least 2 Working Days before excavating.

2. A USA ticket number is available at construction site.

3. Contractor has thoroughly searched entire excavation route using a reliable electronic pipe finder and has pre-marked horizontal locations of conflicts.

4. Utilities shown on Plans have been potholed 1,300’ in advance of excavation as needed to verify locations.

5. No pipelines carrying gas, petroleum, explosives, hazardous materials, or other regulated contaminants are believed to be within 5’ of area to be excavated.

6. City's Representative is continuously present during excavation.

G. Power equipment specifically designed and manufactured for potholing existing utilities is exempt from above restrictions.

H. Hand excavation shall be used

1. In areas where buried gas, petroleum, explosives or hazardous material piping is known to be present

2. In areas where electrical, fiber optic or communications conduit is known to be present.

3. In first 5’ below existing grade where drilling or auguring equipment is used.

I. Pursuant to California Government Code §4215:

1. City will be responsible “for timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunk line utility facilities located on the site” if such utilities are not identified by City in Contract Documents.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 31 05 50 – Protecting Existing Utilities - 4 of 8

2. City will compensate Contractor for documented “costs of locating, repairing damage not due to the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated in the plans and specifications with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project necessarily idled during such work.”

3. “Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the project when such delay was caused by the failure of the public agency or the owner of the utility to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities.” J. Pursuant to California Government Code §4216, City’s liability shall be limited to reimbursement of costs due to utility facilities either not shown on Contract Documents, or shown on Contract Documents at locations ≥2’ vertically or ≥5’ horizontally in error from field locations, except where location of said utilities are evident from surface features or staked correctly by Underground Service Alert.

K. City will not indicate presence of existing service laterals or appurtenances when presence of utilities on Project site can be inferred from presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meters and junction boxes, on or adjacent to Work site.

1. City will identify main or trunk lines on Contract Documents.

L. Contractor shall make their own investigations, including exploratory investigations, to determine or verify locations and type of existing service laterals or appurtenances when their presence can be inferred from presence of other visible facilities.

M. Damage to underground utilities, pipelines or other facilities shown on Plans or identified by field staking or markings shall be immediately brought to attention of City's Representative and affected Utility and repaired at Contractor's expense.

1. Exact determination of location of these utilities, pipelines or other facilities shall be Contractor’s responsibility.

2. Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible for damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions or damage that may result from Contractor's failure to verify or locate utilities whose existence is indicated.

3. Costs incurred for protection of these lines or costs incurred due to presence of lines, whether or not they lie within trench prism, shall be borne in full by Contractor.

N. Costs, and Work to be done by Contractor in locating, removing, relocating, protecting or temporarily maintaining utility facilities not shown on Plans shall be covered by written Change Order conforming to provisions herein pertaining to changes in Work.

1. City may make changes in alignment and grade of Work to obviate need to remove, relocate, protect or temporarily maintain utility facilities or to reduce costs of Work involved in removing, relocating, protecting or temporarily maintaining such utility facilities.

2. Changes in alignment and grade will be ordered in accordance with provisions pertaining to changes in Work.

O. When it is necessary to remove, relocate, protect or temporarily maintain a utility other than

1. existing mains or trunk-line facilities not originally shown on Plans with sufficient accuracy to allow Work to proceed according to Contract Documents or;

2. existing service laterals or appurtenances whose presence cannot be inferred from presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meters and junction boxes, on or adjacent to Work site;
a. Contractor shall bear all expenses incidental to Work on utility or damage thereto.

P. Work on utility shall be done in manner satisfactory to Utility Owner.

1. Utility Owner will have option of doing such Work with their own forces or permitting Work to be done by Contractor.

DocuSign Envelope ID: C84981ED-FBC3-4385-B815-326A43071F1C 1-22-dp 31 05 50 – Protecting Existing Utilities - 5 of 8 Q. When pipe alignment or grade is obstructed by existing utility structures including conduits, ducts, pipe, or laterals, permanently support obstruction, or relocate, remove, or reconstruct in cooperation with Utility Owner.

R. No representations are made that obligations to remove, relocate, protect or temporarily maintain a utility and to pay cost thereof is not required to be borne by utility.

1. Contractor shall investigate, to find out whether or not said cost is required to be borne by Utility Owner.

S. Liquidated damages will not be assessed for damages in delay in completion of Work, when such delay was caused by failure of City, City's Representative, Design Engineer and Utility Owner to provide for removal or relocation of utility facilities.

1. Right is reserved to governmental agencies and to Utility Owners to enter at any time upon any street, alley, right of way or easement for purpose of making changes in their property made necessary by Work and to maintain and make repairs to their property.

1.6 Project Site Conditions
A. Refer to Section 01 10 01 for full list of project site conditions.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Work necessitated to protect utilities not shown on Contract Documents other than service connections whose existence may be inferred from shown utilities will be paid for as Extra Work.

Corona City CouncilAugust 6, 2025

Corona City Council
August 6, 2025